Home

MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User`s Manual

1. 10 15 Pixel Sub Sampling once roii eee ione edet tere eee e e iiaa ieii aa 10 16 Camera Settings oce ete perinde de ede ce cedet dece eet EP ce es Poe da e eee ce co Poe te ape ee 10 18 Camera Settings 3 Megapixel ssesssesseeeeee eene nennen enne ennemis 10 19 Focal Distante 10 20 Focal Distance 3 Megapixel ccccccscceceecenececeeeeeeeceeeeecesaeeceeceeaaeeceeeeeaaaeeeesesnsaeeeeeeseninaeees 10 21 Focal Distance Table Read Only cccccceeeceseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeaeeeeseaeeeeeeececaeseeeesseseeeeeeeeaees 10 22 Focal Distance Table Read Only 3 Megapixel ccccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeaeeeeeeseseeeess 10 23 Increment Focus Position oett cre Ie cotta E chi cece Desi epe eoe dra ipee deletes 10 24 Decrement Focus Position 2 2 I tee tede Ie e ced et De i qe decore Dre Brett edes 10 24 Increment Focus Position 3 Megapixel ssssssssssssseeseeeene ener 10 25 Decrement Focus Position 3 Megapixel sssssssseseeeeeee eene 10 25 Ill mination Brighitniess o ore ecd cn nein dece tes eco ihe Goes ae sc E ceres 10 26 pedi 10 27 Sieb EE 10 28 Morphological Pre Processing eei tenti ta ote coe e anten Podere te DX deine ica
2. sssssssssssssssssseeeeenneen nenne 11 2 Number of Active Indexes s corii tete rede fene resorte d cane Res quc eddpee d endet testable 11 3 Configuration Database Stats snore n a a a a E NA 11 4 Database Mode nette ene e Ree te EE Pes dae AAEE o dott oves 11 10 Save Current Settings to Configuration Database sssssssssssssseeeeeeenn 11 15 Load Current Settings from Configuration Database ccccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeseeaeeeeeeeeaees 11 16 Request Selected Index Settings essssssssssssssssessesee nennen nennen 11 17 Request All Configuration Database Settings sssssssssssssseeeenenes 11 18 This section concerns the various capture settings and processing settings that can be used to fine tune the MINI Hawk s performance in your application MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 11 1 Configuration Database Serial Commands Configuration Database Serial Commands Number of Active Indexes lt K252 number of active database settings database sort Configuration Database Status K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column width narrow margins background color symbology Save Current Settings to Database lt K255 index gt Load Current Settings from Database lt K255 index gt Request Selected Index Settings lt K255 index gt
3. Notes on Symbol Type The current DataBar Expanded status does not change if it is configured as Enabled Stacked and the database DataBar Expanded status is Enabled The current DataBar 14 status does not change if it is configured as Enabled Stacked and the database DataBar Expanded status is Enabled Data Matrix ECC level is determined by the current settings and not by database settings Therefore the database does not know which ECC level to enable and has no effect on current Data Matrix ECC settings 11 16 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Configuration Database Request Selected Index Settings Definition Returns configuration settings for the selected database index Serial Cmd K255 index Example K255 5 This command phrase returns the configuration settings for database index 5 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 11 17 Request All Configuration Database Settings Request All Configuration Database Settings Definition Returns configuration settings for all indexes in the Configuration Database Serial Cmd K255 Example K255 This command phrase returns the configuration settings for all 10 database indexes 11 18 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual E 72 Terminal Contents Terminal WindOw cccccssessesceceecececeeseessesseeeeeeceececeaauesseeeseeeeeeeseeaeeaueaseeeeceeeeeeseeaueaseeseeaseeeeeess 12 2 Li a REE ME
4. Automatically open generated report Print after saving Dn Qn ORE v Includelmage Bitmap JPEG JPEG Image Quality 100 4 499 Click the Include Image check box to output the captured symbol image with your saved report as a Overall Grade Based On Bitmap or JPEG image file Iv Symbol Contrast Iv Print Growth v Axial Nonuniformity Enables ESP to parse UII symbol data into the correct Iv Unused ECC fields and output order defined by the U S Department of Defense IUID initiative Iv Enable UII Parsing amp Default Settinas Revert Settings Returns all settings to Returns all settings to default most recent MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 8 7 Symbol Quality Separator Data Matrix Output Mode Symbol Quality Separator Data Matrix Output Mode Symbol Quality Separator applies to both Symbol Quality groups ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output and Microscan Symbol Quality Output Symbol Quality Separator Definition Inserts a separator between each enabled field of the symbol quality output Serial Cmd lt K708 symbol quality separator output mode Default SP space character Options Any ASCII character Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K708h 3C gt For gt lt K708h 3E gt For lt K708h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modif
5. 2 The imager will search camera settings to determine the best configuration for decoding symbol data A successful calibration will display a green frame around the symbol and the following message will appear Uploading all reader parameters After a moment the symbol data will be presented in the field below the image display window Calibrate by Serial Command Send lt CAL gt from a terminal program to begin calibration MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 1 11 Test Read Rate Step 9 Test Read Rate Read Rate indicates the number of successful decodes per second achieved by the imager Test Read Rate by EZ Button 1 To start the Read Rate test hold down the EZ Button about three 100 5200 seconds until you hear three Box STATUS 20 40 60 80 100 short beeps The 20 40 and i These LEDs represent the Ps o 60 percentage of Good Reads 60 LEDs will illuminate ae 40 per images captured While the symbol is being am 20 inspected the Read Rate LEDs i will indicate the corresponding read rate percentage on the back of the unit 2 To end the Read Rate test press the EZ Button and quickly release Test Read Rate by ESP 1 Click the Test button to start the Read Rate test and Stop to end it Decodes per Second Contrast If a symbol has been successfully decoded the symbol s data and related features will be presented in the field below the image displa
6. Options Enter data for 1 to 10 symbols any combination of ASCII text up to the maximum allowed For example to enter data for master symbol 9 after making certain that master symbol database size is enabled for 9 or more symbols send lt K231 9 data gt Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Caution If no data is entered the existing data will be deleted ESP 1 Open the Utilities menu 2 Set the number of master symbols you want to create in Master Symbol Database Size 3 Double click on each symbol number you want to set up and copy or type your data in the popup dialog and click OK Master Symbol Database Size lv Matchcode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index 5 Receive Reader s Database Send Database to Reader Master Symbol Data Master 3 Symbol Data Enter master symbol data here 4 When all your data has been entered click the Send Database to the Reader button MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 13 11 Request Master Symbol Data Definition Returns master symbol data for any enabled master symbols from 1 to 10 For example to request master symbol 5 enter K2312 5 The imager transmits master symbol 5 data in brackets in the following format 5 7 If no master symbol data is availab
7. Usage Matchcode allows the user to store master symbol data in the imager s memory compare that data against other symbol data and define how symbol data and or discrete signal output will be directed A master symbol database can be set up for up to 10 master symbols Note Matchcode will function with multiple symbols however if Matchcode Type is set to Sequential or if Triggering Mode is set to Continuous Read 1 Output the imager will behave as if Number of Symbols were set to 1 regardless of the user defined configuration Matchcode is used in applications to sort route or verify data based on matching the specific symbol in a variety of ways as defined in this section For example a manufacturer might sort a product based on dates that are embedded in the symbol Steps for Entering and Using Master Symbols 1 Set Triggering Mode to External or Serial 2 Choose the method of symbol comparison that fits your application 3 Define the output you want to achieve with your matchcode setup a Symbol data output b Discrete output 4 Select the number of master symbols you want to create 5 Decide which of 4 ways you want to enter your master symbol s a Use ESP to type master symbol data directly b Send a serial command with symbol data in the form of M231 master symbol data c Send a lt G gt Read Next Symbol as Master Symbol command d Enable the New Master Pin command and activate the discrete input to
8. lt K714 status message gt Frame Information lt K734 output frame number output coordinates gt LED Configuration lt K737 LED mode ISO IEC 16022 grade Image Output lt K739 image output mode communication port file format JPEG quality gt Target Flood LEDs EZ Trax Output lt K750 green flash LED status target pattern LED status green flash duration gt lt K757 comm port image mode image format JPEG quality object info output grade output gt Database Identifier Output lt K759 status separator gt EZ Button lt K770 global status default on power on load Configuration Database save for power on gt EZ Button Modes lt K771 single beep two beeps three beeps four beeps gt Trend Analysis Output 1 Trend Analysis Output 2 lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes per trigger threshold gt lt K781 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes per trigger threshold gt Trend Analysis Output 3 lt K782 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes per trigger threshold gt Diagnostic Output 1 lt K790 unused 1 service unit gt Diagnostic Output 2 lt K791 unused 1 service unit gt Diagnostic Output 3 lt K792 unused 1 service unit gt ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 1 K800 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold out
9. 77 6416 3 104 386 250 38 7 79 6424 3 112 386 250 39 6 81 6424 3 112 386 250 40 6 84 6432 3 120 386 250 41 6 86 6448 3 136 386 250 42 5 88 6464 3 152 386 250 43 5 90 6476 3 164 386 250 44 5 93 6488 3 176 386 250 45 5 95 6506 3 194 386 250 46 6 97 6524 3 212 386 250 47 5 100 6538 3 226 386 250 48 6 Rating List Best Rating 6527 Focus 386 Shutter 250 Gain 48 Rating 6517 Focus 386 Shutter 250 Gain 47 Rating 6505 Focus 386 Shutter 250 Gain 46 Rating 6491 Focus 386 Shutter 250 Gain 45 Rating 6476 Focus 386 Shutter 250 Gain 44 Rating 6462 Focus 386 Shutter 250 Gain 43 Rating 6449 Focus 386 Shutter 250 Gain 42 Calibration PASSED 4 18 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Calibration Additional Notes about Calibration The following conditions apply to the imager s calibration process Some of these items are noted at various points throughout this section or in other sections of the imager s documentation 1 The Illumination Brightness parameter lt K514 gt is not part of the calibration pro cess 2 Background Color lt K451 gt is calibrated If Window of Interest Framing is enabled the WOI will be set to full frame when calibration begins If WOI Framing is disabled the current WOI configuration will be used for the Search Pass If Symbol Type is enabled for calibration Autodiscriminate then Interleaved 2 of 5 Range
10. Caution If you ve selected an index which already has existing data that data will be copied over by new decoded data when you use this command Request New Master Status Usage Informs the user when a new master symbol is pending and which position it is in Definition Returns the position in the master symbol database that will be loaded on the next read Serial Cmd lt NEWM gt The imager returns lt NEWM next master to load Once a symbol has been read and loaded the status will be cleared and the response will be lt NEWM 0 gt See also New Master Pin in Chapter 9 Matchcode MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 13 13 Delete Master Symbol Data Definition You can directly delete the master symbol data by serial command or by ESP ESP 1 Click the Utilities button to access the master symbol 2 Click the Master Database tab and double click the symbol number you want to delete 3 Delete text and click OK Serial Cmd lt K231 master symbol number To delete a master symbol enter the database number and a comma but leave the data field empty For example to delete master symbol 5 send the following lt K231 5 gt The command is entered with a blank master symbol data field which tells the imager to delete the selected master symbol from the database 13 14 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Utilities Firmware Firmware by ESP Firmware Update Firmware Verific
11. Definition When enabled system data will be routed to the Auxiliary Port This includes decoded data and diagnostic warning messages When disabled system data will not be routed to the Auxiliary Port Serial Cmd lt K146 aux port system data status Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 3 18 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Communications Daisy Chain Autoconfigure Usage For quick setup and configuration of your daisy chain network Definition The command to autoconfigure the daisy chain is sent to the primary imager and the software responds in the following ways Counts the number of secondary readers in the daisy chain Assigns an internal ID number 1 n to each secondary reader where the first secondary reader is number 1 the primary reader s ID being a O Propagates the communications settings and the relevant operating modes of the primary imager to the host and auxiliary ports of each secondary reader Resets each secondary reader Confirms that each secondary reader has acquired the new settings Serial Cmd lt K150DAISY gt Note All secondary readers must be set to Serial for Daisy Chain to function When setting up a daisy chain operation perform the following steps 1 Set the primary imager the one connected to the host to Serial This sets all the imagers in the chain to Serial when the command is executed Before Autoconfigure you must set the primary imager to
12. Entering Control Characters in Serial Commands To enter control characters within a serial command hold down the Ctrl key while typing the desired character Example To enter a carriage return and line feed M J enter K141 1 CNTL m CNTL j gt MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual A 15 Communications Protocol Appendix D Communications Protocol Communications Protocol Command Table Protocol Command Control Characters Hex aber Entered in menu or Effect of Command Mnemonic displayed on menu A Value serial command RES D 04 Reset REQ E 05 Request EOT D 04 Reset STX B 02 Start of Text ETX C 03 End of Text ACK E 06 Acknowledge NAK U 15 Negative Acknowledge XON Q 11 Begin Transmission XOFF S 13 Stop Transmission A 16 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Appendices ACK NAK Data Flow Examples Setup 1 RES 0x00 disabled REQ 0x00 disabled STX 0x00 disabled ETX 0x00 disabled ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC disabled Transfer 1 HOST TX lt K141 0 gt IMAGER_TX ACK Transfer 2 HOST_TX K141 IMAGER TX ACK IMAGER_TX lt K141 0 gt HOST_TX ACK Error Condition Transfer 1 IMAGER_TX symbol data HOST_TX NAK host rejects IMAGER TX symbol data resend data HOST TX ACK transaction complete Transfer 2 HOST TX lt K141 gt IMAGER_TX ACK IMAGER_TX lt K141 0 gt timeout reached time
13. MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Communications Half Duplex Mode Usage Useful when the user wants symbol data displayed on an auxiliary menu close to the imager Definition In Half Duplex Mode all auxiliary port data and symbol data is sent directly to the host Symbol data is displayed on the auxiliary port menu at the same time the data is sent to the host Data Originating from the Auxiliary Port Auxiliary port data to the host is ignored if the imager is in a polled mode Aux 2 Host Port Auxiliary port data or read data is sent to the host whenever it is received gt e Auxiliary port data is not echoed Auxiliary port data to the host is always sent imager without a preamble or postamble Data Originating from the Imager Data is transmitted to the auxiliary port at the same time it is transmitted to the host Host Aux MUR Port Data transmission conforms with all parameters specified in the configuration menu e g Preamble v Postamble End of Read Cycle TX l Data Originating from the Host acid All host data is echoed to the auxiliary port in unpolled mode Host Aux Port 4 Imager Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d Options 2 Half Duplex MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 3 13 A
14. QR Code is capable of handling numeric alphanumeric and byte data as well as kanji and kana characters Up to 7 366 characters numeric data can be encoded using this symbol Therefore less space is required to encode the same amount of data in a QR Code symbol than in a conventional symbol lowering the cost of labelling Three Position Detection Patterns in the symbol make omnidirectional ultra fast reading possible QR Code has error protection capability Data can often be restored even if a part of the symbol has become dirty or damaged lt K480 status gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 6 7 Micro QR Code Micro QR Code Usage Used in various applications that require higher data density than that provided by standard QR Code Some application examples are automotive inventory vehicle ID and mobile phone URL encodation Definition Micro QR Code is a 2D matrix symbology that comes in 4 different symbol sizes the largest capable of encoding 35 numeric characters Serial Cmd lt K459 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6 8 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Symbologies Code 39 Usage Code 39 is considered the standard for non retail 1D symbology Definition An alphanumeric symbology with unique start stop code patterns composed of 9 black and white elements per character of which 3 are wide Serial Cmd lt K
15. There will be a wait of a few seconds and then the evaluation results will appear in the Symbol Quality view in a format similar to the one shown below Data Matrix Grading Report ISO IEC Symbol Contrast 80 lA 16022 Print Growth 8 26 Dx 517 Dnon 585 A Dy 54 Dmax 65 Dmin 35 Axial Nonuniformity 8 88 avg 13 2 Yaug 13 1 Unused ECC 108 Eact a Emax 18 GRADING Cell Dan 8x Total Read line Capture Tine 65 ns Locate Tine Decode Time Pixe 1s Elenent ECC Lev 288 Matrix Size 14x14 Quiet Zone PASS If you want to view the results in a report format click the Save Report button The report will be output in the format you chose in the Preferences dialog Save Report 8 16 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual EN 9 Vatchcode Contents Maichcode M o eio REP RERUM 9 2 Matchcode Serial Commands miiia inani a e a nnns essa a nennen 9 3 Overview of Matcheode i E a tc e a a aa a e 9 4 Matcheode Type toe ERE DERE Eee EO ER REREIRER I GRE bad on RERBA ES Ee Tort ea 9 5 Match Replace meiden nies uis 9 10 Mismatch Replace esteso zack ree certe RE esie ut qe ete piden basti o odo egeo utet 9 11 New Master Plume irt tette tata tte titer tei tn tens a Eee t 9 12 This section explains the MINI Hawk s matchcode output functions and the master symbol database setup MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 9 1 Matchcod
16. Bar Code Options Advanced Auto Sync When entering a view that supports Auto Sync do the following Always Ask Before Auto Sync Occurs Receive Settings from the Reader C Send ESP Settings to the Reader C Do Not Send or Receive Settings M Show Target Pattern During Locate Send XON with Autoconnect Show Target Pattern During Calibrate IV Ask to Save ESP File when Quitting M Use Higher Quality Images Connect to readers via TCP IP MV Open Image after Save Iv Use Default Storage Location Default Settings OK Cancel The Auto Sync options at the top of the Advanced tab allow you to determine whether Auto Sync will be enabled automatically in sections of ESP where it is used or if it will ask you before it enables Auto Sync functions Always Ask Before Auto Sync Occurs If you check this option box you are then able to determine what specific Auto Sync functions will be enabled Receive Settings from the Reader will automatically send the imager s settings to ESP when Auto Sync is enabled Send ESP Settings to the Reader will automatically send all imager configuration settings chosen in ESP to the imager Do Not Send or Receive Settings creates a condition in which Auto Sync will not automatically send imager settings to ESP or send ESP settings to the imager Show Target Pattern During Locate Allows you to determine whether the blue LED target pattern will be on or off during the Locate routine Show Target Patte
17. Definition Serial Cmd Default Options This setting selects the communication port through which the image file will be transferred to the host lt K739 image output mode communication port file format JPEG quality Host 0 Host 1 Auxiliary 2 USB File Format Definition This setting selects the format of the image file to be output Note If JPEG is the chosen image file format the resolution of the image will be determined by the setting in the JPEG Quality field Serial Cmd lt K739 image output mode communication port file format JPEG quality gt Default JPEG Options 0 Bitmap 1 JPEG 2 Binary JPEG Quality Definition This setting determines the quality of JPEG image compression The user may select a value from 1 lowest to 100 highest Serial Cmd lt K739 image output mode communication port file format JPEG quality Default 90 Options 1 to 100 percent 7 38 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual I O Parameters Image Output Example The following example assumes that the imager is set to output on No Read and that it is in a rapid capture mode of 3 captures Number of Symbols Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Read Cycle Result Output Frame Number of Symbols Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Read Cycle Result Output Frame Number of Symbols Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Read Cycle Result Output Frame 4 No Read No Read No Read No
18. Firmware Verification App Code Request Checksum Request Part Number by Serial Command When you send lt gt a request for all product part numbers the imager returns lt b BOOT_P N gt lt a APP_P N gt lt p PROFILE_P N gt When you send a a request for the application code part number the imager returns lt a APP_P N gt When you send lt b gt a request for the boot code part number the imager returns lt b BOOT_P N gt When you send lt p gt a request for profile module part numbers the imager returns lt p PROFILE_P N gt 13 16 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Request Checksum by ESP You can send a request to the imager for part numbers checksums boot code and application code 1 Click the Firmware tab 2 From the pulldown selection box to the left of the Request Checksum button make your selection Utilities 3 Select the code type to see its checksum displayed in the text field to the right of the Request Checksum button Firmware Verification App Code Request Part No App Code Request Checksum Request Checksum by Serial Command When you send a request for all available firmware checksums the imager returns lt b BOOT_CHECKSUM gt lt a APP_CHECKSUM gt lt p PROFILE_CHECKSUM gt When you send lt a gt a request for the application code checksum the imager returns lt a APP_CHECKS
19. Press Start to autoconnect so If your communications port is not the default COM use the dropdown menu to change your port Connecting Select the COM Port COM1 Once you have chosen the correct 9600 N 7 1 port click Start to connect Stop When you are connected you will see the green connection indicator in the status bar at the bottom right of your screen BEXNNERED Point to Point COMI 115 2K N 8 1 Important If you are using a USB model you must connect the device to the host computer before powering on Otherwise the unit will not be recognized as a USB device 2 12 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Using ESP Autoconnect cont If your RS 232 host settings cannot be changed to match the imager s settings Click Connect on ESP s menu toolbar and then select Connection Wizard When the connection dialog appears check the Force Connect box and click the Connect button Baud RS 232 C USB Parity Stop Bits Data Bits Eight E Port com Y Aus Port In Use Force Connect Auto Connect Cancel MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 2 13 View View The View menu allows you to move quickly between interfaces without using the icon buttons on the App Mode toolbar It also allows you to access the Bar Code Dialog Parameters Setup Terminal Bar Code Dialog es In
20. Separator Status UPC EAN Usage Allows users to distinguish between the main and Supplemental symbols Definition A character can be inserted between the standard UPC or EAN symbology and the supplemental symbology when Supplementals is set to Enabled or Required Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6 24 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Symbologies Separator Character UPC EAN Note If Separator Character has been changed to any other character and you wish to redefine the separator as a comma you will need to use ESP Usage As required by the application Definition Allows the user to change the separator character from a comma to a new character Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default comma Options Any ASCII character Note Whenever Separator Character is defined as a comma sending a lt K473 s gt command will return the current settings including the separator character comma which appears after the separator status comma Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K473h 3C gt For gt lt K473h 3E gt For lt K473h 2C gt See ASCII
21. Standard Density 005 0 13 mm 0075 0 19 mm 3 2 81 mm 1 8 to 3 5 46 mm to 89 mm 0075 0 19 mm 010 0 25 mm 4 2 107 mm 1 6 to 5 0 41 mm to 127 mm 010 0 25 mm 015 0 38 mm 6 8 173 mm 1 4 to 7 5 36 mm to 191 mm 020 0 51 mm 030 0 76 mm 9 5 241 mm 1 0 to 11 0 25 mm to 279 mm A 4 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Appendices FIS Options MINI Hawk High Performance Imager 3 Megapixel MINI Hawk 3 with Learn Mode Micro Density RS 232 422 485 5VDC FIS 6300 2013G MINI Hawk 3 with Learn Mode Standard Density RS 232 422 485 5VDC FIS 6300 2014G MINI Hawk 3 with Learn Mode Micro Density USB I O 5VDC FIS 6300 2015G MINI Hawk 3 with Learn Mode Standard Density USB I O 5VDC FIS 6300 2016G High Resolution MINI Hawk with Learn Mode High Res Standard Density RS 232 422 485 5VDC FIS 6300 4007G MINI Hawk with Learn Mode High Res High Density RS 232 422 485 5VDC FIS 6300 4008G MINI Hawk with Learn Mode High Res Ultra High Density RS 232 422 485 5VDC FIS 6300 4009G MINI Hawk with Learn Mode High Res Standard Density USB I O 5VDC FIS 6300 4010G MINI Hawk with Learn Mode High Res High Density USB I O 5VDC FIS 6300 4011G MINI Hawk with Learn Mode High Res Ultra High Density USB I O 5VDC FIS 6300 4012G High Speed MINI Hawk with Learn Mode High Speed Standard Density RS 232 422 485 5VDC FI
22. This declaration is based upon information obtained from sources which Microscan believes to be reliable and from random sample testing however the information is provided without any representation of warranty expressed or implied regarding accuracy or correctness Microscan does not specifically run any analysis on our raw materials or end product to measure for these substances The information provided in this certification notice is correct to the best of Microscan s knowledge at the date of publication This notice is not to be considered a warranty or quality specification Users are responsible for determining the applicability of any RoHS legislation or regulations based on their individual use of the product Regarding RoHS Directive 2011 65 EU Microscan produces Monitoring and Control Instruments as well as Industrial Monitoring and Control Instruments as defined within the directive Microscan has developed and is implementing a RoHS2 compliance plan with the intention of bringing all active products listed in our current marketing literature within full compliance as per the directive deadlines Key milestones for the transition plan are as follows Complete internal product audit and supplier transition by July 2013 Initial Monitoring and Control Instruments RoHS2 compliant products available by July 2014 Initial Industrial Monitoring and Control Instruments RoHS2 compliant products available by July 2015 All new
23. lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding Default Standard Options 0 Standard 1 Application Application Record Separator Status Code 128 EAN 128 Definition When enabled an EAN separator will be inserted into the output between fields whenever an EAN conforming symbol is decoded and EAN output formatting applies Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 6 13 Code 128 EAN 128 Application Record Separator Character Code 128 EAN 128 Definition This is an ASCII character that serves as an EAN separator in formatted EAN output Serial Cmd KA74 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding Default Options Any ASCII character 7 bit Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K474h 3C gt For gt l
24. time between seventh and eighth captures Image Storage K244 image storage type image store mode IP Timeout K245 image processing timeout MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 5 3 Read Cycle Setup Read Cycle Setup Setting up read cycle and triggering parameters will involve a series of decisions based on your particular application as follows 1 Select the number of symbols to be read in a single cycle The MINI Hawk can read multiple symbols in a single image frame 2 Decide on the trigger type to be used if serial choose a serial character if external choose either Level or Edge Designate how the read cycle should end Timeout New Trigger Last Frame Select Capture Mode Continuous Mode or Rapid Mode Select Number of Captures if in Rapid Capture Mode Set the Time Before First Capture and Time Between Captures if any o0 WwW Note The imager s camera captures images at a rate of about 16 second based on a 1280 x 1024 image The capture rate increases as frame sizes decrease Note If you need to set up your MINI Hawk for use with EZ Trax software see Setting Up the Imager for EZ Trax 5 4 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Read Cycle Multisymbol Usage Multisymbol is commonly used in shipping applications where a shipping symbol contains individual symbols for part number quantity etc This feature allows on trigger to pick up all the
25. ACK HOST_TX V IMAGER TX K100 8 0 0 12 X timeout reached IMAGER TX timeout reached IMAGER_TX timeout reached IMAGER_TX timeout reached IMAGER_TX T A 20 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Appendices Polling Mode Data Flow Examples Setup 1 Address 0x01 translates to Poll Req 0x1C Unit Select 0x1D RES 0x04 REQ 0x05 STX 0x02 ETX 0x03 ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC disabled Transfer 1 HOST TX RES 0x1D REQ Select Unit 1 to receive data IMAGER TX Ox1D ACK Unit responds with its address HOST TX STX T ETX IMAGER TX Ox1D ACK Unit responds with its address HOST TX RES Terminate Transfer 2 Transfer 2 HOST TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data IMAGER TX 0x1C STX T 00000 ETX HOST TX ACK IMAGER TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 Starting with a RES ensures a clean transaction without leftovers from the previous transaction Error Condition 1 HOST TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data IMAGER TX Ox1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX HOST_TX Nothing Host should ACK here timeout reached IMAGER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached IMAGER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached IMAGER TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached IMAGER_TX RES Terminate Transfe
26. COM DE You are now ready to begin using the new COM Port MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual A 31 MINI Hawk Image Output Appendix J MINI Hawk Image Output This section explains how to extract download a video captured image from a MINI Hawk Y Modem Method The easiest download method is to issue the op 9 command to get a list of available images then initiate a download sequence using a Y Modem utility or protocol sequence The user will need to issue the lt op 9 gt first to get an image list response from the imager Then initiate the Y modem download sequence with the lt uy path filename gt command where path filename is one listed from the lt op 9 gt response Retrieve File List To receive a file list of all images stored in the reader send the command lt op 9 gt The reader will respond with a list similar to the one below lt op 009 0 good 0 640x480_gs bmp 00003 00090 pending 1 640x480 gs bmp 00003 00057 pending 2 640x480 gs bmp 00003 00057 pending 3 640x480 gs bmp 00003 00058 pending 4 640x480 gs bmp 00003 00057 In this example there are 5 images in memory good 0 640x480 gs bmp pending 1 640x480 gs bmp pending 2 640x480 gs bmp pending 3 640x480 gs bmp pending 4 640x480 gs bmp The image will be stored in a directory describing the result of the image None assumes root Root Directory saved Saved Directory Good Symbol was decod
27. Configurable Output 1 K810 output on output state pulse width output mode Configurable Output 2 K811 0utput on output state pulse width output mode Configurable Output 3 K812 output on output state pulse width output mode Symbol Quality Symbol Quality Separator Data Matrix Output Mode K708 symbol quality separator data matrix output mode ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output K709 symbol contrast print growth axial non uniformity UEC gt Microscan Symbol Quality Output K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone Static Validation Report lt VAL gt Matchcode Matchcode Type K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Number of Master Symbols lt K224 number of master symbols gt New Master Pin lt K225 status gt Enter Master Symbol Data lt K231 master symbol number master symbol data gt Request Master Symbol Data A 12 lt K231 gt for all or lt K231 master symbol number gt MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Delete Master Symbol Data Appendices lt K231 master symbol number Match Replace lt K735 status match replacement string Mismatch Replace K736 status mismatch replacement string Camera
28. Default 1 Options 1 to 64 Note The range of maximum number of captures is dynamic This range is dependent on the maximum image size in the system A full size image 1280 x 1024 reduces the maximum number of images to 6 The smaller the image size the greater the maximum number of captures Once the image size is reduced to small enough dimensions the maximum number of captures will be capped at 64 If a user enters a maximum capture value greater than that allowed the value will be limited to the number of system images This command also affects the number of stored images allowed in the system If the maximum number of captures is selected the number of stored images allowed will be 0 Rapid Capture Mode Definition In Rapid Capture Mode one or multiple captures as many as 32 can be taken at an interval specified by the time between captures parameter In this mode the only limiting time factor is integration and transfer timing Serial Cmd lt K241 capture mode number of captures rapid capture mode Default Timed Capture Options 0 Timed Capture 1 Triggered Capture 5 18 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Read Cycle Timed Capture Usage Timed Rapid Capture is useful in fast moving applications in which symbols are only in the field of view for a short time and precise timing is required Definition In Timed Rapid Capture decoding occurs independent of and simultaneous with capturing thus al
29. For gt lt K222h 3E gt For lt K222h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a more detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Note If No Read messages are disabled and there are No Reads occurring separators will only be inserted between symbol data outputs MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 5 5 Trigger Mode and Filter Duration Trigger Mode and Filter Duration Trigger Mode Definition Serial Cmd Default Options The Trigger is the event that initiates a read cycle Note When calibrating the imager or testing read rate the current trigger setting will be disregarded K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter trailing edge trigger filter Continuous Read 0 Continuous Read 1 Continuous Read 1 Output 2 7 External Level 3 External Edge 4 Serial Data 5 Serial Data and Edge Continuous Read Usage Definition Serial Cmd Continuous Read is useful in testing symbol readability or reader functions It is not recommended for normal operations In Continuous Read trigger input options are disabled the imager is always in the read cycle and it will attempt to decode and transmit every capture If a single symbol stays within read range for multiple read cycles its data will be transmitted repeatedly until it leaves the read range The imager sends replies to serial commands that require responses when symbol data is tr
30. In 13 Chassis ground c 14 Output 2 TTL a Out 15 NC a Can sink 10 mA and source 10 mA b The default is activated by connecting pin 8 to ground pin 4 c Chassis ground Used to connect chassis body to earth ground only Not to be used as power or signal return Direct Input Output Diagrams Trieger Input Example Trigger New Master Inputs 3 to 24V rated 1mA 5VDC Scanner 5VDC MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Pin 9 trigger Source V 324v Source Signal Appendices Output Examples Outputs 1 2 3 5V TTL compatible can sink 10mA and source 2mA Target Scanner Pins 7 11 14 outputs Target PLC PC Scanner Light Stack etc Pins 7 11 14 outputs Optoisolator Trigger Inputs for IC 332 Trigger inputs can be fully isolated pulses as NPN circuits f Mimmum Maximum 4 5V 3 0mA V 23mA OV OmA 2 0V 1mA Pulse Width 48puS EE MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Electrical Specifications Input Examples Fully Optoisolated NPN Source PNP Source Isolated Scanner trigger only Isolated Scanner Not Optoisolated NPN Source Non isolated Scanner PNP Source Non isolated Scanner trigger only Input Power Power ground IN A 8 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Appendices New Master Pin Scanner Internal 5V pull up User
31. MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 7 17 EZ Button Default on Power On Definition When enabled if the EZ button is held down on power on the imager will default to customer defaults and save for power on This is the same as sending a Zrc command Serial Cmd lt K770 global status default on power on load Configuration Database save for power on gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Load Configuration Database Definition Allows the user to load the Configuration Database with calibration results When the user performs a calibration using the EZ button all the database entries are moved down one index and the results of the calibration are saved to index 1 The results will be saved as current settings as well Serial Cmd K770 global status default on power on load Configuration Database save for power on gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Save for Power On Definition If enabled after calibration is complete all parameters will be saved for power on Serial Cmd lt K770 global status default on power on load Configuration Database save for power on gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 7 18 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual EZ Button Modes I O Parameters Usage Useful for performing multiple repetitive tasks at the work site Definition Allows the user to pr
32. MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 13 19 Imager Status Requests Imager Status Requests Status Byte The imager responds to a status request lt gt with a two character hex value such as lt 22 gt To determine status 1 Look up the binary conversion in the table below For example the first hex 2 would be 0 0 1 0 in binary as read from binary digits 3 through 0 the second hex 2 is also 0 0 1 0 as read from binary digits 7 through 4 2 Next enter your binary values from the table below in the Binary column next to the appropriate bit Bit Binary Imager Status 0 Command error detected Command received Communication error detected Flash sector unprotect failure Host Aux port buffer overflow ojoloj Imager is in a read cycle 3 Under Binary interpret 1s as true and Os as not true For example bit 1 has a 1 in the Binary column indicating Command Received Bit 5 is also a 1 indicating that the Imager is in a read cycle lt K gt All Status Request This is the fastest way to learn the imager s current configuration Sending this request will return the current settings of all commands starting with the lowest K command value and ending with the highest K command value lt K gt All Descriptor Status Request This request will return all current descriptors for every K command starting with the low
33. Serial Data or Serial Data or External Edge triggering mode must be enabled for Serial Trigger Character to take effect Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt K201h 3C For gt lt K201h 3E gt For lt K201h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values 5 12 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Read Cycle Start Trigger Character Non Delimited Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Useful in applications where different characters are required to start a read cycle A single ASCII host serial trigger character that starts the read cycle and is not enclosed by delimiters such as lt and gt Non delimited Start characters can be defined and will function according to the trigger event When defining Start trigger characters the following rules apply n External Edge the imager looks only for the Start trigger character and ignores any Stop trigger character that may be defined n External Level the Start trigger character begins the read cycle and the Stop trigger character ends it Note that even after a symbol has been decoded and the symbol data transmitted the imager remains in External Level trigger read cycle until a Stop character is received n Serial Data or External Edge trigger mode either a Start trigger character or
34. The user can also send serial commands to the imager via ESP s Terminal window MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 3 1 Communications by ESP Communications by ESP Parameters ESP Values Communications Parameters R5232 422 Host Port R5232 Auxilliary Port ai li USB HID Report Status Communication tab Preamble Disabled p gt Postamble Enabled Response Timeout 12 LRC Status Disabled Aux Port System Data Status Disabled eum To open nested options single click the 3 2 To change a setting double click the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Communications Communications Serial Commands Host Port Connections lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits Auxiliary Port Connections K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain ID status daisy chain ID RS 422 Status lt K102 status gt Host Port Protocol lt K140 protocol address gt Preamble lt K141 status preamble characters gt Postamble lt K142 status postamble characters gt Response Timeout lt K143 response timeout LRC lt K145 status gt Auxiliary Port System Data Status lt K146 aux port system data status ACK NAK Options lt K147 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt Polling Mode Options Autoconfiguration Daisy Ch
35. because there is typically no reliable way to verify that a symbol was missed Note If Trigger Mode is set to Continuous Read 1 Output the imager will behave as if Number of Symbols were set to 1 regardless of the user defined configuration MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 5 7 Trigger Mode and Filter Duration External Level Object S Initiate Read Cycle gt lt q Object 1 moving in front of the Object _ Y which initiates the read cycle m eal q The same object moving out of seter AD another change in the trigger detector beam causes a change in the trigger state End Read Cycle the detector beam causes state which ends the read cycle Usage Definition Serial Cmd This mode is effective in an application where the speeds of the conveying apparatus are variable and the time the imager spends reading each object is not predictable It also allows the user to determine if a No Read has occurred External Level allows the read cycle active state to begin when a trigger change of state from an external sensing device is received The read cycle persists until the object moves out of the sensor range and the active trigger state changes again lt K200 2 gt Important Level and Edge apply to the active logic state Negative or Positive that exists while the object is in a read cycle between the rising edge and the falling edge Rising edge is the tr
36. grade output gt Default 90 Options 1 to 100 percent 7 46 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual I O Parameters Object Info Output Definition If a symbol is decoded during an image capture the symbol type and other supplementary symbol information is also included Serial Cmd lt K757 comm port image mode image format JPEG quality object info output grade output Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Grade Output Definition Symbol quality information will be output in the form of an abbreviated identifier for each read cycle Serial Cmd lt K757 comm port image mode image format JPEG quality object info output grade output gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 7 47 Configuring EZ Trax Output 7 48 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual ENNIO Symbol Quality Contents Symibol Quality by ESP ecce dee rr Re ERES E e e rre Ere 8 2 Symbol Quality Serial Commands sss ene enne enne nennen nnne 8 3 Overview of Symbol Quality sese eene enne nennen nnne nene 8 4 Symbol Quality Separator Data Matrix Output Mode seem 8 8 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output nennen enne 8 10 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output by ESP ssssssssseseeeeee eene 8 12 Microscan Symbol Quality Output ssssseeeenenen nee mere nrneen nennen e
37. row depth column width narrow margins background color symbology gt Default Disabled Disabled When Symbology is disabled the database uses the current Symbology setup to determine active symbologies Any Symbology Add 1 All symbologies except Pharmacode are enabled while this database index is being used Data Matrix Add 2 If enabled Data Matrix will be active for this database index Important The ECC level must be configured using the Data Matrix command lt K479 gt If no ECC level has been configured the imager will not decode Data Matrix symbols QR Code Add 4 If enabled QR Code will be active for this database index Code 128 Add 8 If enabled Code 128 will be active for this database index MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 11 7 Configuration Database Status Code 39 Add 16 If enabled Code 39 will be active for this database index Codabar Add 32 If enabled Codabar will be active for this database index Code 93 Add 64 If enabled Code 93 will be active for this database index Interleaved 2 of 5 Add 128 If enabled Interleaved 2 of 5 will be active for this database index UPC EAN Add 256 If enabled UPC EAN will be active for this database index PDF417 Add 512 If enabled PDF417 will be active for this database index MicroPDF417 Add 1024 If enabled MicroPDF417 will be active for this database index BC412 Add 2048 If enable
38. symbol data is sent without the check character Serial Cmd lt K481 status check character output fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 10 Options 1 to 64 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 6 15 Interleaved 2 of 5 Interleaved 2 of 5 Usage 2 5 has been popular because it is the most dense symbology for printing numeric characters less than 10 characters in length however Microscan does not recommend this symbology for any new applications because of inherent problems such as truncation Definition A dense contimuous self checking numeric symbology Characters are paired together so that each character has five elements two wide and three narrow representing numbers 0 through 9 with the bars representing the first character and the interleaved spaces representing the second character A check character is highly recommended Important You must set Symbol Length in order to decode l 2 5 symbols unless Range Mode is enabled Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Character Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Usage This option is not typically used but it can be enabled for additional security in applications where the host requires redundant check character verifica tion Definition An error correcting
39. to make Ctrl F2 the keystroke to send a trigger s character select F2 then in the Ctrl row enter trigger m character and click OK Then whenever the Ctrl F2 p keystroke is pressed the trigger character will start the Su read cycle Note The F1 key is reserved for opening ESP Help and the F3 key is reserved for the Find Next function Change Font Allows you to modify the font used for decode data received from the imager on the Terminal Screen Change Echo Font Allows you to modify the font used for command characters typed into the Terminal view Enable Echo Allows you to enter command characters in Terminal Display Incoming Data Even When Not in Focus When Display Incoming Data Even When Not in Focus is enabled data from the imager will continue to appear in the terminal even when ESP is not the top window MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 2 7 Menu Toolbar Preferences Bar Code Options Tab ESP Preferences General Terminal Bar Code Options Advanced Sizing Information Bar Width fis Mils Default Settings The Bar Code Options dialog allows you to set the size of user created symbols Sizing Information Sets the bar width or module width in mils or thousandths of an inch of user created symbols Example A bar width of 18 is 0 018 inches 2 8 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Using ESP Preferences Advanced Tab Preferences General Terminal
40. 10 31 Morphological Operation and Operator Size ssssssssssssseeeeeenn 10 32 This section provides adjustment parameters for the physical controls of the camera image acquisition database settings and image diagnostics MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 10 1 Camera and IP Setup by ESP Camera and IP Setup by ESP Click the Setup button to bring up the Camera Setup menu Parameters ESP Values Camera Setup Camera Settings Gain 20 Shutter Speed 1000 Illumination Brightness High Focus Distance 4 00 Camera Features Sub sampling Disabled AEC AGC Mode Disabled AECJAGC Brightness 30 Window of Interest Top 0 Left 0 Height 480 width 752 To change a setting Image Processing Settings double click the Image Processing Timeout 5000 setting and use your cursor to scroll Background Color white through the options Mirrored Image Regular Image Morphological Preprocessing Disabled Erode m Operator Size To open nested options single click the 10 2 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Camera and IP Setup Camera and IP Setup Serial Commands Window of Interest K516 row pointer column pointer row depth column width Focal Distance K525 focal distance Increment Focus Position lt K525 gt Decrement Focus Position K525 Focal Distance Table Read Only lt K526 number of fo
41. 13 2 Read R al amp uinci enim eta dns eee etae uva oe due ard o EB vue v e e ce a CER Yea Pa de n o s CV ag 13 4 PODER TTL TTL 13 5 DEVICE CONN e 13 7 Differences from Defa ll 5 25 eter tret to e era or aeo ra To aed eva raura cea pa FRE e een eara va roa PER e 6v 13 8 Mast r Database cec Vti eet a ck FEX ra EE ao esee Fe Ei FE dae Feo ede Cea a ERR eV de va Fa ER Fa up rere Cg E 13 9 num TIE TTD T TILES 13 15 De fault RESCU SAVE sass icccs leita trier arr ob e erra src hae ea Erie Eae vy Vae duo ra Foot Een ua va a ERE aas 13 18 Imager Status Requests inciter eee a cete ae ee Had d er da oo ree gea Lo E vue gea dpa aedi Eas 13 20 Lear Operation Siscie P 13 22 Other Operational Serial Commands 0 cccceececeeceeeeeeeee cette eeceeee eee eeeeaeeeeseseeaeeeeseeneaeeeeeeeeea 13 23 Utility commands are generally commands that are performed during imager operations to check or determine read rates or to perform miscellaneous operations on imager hardware Serial utility commands are not prefaced with a K and a numeric code nor do they require an initialization command lt A gt and lt Z gt They can be entered from within any terminal program or from ESP s Terminal or Utilities windows MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 13 1 Serial Utility Commands Serial Utility Commands Note For a list of all K commands see Serial Configuration Commands on page
42. 69 5 ms 20 sec 65 0 ms 30 sec 62 5 ms 40 sec 58 0 ms 60 sec 55 0 ms 80 sec 45 5 ms Distortion is corrected by shifting image rows in the direction opposite the symbol s movement on the line The shift value of subsequent image rows is then increased These shift values depend on the speed of the line The faster the line speed the greater the required shift values More data loss is incurred at faster line speeds The image shown below was captured at a line speed of 40 inches per second and it shows virtually no inherent skew The black area of the image is unusable since the information was lost as the symbol moved through the imager s field of view The amount of data loss can be reduced by decreasing the image height or the row size of the image which reduces the amount of travel represented during the image frame read out Note that the amount of distortion will not be changed because the object will have traveled the same distance during the read out of the target area MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 10 29 Skew Correction Symbol Direction Definition This feature specifies the direction the symbol is moving through the imager s field of view or which side of the field of view the symbol will enter first Note Image captures of symbols entering the field of view from above or below cannot be skew corrected Serial Cmd lt K537 line speed symbol directio
43. 72 227 250 45 5 42 4280 2 72 217 250 45 5 42 4280 2 72 209 250 45 6 42 4280 2 72 200 250 45 6 46 0 0 0 601 250 45 0 Inside Focus 200 Outside Focus 572 Center Focus 386 4 16 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Calibration Medium Pass The theory behind Medium Pass is to develop a readable range from which to dial in a decoded symbol Running Medium Pass Prog Rating Decode Quality Focus Shutter Gain Locate 51 4216 2 8 386 250 0 5 53 8436 4 20 386 250 4 4 55 6336 3 24 386 250 8 4 57 8448 4 32 386 250 12 4 59 8456 4 40 386 250 16 5 61 8464 4 48 386 250 20 4 63 8472 4 56 386 250 24 5 65 8488 4 72 386 250 28 5 67 8504 4 88 386 250 32 5 69 8512 4 96 386 250 36 5 71 8528 4 112 386 250 40 6 73 8584 4 168 386 250 44 5 75 8644 4 228 386 250 48 5 Rating List Best Rating 8606 Focus 386 Shutter 250 Gain 48 Rating 8581 Focus 386 Shutter 250 Gain 44 Rating 8553 Focus 386 Shutter 250 Gain 40 Rating 8527 Focus 386 Shutter 250 Gain 36 Rating 8505 Focus 386 Shutter 250 Gain 32 Rating 8488 Focus 386 Shutter 250 Gain 28 Rating 8476 Focus 386 Shutter 250 Gain 24 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 4 17 Initiating Calibration Fine Tune Pass The theory behind Fine Tune Pass is to dial in a decoded symbol based on the range supplied by the Medium Pass Running Fine Tune Pass Prog Rating Decode Quality Focus Shutter Gain Locate
44. A1 2001 A2 2003 ESD EN 61000 4 2 Radiated RF Immunity EN 61000 4 3 ENV 50204 EFT EN 61000 4 4 Conducted RF Immunity EN 61000 4 6 EN 55022 1998 A1 2000 A2 2003 for Class A products Class B Radiated Emissions and Class B Conducted Emissions The MINI Hawk has been tested by an independent electromagnetic compatibility laboratory in accordance with the applicable specifications and instructions x MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Introduction Statement of RoHS Compliance All Microscan readers with a G suffix in the FIS number are RoHS Compliant All compliant readers were converted prior to March 1 2007 All standard accessories in the Microscan Product Pricing Catalog are RoHS Compliant except 20 500013 01 and 98 000039 02 These products meet all the requirements of Directive 2002 95 EC European Parliament and the Council of the European Union for RoHS compliance In accordance with the latest requirements our ROHS Compliant products and packaging do not contain intentionally added Deca BDE Perfluorooctanes PFOS or Perfluorooctanic Acid PFOA compounds above the maximum trace levels To view the document stating these requirements please visit http eur lex europa eu LexUriServ LexUriServ do uri CELEX 32002L0095 EN HTML and http eur lex europa eu LexUriServ LexUriServ do uri OJ L 2006 372 0032 0034 EN PDF Please contact your sales manager for a complete list of Microscan s RoHS Compliant products
45. Automatic Gain Control Ambient Light Light which is present in the environment of the imaging front end of a vision system and generated from outside sources This light unless used for actual illumination will be treated as background Noise by the vision system Analog A smooth continuous voltage or current signal or function whose magnitude value is the information Analog to Digital Converter A D Converter or ADC A device that converts an analog voltage or current signal to a discrete series of digitally encoded numbers signal for computer processing Application Specific Integrated Circuit ASIC An integrated circuit that is customized for a particular kind of use rather than general use All vision system elements including firmware can be integrated into one ASIC Architecture The hardware organization of a vision system designed for high speed image analysis ASIC See Application Specific Integrated Circuit Aspect Ratio The ratio between the height and width of a sensor or display Found by dividing the vertical number of pixels height by the horizontal number of pixels width leaving it in fractional format Automatic Gain Control AGC Adjustment to signal strength that seeks to maintain a constant level regardless of the distance between a reader and symbol Auxiliary Port RS 232 connection to an auxiliary terminal or device for remote viewing Blooming A situation in which t
46. Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 6 25 UPC EAN Supplemental Type UPC EAN Usage As required by symbology used in application Definition Allows the user to select 2 character or 5 character supplements or both Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default Both Options 0 Both 1 2 characters only 2 5 characters only Both Either 2 character or 5 character supplementals will be considered valid 2 Characters Only Only two character supplementals will be considered valid 5 Characters Only Only five character supplementals will be considered valid Format UPC E as UPC A UPC EAN Definition When disabled the imager will output the version E symbols in their encoded 6 character format When enabled the imager will format the symbol as either a 12 character UPC A symbol or an EAN 13 symbol depending on the state of the EAN status parameter This formatting reverses the zero suppression that is used to generate the symbol in the UPC specification Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6 26 MINI Hawk High Performa
47. Cmd Default Options Number of Master Symbols allows you to select 1 to 10 master symbols for the master symbol database K231 master symbol database size Note You must follow this command with a save command A or lt Z gt 1 1 to 10 Master Symbol Database Size v Matchcode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index 5 E i Receive Reader s Database Send Database to Reader Set Master Symbol Database Size here Caution Since the total number of characters available for the master symbol database is 3000 changes to the Master Symbol Database Size will re allocate the number of characters available for each master symbol and could cause existing master symbols to be deleted except master symbol 1 unless it also exceeds the size limitation The table below specifies the maximum number of characters available to each symbol according the number of master symbols defined from 1 to 10 Master Symbol Maximum Master Symbol Maximum Number Characters Number Characters 1 3000 6 500 2 1500 7 428 3 1000 8 375 4 750 9 333 5 600 10 300 13 10 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Utilities Enter Master Symbol Data Usage Allows you to enter master symbol data for any enabled master symbol index number 1 to 10 provided the total number of characters does not exceed the maximum allowed Serial Cmd K231 master symbol number master symbol data
48. De A Dnom 58 x i A Dy 544 Dmax 65 z i Dnin 35 Axial Nonuniformity 8 88 Kavg 13 2 Yavg 13 1 Unused ECC 188 x Eact n Emax 18 GRADING x Cell Damage BU Total Read Time 99 ms Capture Time 65 ms Locate Time 27 ms Decode Time 7 ms Pixels Element 13 1 ECC Level Ba Matrix Size 7 14x14 Quiet Zone PRSS If you want to view the results in a report format click the Save Report button The report will be output in the format you chose in the Preferences dialog Save Report 8 12 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Symbol Quality Microscan Symbol Quality Output Percent Cell Damage Data Matrix Only Definition When this feature is enabled the cell damage percentage is appended to data output Serial Cmd K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Total Read Time Definition The time that transpires between the image capture and the output of the decoded data including locate time When enabled the total read time is appended to the symbol data Serial Cmd lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled a Total Read Time applies globa
49. Definition Specifies the length of the user defined character string that will be inserted This function is limited to 4 characters per output index so multiple indexes must be entered in order to insert longer character sequences For example if you wish to insert a 10 character sequence in user defined output you would need three commands with consecutive index numbers where the first two character sequence lengths were 4 and the third was 2 Serial Cmd lt K741 output index length hex string Default 0 disabled end of format cell array Options 1 to 4 Hex String Definition Specifies a character string that represents ASCII characters to be inserted in the database entry Two hex characters are required for every ASCII character to be inserted in the user defined output string These two characters comprise the hex base 16 value of the ASCII character For example if you wanted to enter the three character sequence Hi you would enter 3 for the length of the string and a hex sequence of 486921 for the ASCII sequence to be inserted 48 H 69 i 21 Important Each pair of hex characters represents one ASCII character Hex character pairs range from 00 to FF Since you are limited to 4 ASCII characters per insertion per database entry you are likewise limited to 8 hex characters per insertion per database entry Serial Cmd lt K741 output index length hex string Default NUL 00 in hex Options 00 to F
50. Disabled Image Mode EZ Trax Output Disabled Comm Port Host Both Noread and Good Read Image Format Disabled Determines which JPEG Quality Good Read read cycle condition Object Info Output Noread triggers image file Grade Output Both Noread and Good Read output Mismatch Image Format EZ Trax Output Enabled Comm Port Host Image Mode Disabled Compressed m JPEG Quality g Selects the format of the image Object Info Output Compressed output file Grade Output Disabled i MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 7 43 Configuring EZ Trax Output JPEG Quality EZ Trax Output Enabled Comm Port Host Sets the amount of JPEG image Image Mode Disabled compression A value of1 represents Image Format Comoressed the highest compression and lowest image quality and 100 represents JPEG Quality 30 1 100 Z the lowest compression and highest Object Info Output Disabled image quality Grade Output Disabled Object Info Output EZ Trax Output Enabled Comm Port Host Image Mode Disabled Image Format Compressed If a symbol is decoded during JPEG Quality an an image capture the symbol type and other supplementary Object Info Output PP symbol information is also Enabled Grade Output EZ Trax Output Enabled Comm Port Host Image Mode Disabled Image Format Compressed JPEG Quality 30 Symbol quality information Object Info
51. E ae i Opes aa Storage Tempurature 50 to 75 C 58 to 167 F m BM Humidity up to 90 non condensing ins a tain CE Mark General Immunity for Light Industry EN 55024 1998 A1 2001 A2 2003 15 3 9 mmj 1 5 38 mm Radiated and Conducted Emissions of ITE I 1 8 45 7 mm Equipment EN 55022 1998 A1 2000 A2 2003 for Class A products Light Source Type High output LEDs Light Collection Options Progressive scan square pixel Software adjustable shutter speed electronic shutter MINI Hawk 3 2048 x 1536 pixels QXGA MINI Hawk HR 1280 x 1024 pixels SXGA MINI Hawk HS 752 x 480 pixels WVGA SMOD 5 mm depth Front 2X M2x0 4 ues 16 4 06 mm depth UU Sex ALH 20 5 1 mm Base v Connector Type 3 ft cable terminated with High Density 15 pin i D D Sub socket connector or USB Type A connector 51 12 9 mm Indicators LEDS Read Performance Power Read Status 26 6 6 mm Ld 1 25 31 8 mm Green Flash Good Read Blue Target Pattern Symbol locator Beeper Good Read match mismatch No Read serial command confirmation on off Discrete I O Trigger Input 5 to 28VDC rated 16 mA New Master 5 to 28VDC rated 16 mA Default 3 3V rated 0mA 3 3V Outputs 1 2 3 5V TTL compatible can sink 10 mA and source 10mA Optional I O Optoisolated with IC 332 accessory Communication Protocols Standard Interfaces RS 232 RS 422 USB Sym
52. ECC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle Static Validation Report VAL MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 8 3 Overview of Symbol Quality Overview of Symbol Quality Information about symbol quality and timing can be appended to symbol data by enabling specific evaluation parameters The order in which these values are appended corresponds directly to the order in which they appear in ESP s Symbol Quality tree control Symbol Quality parameters are separated into ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output and Microscan Symbol Quality Output Total Read Time Symbol Quality Separator and Output Mode are common to both ISO IEC 16022 and Microscan Grading Parameters Symbol Quality Global Total Read Time Enabled lt q Symbol Quality Separator SP Output Mode Grade Data Matrix ISO IEC 16022 Parameters Symbol Contrast Enabled lt g Print Growth Disabled The enabled Symbol Axial Non uniformity Disabled Quality parameters are Unused ECC Disabled appended to symbol data Grading output in the order that they Percent Cell Damage Disabled appear in the tree control Capture Time Enabled ag Locate Time Enabled 8 Decode Time Enabled g Pixels Per Element Enabled 8 ECC Level Disabled Matrix Size Disabled Quiet Zone Disabl
53. K202 external trigger state gt End of Read Cycle lt K220 end of read cycle read cycle timeout gt Minimum Good Reads lt K221 minimum good reads gt Multisymbol K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator gt Start Trigger Character lt K229 start character gt Stop Trigger Character lt K230 stop character gt Capture Mode lt K241 capture mode number of captures rapid capture mode gt Capture Timing lt K242 time before first capture time between first and second captures time between seventh and eighth captures gt Image Storage lt K244 image storage type image store mode gt IP Timeout Symbologies lt K245 image processing timeout Narrow Margins Symbology ID lt K450 narrow margin status symbology identifier status gt Background Color lt K451 background color gt Composite lt K453 symbology status separator status separator gt Aztec Code K458 status A 10 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Micro QR Code Appendices lt K459 status gt Postal Symbologies lt K460 postal symbology type POSTNET status PLANET status USPS4CB status POSTNET allow B and B fields Australia Post allow 0 FCC gt Code 39 K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Codabar lt K471 status star stop m
54. Mcd C oA ES Full Image Width m The amount of rolling shutter distortion depends upon the amount of time it takes to read out an image row and the line speed at which the target object is traveling Therefore one way to reduce skew is to speed up the read out time per pixel row This can be accomplished by reducing the column size of the image sensor For example if the column size is reduced from 640 to 320 the time it takes to read out a row of pixels from the sensor is reduced by half and image skew will be reduced by a factor of 2 As the column dimension of the image is reduced the effect of rolling shutter distortion is reduced by the same factor Important Reducing the row size of the image has no effect because it does not change the row read out time Skew will remain the same regardless of row size 10 28 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Camera and IP Setup Line Speed Definition This feature is used to specify the line speed of the application and it determines how much distortion correction to apply When enabled this feature will cause the overall decode rate to increase significantly The timing information in the table below is for a full megapixel image 1280 x 1024 Note Processing time decreases with larger image sizes Serial Cmd lt K537 line speed symbol direction Default 0 Disabled Options 0 to 80 inches per second Line Speed Additional Processing Time 10 sec
55. Mode Status Interleaved 2 of 5 K472 will be enabled This allows variable length Interleaved 2 of 5 symbols to be decoded If an Interleaved 2 of 5 symbol is decoded during calibration then code length 1 will be set to the decoded symbol length at the end of calibration Otherwise the symbol lengths will be restored to their original configurations Pharmacode is not calibrated All symbol types that were enabled before calibration will still be enabled after calibration For example if Data Matrix ECC 200 was enabled before calibration and the calibration routine was performed on a Code 128 symbol then after calibration is completed both Data Matrix ECC 200 and Code 128 will be enabled The calibration process does not modify the global Composite status lt K453 gt The global Composite status must be configured properly before calibration If the user requires calibration of a stacked symbology lt K482 gt lt K483 gt or lt K484 gt that symbology must be enabled and configured appropriately before calibration UPC Supplementals will be disabled during calibration The Search process will use the configurable Window of Interest for image captures However when the search process is completed the WOI will be reduced to include only the symbol of interest and some additional boundary area MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 4 19 Additional Notes about Calibration 4 20 MINI Hawk High Perf
56. ON and allow it to enter read cycles Enable PDF Information Sending a1 will cause PDF417 data to be prefaced with information consisting of ECC level ECC level n number of rows n rows number of columns n columns number of informative code words n info code words and the number of data characters n data bits Send a1 again to disable PDF Information MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 13 7 Differences from Default Differences from Default Clicking the Differences from Default button will cause ESP to check all stored configuration settings and compare them to default settings All settings that are different than default will appear in the left column shown below and descriptions of those settings will appear in the right column Click this button for a list of ESP Click Generate Barcode to bring up the Bar Code configuration settings that are Dialog Then create configuration symbols containing different than default settings the configuration commands of your choice I Read Rate Counters Device Control Differences Master Database Firmware Differences from Default Generate Barcode lt K200 4 gt Mode Serial Data lt K201h 52 gt Character Delimited Fi lt K220 1000 gt Read Cycle Timeout 1000 lt K470 0 gt Code 39 Disabled lt K525 435 gt Focus Distance 435 lt K529 1 0 2 gt Focus Position Calibrate Symb
57. Polarity Usage Allows users to select the trigger polarity that will be used in their application Definition Determines the active state of the trigger signal applied to the cable input of the imager Serial Cmd lt K202 active state Default Positive Options 0 Negative 1 Positive MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 5 11 Serial Trigger Serial Trigger Usage Definition Allows the user to define the trigger character and delimiters that start and stop the read cycle A serial trigger is considered an online host command and requires the same command format as all host commands It must be entered within angle bracket delimiters lt gt or in the case of non delimited triggers it must define individual start and stop characters Serial Trigger Character Delimited Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Allows the user to define the trigger character that initiates the read cycle A single ASCII host serial trigger character that initiates the read cycle A delimited trigger character is one that either starts or ends the read cycle and is enclosed by delimiters such as lt gt K201 serial trigger character Space bar Any single ASCII character including control characters except NUL 00 in hex an existing host command character or an on line protocol character Control characters entered on the command line are displayed in the menu as mnemonic characters Note
58. Q Mobile Hawk Quadrus Verifier Description MINI Hawk 1 v Show this dialog at startup Skip EZ Mode 1 Click the button showing the MINI Hawk 2 Click OK Note You can also double click the MINI Hawk button to make your selection 3 Click Yes when this dialog appears 2 J Would you like to connect to the MINI Hawk Switch Model Note If you need to select another model later click the Switch Model button near the top of the screen or use Model New Model in the menu toolbar 1 6 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Quick Start Step 6 Select Protocol and Connect Choose the connection protocol you are using and click Connect Baud f 15 2K bed Parity None m Stop Bits One m Data Bits Eight v Port com m M Aux Port In Use RS 232 C USB Force Connect Auto Connect Connect Cancel Once you select your communications mode follow the simple prompts to establish your connection MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 1 7 Select Protocol and Connect cont Step 6 Select Protocol and Connect cont When you are connected you will see the green connection indicator in the status bar at the bottom right of your screen RS 232 EOMME Point to Point Comi USB BBNNENENENN use f your RS 232 connection attempt fails click the Autoconnect button select a different communications por
59. Read Frame 1 1 No Read No Read Good Read Good Read None 2 No Read No Read Good Read Symbol 1 No Read Frame 1 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 7 39 Database Identifier Output Database Identifier Output Usage Useful in keeping track of which database entries read which symbols Serial Cmd lt K759 status separator gt Default 0 Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Output Status Disabled When this command is disabled no database identifier information will be output Enabled When this command is enabled the imager will append a two digit number and the characters DB to the data output following the separator for each symbol decoded using Configuration Database For example if the separator is an underscore character and the second database entry reads a symbol encoded with data capture during the read cycle the symbol data output will be data capture DBO2 If the database is not active no identifiers will be attached to output Separator Usage The separator character separates the symbol data from the database identifier Serial Cmd lt K759 status separator gt Default space Options Any ASCII character Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt K759h 3C For gt K759h 3E For lt K759h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASC
60. Request All Database Settings lt K255 gt Database Mode lt K256 switch mode frame count ime image process looping image dimensions MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Configuration Database Number of Active Indexes Usage Useful for applications that require several different complex imager configurations to be applied sequentially Multiple database indexes allow you to concatenate configuration profiles and to perform more complex operations than would be possible with only one set of configuration parameters Definition This feature allows you to set the number of database records groups of settings that will be used automatically during the read cycle If Number of Active Indexes is set to 0 only the current imager settings will be used not database entry settings Serial Cmd lt K252 number of active indexes database sort Default 0 disabled Options 0 to 10 Database Sort Definition Database Sort moves the database entry that produced a successful decode to the first position in the list of database entries Serial Cmd lt K252 number of active indexes database sort Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Number of Active Indexes by ESP Click the arrow on the Active Indexes dropdown menu and select how many database indexes will be used during the read cycle 0 to 10 p Active Indexes 5 v Auto Sync Database settings with Reade
61. Y 124 7C 29 1D GS 61 3D 93 5D 125 7D 30 1E RS An 62 3E gt 94 5E 126 7E 31 1F US 63 3F 95 5F _ 127 7F D MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual A 25 Interface Standards Appendix F Interface Standards Interface Standards established by the Electronic Industries Association EIA specify such things as the signaling voltage levels maximum cable lengths and number of drivers In the MINI Hawk selection of interface is made by pin assignment and in the case of host communications by software switching between RS 232 and RS 422 RS 485 RS 232 RS 232 defines an interface between two devices such as for example the reader and host It differs from the other interfaces by dedicating individual pins to specific functions and by requiring both devices to share a common ground line Since both device chassis are connected to a common ground a ground loop potential and the possibility of noise interference exists Therefore cable lengths are limited to a maximum of 50 feet 19 7m Despite being the most limited this interface is used frequently because of the large installed base of RS 232 equipment RS 422 RS 485 RS 422 unlike RS 232 measures signals deferentially that is the receiver looks at the potentials between the two receive or transmit wires rather than the potential between signal and ground As a result cables if shielded can be u
62. Yes Example A5 indicates a Code 39 symbol with Check Character and Check Character Output ena bled and Full ASCII conversion performed Explanation of Modifiers for Other Symbologies For Code 128 a 1 indicates EAN 128 otherwise the modifier is 0 For QR Code and Micro QR Code a 0 indicates QR Code a 1 indicates Micro QR Code For Postal Symbologies a 0 indicates POSTNET a 1 indicates Japan Post a 2 indicates Australia Post a 3 indicates PLANET a 4 indicates Royal Mail a 5 indicates KIX a 6 indicates UPU 56 bar a 7 indicates UPU 75 bar and an 8 indicates USPSACB Example JY0 indicates a POSTNET symbol 6 40 For all other symbologies the modifier is 0 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Symbologies Background Color Note Background Color only applies to Pharmacode Usage Symbol backgrounds are often White or other very light colors If the background is darker than the symbol Black background should be enabled Definition Allows the user to specify the symbol background used in the application Serial Cmd lt K451 background color Default Both Options 0 White 1 Black 2 Both White When White background is enabled the bars of the symbol are recognized as dark on a light background Black When Black background is enabled the bars of the symbol are recognized as light on a dark background Both When Both is enabled the imager will attempt to decode fo
63. a hardware trigger can start an edge trigger read cycle K229 start character NUL 00 in hex disabled Two hex digits representing any ASCII character except XON and XOFF Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt K229h 3C gt For gt lt K229h 3E gt For lt K229h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 5 13 Stop Trigger Character Non Delimited Stop Trigger Character Non Delimited Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Useful in applications where different characters are required to end a read cycle A single ASCII host serial trigger character that ends the read cycle and is not enclosed by delimiters such as lt and gt Non delimited Stop characters can be defined and will function according to the trigger event When defining Stop trigger characters the following rules apply n External Edge the imager looks only for the Start trigger character and ignores any Stop trigger character that may be defined n External Level the Start trigger character begins the read cycle and the Stop trigger character ends it Note that even after a symbol has been decoded and the symbol data transmitted the imager remains in External Level trigger read cycle until a Stop character is received n S
64. a test capture mode Image Storage Mode Serial Cmd lt K244 image storage type image storage mode gt Default First Mode Options 0 First Mode 1 Last Mode First Mode This mode allows the imager to store images until the available image memory has been filled At that point the imager will stop saving additional images In this mode you will always have the first image captured because the saving process stops once memory has been filled Last Mode In this mode image storage continues after available memory limits are reached The oldest image in memory is overwritten so you will always have the most recent stored image 5 24 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Read Cycle Image Storage Example The following example assumes that the imager is in a rapid capture mode of 3 captures Number of Symbols Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Read Cycle Result Stored Frame Number of Symbols Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Read Cycle Result Stored Frame Number of Symbols Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Read Cycle Result Stored Frame 1 No Read No Read Good Read Symbol 1 Good Read None 4 No Read No Read No Read No Read Frame 3 2 No Read No Read Good Read Symbol 1 No Read Frame 2 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 5 25 Minimum Good Reads Minimum Good Reads Definition This value specifies the number of times a symbol
65. a visual reference for the final values of these four parameters Focus Shutter Gain Quality TL j Window of Interest WOI Framing D isabled v Saves the optimal configuration parameters WOI Margin 75 determined by calibration results T Capture Settings r Processing The calibration f rogress bar Gain 38 Medium Indicates that the process has Shutter Speed 250 v been completed Focal Distance Quick Focus lt Symbology Settings Calibrate Symbology Type ECC 200 Code 33 x Cancel Iv Composite Enabled Gave Linescan Height 64 4 12 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Calibration Initiating Calibration Calibration can be initiated by serial command the EZ button or from the Calibration interface in ESP In ESP the Calibrate button starts the calibration routine To initiate calibration by serial command enter the serial command lt CAL gt from a terminal such as ESP s Terminal interface lt CAL gt is a calibration routine that emphasizes contrast 9 470959 5 5 and readability Ez Mode Autoconnect Send Recy Switch Model ER Setup Terminal Utilities e E L Find Send lt caL gt File Model Options Connect View Terminal Help Next Row Read Rate decode sec Read Rate percent EndReadRate Locator PatternOn Locator Patte
66. and E Disabled lt single click in the Window of Interest selection box to view Top el options Left 16 1 3 Place your cursor in the Height 1024 selection box scroll Width 1280 down to the setting you want to change and single click the setting Image Processing Settings A 4 Left click again on the open screen to complete the selection 5 Right click on the open screen and select Save to Reader to implement the command in the imager You can send the command without saving it or you can send and save the command simultaneously Receive Reader Settings Send No Save Send and Save Send and Save as Customer Defaults Default Current Menu Settings Default all ESP Settings Advanced Options gt MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 2 15 Send Receive Options Send Receive Options To access Receive Save and Default options click the Send Recv button You can also access these options by right clicking in any of the configuration views t Send Recv Receiving From the Send Recv menu select Receive Reader Settings Caution Do not select this option if you do not want to upload the imager s settings For example if your ESP file has a number of custom settings that you want to maintain and download into the imager these settings would be lost by choosing Yes This is useful if you want to receive upload the imager s settings and save them as a file
67. and IP Setup Mirrored Image Window of Interest K514 mirrored image K516 row pointer column pointer row depth column width Focal Distance K525 focal distance Increment Focus Position lt 525 gt Decrement Focus Position 525 2 Focal Distance Table Read Only K526 number of focal distances focal distance Illumination Brightness K536 brightness Camera lt K541 shutter speed gain gt Pixel Sub Sampling lt K542 pixel sub sampling AEC AGC mode AEC AGC brightness Morphological Pre Processing lt K550 morphological pre processing gt Morphological Operation K551 0 morphological operation operator size Configuration Database Number of Active Indexes lt K252 number of active database settings database sort gt Configuration Database Status lt K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column width narrow margins background color symbology gt Save Current Settings to Database lt K255 index gt Load Current Settings from Database Request Selected Index Settings lt K255 index gt lt K255 index gt Request All Database Settings lt K255 gt Database Mode lt K256 switch mode frame count time image process looping image dimensions gt Output Format Format Extract lt K740 output index start location length gt Format Ins
68. and output in the matching filter position If a symbol matches filter 3 it will be output as the third symbol If a filter does not have a matching qualified symbol a No Read message will be output in place of the symbol assuming the No Read message is enabled For example if there is not a symbol that meets filter 3 s requirements then a No Read message will be output in the third output position MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 14 9 Output Filter Configuration Filter Number Definition Serial Cmd Options This is the filter index number that represents the position of the symbol in the data output at the end of the read cycle This index number should be entered along with the following filter settings for the predetermined symbol position lt K744 filter number symbology length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt 1 to 10 Symbology Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 14 10 Specifies the symbology allowed to occupy this location in multisymbol output Note To filter or order a symbol the symbol must meet all the requirements of the selected filter index lt K744 filter number symbology length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt 0 any symbology 0 Any type 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 2 Code 39 3 Code 128 4 Codabar 5 UPC 6 PDF417 7 EAN 128 8 Code 93 9 Pharmacode 10 GS1 DataBar RSS 11 MicroPDF
69. bmp 00003 00064 pending 1 1280x1024 gs bmp 00003 00061 pending 2 1280x1024_gs bmp 00003 00061 pending 3 1280x1024_gs bmp 00003 00061 pending 4 1280x1024_gs bmp 00003 00061 gt Request an image upload of the desired file lt uy good 0 1280x1024_gs bmp gt From the menu bar select Transfer Receive File Select a file storage location and then select Y modem click Receive 7 Recelve File JE Place received fie in the following folder C Browse Use receiving protocol Ymodem x HyperTerminal will upload the image and save the file to the directory specified MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual A 33 MINI Hawk Image Output Bit Stream Method A more difficult method is to parse and decode the bit stream data The bit stream is a mix of EXIF format amp TIFF format You will need to use the lt op 4 gt command lt op 4 arg gt To load a bitmap send lt op 4 gt and the entire grayscale image will load To load a JPEG set arg for the full size JPEG image with adjustable quality lt op 4 1280x1024_qnnn jpg gt There is only one variable nnn is a number from 1 to 100 and it represents the image quality 1 will load fastest but will be extremely low quality 100 will load slowly but will be highest quality lt op 4 1280x1024_ q1 jpg gt low quality image short load time lt op 4 1280x1024 q100 jpg high quality image long load time Response Format The user w
70. box to view Aux Port System Data Status Disabled options 4 Left click again on the open 5 Right click on the open Screen to complete your Screen and select Save to selection Reader to implement the command in the imager Saving Options Send No Save Changes will be lost when power is re applied to the imager Send and Save This activates all changes in current memory and saves to the imager for power on 1 14 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual EE 2 Using ESP Contents rA Do T E O 2 2 Application eo leh 2 3 ISTRURI Fore o RE 2 4 f lieleenig ie T 2 12 MIU 2 14 Navigating in EC 2 15 Send Receive Options 1 reir tecta erac ta do zac dena o dea Fac epe vo ac Fed se dana edo EE age dae 2 16 USING AM e 2 18 This section is designed to help you understand the basic structure and elements of ESP Easy Setup Program When you open ESP unless otherwise specified in the ESP Preferences dialog accessible from the Options heading on the menu toolbar you will enter EZ Mode for initial setup From there you can enter Application Mode App Mode and access several configuration menus Communications Read Cycle Symbologies I O Parameters Symbol Quality Matchcode and Diagnostics a
71. button until two quick beeps are heard and the 2096 and 4096 LEDs illuminate Three Beeps Position 3 Hold down button until three quick beeps are heard and the 20 40 and 60 LEDs illuminate Four Beeps Position 4 Hold down button until four quick beeps are heard and the 2096 4096 6096 and 8096 LEDs illuminate 7 20 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual I O Parameters Configurable Output 1 Output 1 Parameters Output On Trend Analysis Output State Negative Pulse Width 5 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 Diagnostics Usage This option provides discrete signalling to host software to control external devices such as PLCs and relays It is useful for routing sorting and to prevent mis packaging and mis routing Definition Sets the discrete output functions for specific user selected conditions Allows the user to set the conditions under which an output or outputs will be activated Serial Cmd K810 0utput on output state pulse width output mode Default Mismatch or No Read Options 0 Mismatch or No Read 1 Match or Good Read 2 Mismatch 3 No Read 4 Trend Analysis 5 Symbol Quality 6 Diagnostic Warning 7 In Read Cycle Note If Output On is set to Match or Mismatch a transition switching will not occur unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory Mismatch or No Read Activates d
72. considered valid Symbol Length 2 Interleaved 2 of 5 Usage Useful in applications where 2 5 symbols of a specific length are required Definition The Symbol Length 2 field is one of two fields against which the decoded symbol is compared before accepting it as valid or rejecting it Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status Default 6 Options 0 to 64 even only Important If Range Mode is disabled the length of the symbol must match either Symbol Length 2 or Symbol Length 1 to be considered a valid symbol If Range Mode is enabled Symbol Length 2 and Symbol Length 1 form a range into which the length of the symbol must fall to be considered valid MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 6 17 Interleaved 2 of 5 Guard Bar Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Note Whenever Guard Bar is enabled the presence of guard bars also called bearer bars is required for decoding to take place Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Useful when 1 2 5 multisymbols are enabled to prevent false data output This typically occurs with highly tilted or skewed symbols A guard bar is a heavy bar at least twice the width of the wide bar surrounding the printed 2 5 symbol and helping to prevent false reads lt K472 status check character status check character output symbol length 1 symbol
73. data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Definition When enabled the PDF symbol must contain the same number of characters as the symbol length setting before it can be considered a good read The imager will ignore any symbol not having the specified length Serial Cmd lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length Default 10 Options 1 to 2710 Note Fixed Symbol Length Status must be enabled for Fixed Symbol Length to take effect 6 36 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Symbologies MicroPDF417 Usage Used for labelling small items that need large data capacity Definition A variant of PDF417 a very efficient and compact stacked symbology that can encode up to 250 alphanumeric characters or 366 numeric characters per symbol Serial Cmd K485 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status MicroPDF417 Serial Cmd K485 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length MicroPDF417 Usage Used to increase data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Definition When enabled the MicroPDF417 symbol must contain the same number of characters as the symbol length setting before it can be considered a good read The imager will
74. depth column width narrow margins background color symbology gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 124 1 2 16 1 Important Pixel Sub Sampling has no effect when the Image Dimension mode is configured as Region of Interest in the Database Mode command This is because the Window of Interest camera settings are determined by the software based on the Region of Interest setup There is no benefit to Pixel Sub Sampling to increase processing speed when ROl is configured because the frame size would need to be increased to make Pixel Sub Sampling possible Row Pointer Definition The image dimension settings can be applied as a Window of Interest or a Region of Interest depending on the image dimension mode selected in the Database Mode command Serial Cmd lt K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column width narrow margins background color symbology gt Default 0 Options High Resolution MINI Hawk 0 to 1024 row depth High Speed MINI Hawk 0 to 480 row depth 3 Megapixel MINI Hawk 0 to 1536 row depth Column Pointer Definition The image dimension settings can be applied as a Window of Interest or a Region of Interest depending on the image dimension mode selected in the Database Mode command Serial Cmd K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column width narrow margins ba
75. digital image The image sensor does not detect light in exactly the same way as the human eye which means that some processing or correction of the detected image is necessary to ensure that the final image realistically represents the colors of the original image White Balance calibration works best if a white object a piece of paper for example is placed in front of the imager White and black objects can be present in the field of view during White Balance calibration but no color objects can be present Important The White Balance correction adjusts the R G and B gain offset values for every possible analog gain 0 to 42 in the system Any gain values greater than 42 43 to 48 will use the factory default White Balance settings MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 13 23 Other Operational Serial Commands Bar Code Configuration Mode Definition Bar Code Configuration Mode is a way of programming the imager by using ECC 200 Data Matrix symbols Serial Cmd lt BCCFG gt Bar Code Configuration Mode can be entered three different ways 1 By forcing the imager into Bar Code Configuration Mode by serial command lt BCCFG gt 2 By configuring one of the 4 EZ Button positions to Bar Code Configuration Mode 3 By reading a Data Matrix symbol with a special code word used by ISO IEC 16022 to signify imager programming This can be either in a regular read cycle or during a read rate test Reading this symbol
76. enabled the imager will not decode Codabar symbols unless the start and stop characters are the same Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Start Stop Output Codabar Definition When disabled the start and stop characters will not be present in the data output of the decoded symbol When enabled the start and stop characters will be present in the data output of the decoded symbol Note Because the start and stop characters are included as part of the data the characters must be included as part of the length in a fixed length mode of operation Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6 20 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Symbologies Large Intercharacter Gap Codabar Definition When disabled the spaces between characters or the intercharacter gap are ignored during the decode process Note If the intercharacter space is large enough to be considered a margin the symbol will not decode regardless of this parameter s setting Serial Cmd KAT1 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap f
77. euin meg 3 2 Communications Serial COmMMANAS cc cccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeee cece eeeeaaeeeeeeecaeaeeeseeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeetes 3 3 Fost Port GoOnnectionss 5 2 esie eene epe REDE Ree RORIS veecaged E 3 4 Host Port Protocol iecit reete eei dec epo D ee eee nie Ee EHE S eH E Eiaa die 3 5 AGCKINAK OPON tme 3 7 Polling Mode Options 1 nena rette eere ee ipee ene A doce e di 3 8 RS 422 Status del ere e e e eh tt ir eee ei eg i oe ee kno 3 9 Auxiliary Port Connections creep ettet eren eee ire eode ne pede tne tide a Re Ed 3 10 Auxiliary Port System Data Status eene nenne enne nnne 3 18 Daisy Chain Autoconflgure ete eodeni ed senile tedio eee eoo dee ese ne ne MEE a e eed cbe 3 19 Response TimeoUt eerie eene eder tercera eee eee ceo e ER e AR eae eene 3 20 LRG Status sina pp Ruben etm be eee 3 21 Protocol Configuration Examples sess eene nennen enn rennes 3 22 USB HID Interface niit erc elas did eee ee e dod 3 23 ASCII Character Entry Modifier essen taidi nennen enne 3 32 Preamble ite e mmi Spa et De LIC 3 33 Postamble s entitatem teens ctt ee Mer Deut ete 3 34 This section explains how to set up communications parameters with the host and an auxiliary terminal With Microscan s ESP Easy Setup Program configuration changes can be made in the ESP menus and then sent and saved to the imager
78. gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Serial Command Beep Status Usage Used to audibly verify the acceptance and validity of a command Definition Causes the imager to beep once whenever a K command is entered to indicate that the command was accepted and processed Function If an invalid command is entered the imager beeps 5 times to indicate an invalid entry However this does not necessarily mean that all data fields have been entered incorrectly Only one bad field needs to be found in order to activate the 5 beep response Serial Cmd lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 7 15 Serial Verification Control Hex Output Usage Useful for viewing settings with binary characters when using serial commands on a terminal Definition Determines the response to a Serial Command Echo or status request command When set to Control two characters are transmitted to represent a non displayable character For example a carriage return will be shown as M Serial Cmd lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output Default Control Options 0 Control 1 Hex 7 16 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual I O Parameters EZ Button The EZ button has four positions selectable by the length of time the but
79. hex characters Example 3F 00 disabled See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 14 11 Output Filter Configuration Data Definition Serial Cmd Default Options This is the data string to be used when comparing symbol data for output filtering and ordering This data string may also contain wildcard and placeholder characters to facilitate matching Remember that in order to filter or order symbol data it must meet all the requirements of the selected filter index Examples Filter data 123 This will match data strings of 123 123456 and 123ABC but not 12 Filter data 123 AB C This will be interpreted as 123 Filter data 123 This will match 1234 and 123A but not 123 42345 or 12340 Filter data 123 A This will match 1234A and 123BA but not 123 1234C or 1234ABCD Filter data 123 A This will match 1234AB and 123BAT but not 1234A or 123BATS Filter data 12 This will match 1234 123456 and 123ABC but not 12 or 123 Filter data 123 A This will match 1234A 123BA and 123BATS but not 1234 or 12340 lt K744 filter number symbology length wildcard placeholder data unus
80. how to enter ASCII characters as hex values 7 8 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual I O Parameters Output Indicators The MINI Hawk has a beeper and three LED arrays as follows 1 A target pattern of blue LEDs for centering the field of view which is projected from the front of the imager 2 An array of green LEDs projected from the front of the imager that can be programmed to flash in response to user defined conditions 3 A row of five status LEDs on the side of the imager Green Flash Mode Usage Used as a visual verification that a good read has occurred Definition An array of green LEDs in the front of the imager can be programmed to flash in response to user defined conditions Serial Cmd lt K750 green flash mode target pattern status green flash duration Default Good Read Options 0 Disabled 1 Good Read 2 Static Presentation 3 Match 4 Mismatch 5 Strobe Disabled Green flash LEDs are disabled Good Read Green flash LEDs will flash when a good read condition is met or when Matchcode is enabled and a match occurs MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 7 9 Output Indicators Static Presentation Mode Static Presentation Mode is used in conjunction with Continuous Read Mode lt K200 0 gt When operating in Static Presentation Mode the red LEDs will illuminate while the imager is searching for a symbol in Continuous Read Mode When a symbol is placed in th
81. ignore any symbol not having the specified length Serial Cmd lt K485 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 10 Options 1 to 366 Note Fixed Symbol Length Status must be enabled for Fixed Symbol Length to take effect MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 6 37 Composite Composite When set to Enabled or Required will decode the 2D composite component of a linear symbol The linear symbol can be DataBar 14 DataBar Expanded DataBar Limited EAN 128 UPC A EAN 13 EAN 8 and UPC E Usage Allows reading by both linear and 2D readers Definition Combines 2D and linear width modulated symbology on the same symbol where different messages can be read by each reader type Serial Cmd K453 mode separator status separator Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Required Enabled If Composite is set to Enabled the imager will decode both the 2D composite and linear components However if the 2D composite component is not decoded the linear data will be sent by itself at the end of the read cycle Required If set to Required the imager must decode both components or a No Read will occur Separator Status Composite Usage Allows the user to distinguish between the main and Supplemental symbols Definition Separates the linear and the composite component Serial Cmd lt K453 mode separator status separator gt Default Disabled Options 0 Di
82. in the calibration routine will have no effect Once Bar Code Configuration Mode has been entered the Data Matrix symbols can be thought of as serial data You can configure the imager by printing labels in Microscan s serial command format Commands are processed as if the data were streamed in through the serial port The imager will acknowledge the symbol with a beep green flash and echo the serial data to the host If the command causes the imager to produce more serial output such as serial verification or counter requests the data will be routed to the host port Bar Code Configuration Mode can be exited by any reset lt A gt or lt Z gt command as well as a lt J gt or a quick press and release of the EZ Button The command to exit Bar Code Configuration Mode can be included as part of the Data Matrix symbol For example try encoding lt K200 4 gt lt K220 1 gt lt J gt into a Data Matrix symbol This configures the imager to enable Serial Trigger Mode to program a new trigger to end the read cycle and to exit Bar Code Configuration Mode with lt J gt To end all EZ Button functions press the EZ Button once and quickly release 1 In normal reading modes it is required to read a special Data Matrix symbol with a special codeword used by ISO IEC 16022 to signify imager programming 13 24 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual EN 14 Output Format Contents Output Format Serial Commands s
83. is the exclusive OR of all characters following the STX start of text up to and including the ETX end of text What this means is that the binary representation of all the characters in a transmission are cumulatively added in a column and each resulting odd integer is assigned a 1 and each even integer a 0 two 1s 0 two Os 0 a 1 and a 0 1 The extra LRC character is then appended to the transmission and the receiver usually the host performs the same addition and compares the results Serial Cmd lt K145 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 3 21 Protocol Configuration Examples Protocol Configuration Examples Point to Point Main Port lt K100 8 0 1 1 gt Baud Rate 115 2K Parity None Stop Bits 2 Data Bits 8 lt K140 0 gt Point to Point lt K102 0 gt RS 232 enabled lt K102 1 gt RS 422 enabled Polling Mode Main Port lt K100 4 0 1 1 gt Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 2 Data Bits 8 lt K140 5 23 gt Polling Mode Address 23 lt K102 0 gt RS 232 Point to Point polling lt K102 1 gt RS 422 RS 485 true multidrop switched transmitter lt K143 30 gt 30 ms Response Timeout User Defined Polling Mode Main Port lt K100 4 0 1 1 gt Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 2 Data Bits 8 lt K140 5 12 gt Polling Mode Address 12 lt K148 08 09 18 0B 0C 0D gt Default RES 0x04 REQ 0x08 EOT 0x0
84. length 2 guard bar status range mode status Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Range Mode Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 6 18 Useful in applications where 2 5 symbols of a specific length are required When Range Mode is disabled the imager checks the value of the symbol length against the values set in Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 If the symbol length does not match either of the preset values then it is rejected as invalid When Range Mode is enabled Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 are combined to form a range of valid symbol lengths Any symbol length that does not fall into this range is rejected as an invalid symbol Either of the preset symbol length values in the Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 fields can form the start or end of the range lt K472 status check character status check character output symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Enabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Symbologies Code 93 Usage Sometimes used in clinical applications Definition Code 93 is a variable length continuous symbology employing four element widths Each Code 93 character has nine modules that may be either black or white Each character contains three bars and three spaces Serial Cmd K475 status fixed symbol length status symbol length Default Disabl
85. lt 0 85 at 0 if 10 lt PG lt 1 00 F 0 0 if PG 1 00 or PG gt 1 00 If enabled the print growth is appended to the symbol data according to the ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output Mode setting Serial Cmd K709 symbol contrast print growth axial non uniformity UEC gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 8 10 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Symbol Quality Axial Non Uniformity Data Matrix Only Definition Axial non uniformity is a measure of how much the sampling point spacing differs from one axis to another namely AN abs XAVG YANG XAVG YAVGy2 where abs yields the absolute value If a symbology has more than two major axes then AN is computed for those two average spacings which differ the most ANSI axial non uniformity grading is defined this way A 4 0 if AN 06 B 2 0 if AN 08 C 2 0 if AN 10 D 1 0 if AN 12 F 0 0 if AN 12 If enabled the axial non uniformity is appended to the symbol data according the ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output Mode setting Serial Cmd K709 symbol contrast print growth axial non uniformity UEC Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Unused Error Correction Data Matrix Only Definition The correction capacity of Reed Solomon decoding is expressed in the equation e 2d d p where e is the number of erasures d is the number of error correction code words and p is the number o
86. needs to be read to qualify as a good read Serial Cmd lt K221 minimum good reads Default 1 Options 1 to 255 5 26 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Read Cycle Setting Up the Imager for EZ Trax If you are using EZ Trax software it is important to set up the MINI Hawk correctly before beginning Click the Read Cycle tab to display the Read Cycle tree control Parameters ESP Values Read Cycle Multisymbol Trigger Mode External Edge Trigger Filter Duration External Trigger State Positive Serial Trigger Decodes Before Output 1 End of Read Cycle Mode TEE Read Cycle Timeout Capture Mode Capture Time Store Noread Image Image Processing Settings New Trigger Timeout or New Trigger Last Frame Last Frame or New Tri REIR E Set Trigger Mode lt K200 gt to External Edge Trigger EE External Edge z Trigger Filter Duration Continuous Read External Trigger State Continuous Read 1 Output External Level External Edge Serial Data and Edge Set Capture Mode lt K241 gt to Rapid Capture Rapid Capture v Se Capture Mode Rapid Capture Continuous Capture Once these Read Cycle parameters are set you will be ready to connect to EZ Trax Fora description of how to configure EZ Trax using serial commands or ESP see Configuring EZ Trax Output in Chapter 7 I O Parameters For more detailed information about using EZ Trax
87. output string Then with the next index number enter either an extract or insert command to continue building the output string Continue this process until you are finished building the string Serial Cmd lt K740 output index start location length gt Options 1 to 100 Start Location Definition Defines the location within the symbol data where the character extraction will begin The first character extracted will also be the first character in the sequence displayed in user defined output Serial Cmd lt K740 output index start location length gt Default 0 Options 1 to n maximum number of characters in the symbol data Length Definition Defines the length in consecutive characters that will be extracted and placed in user defined output Serial Cmd lt K740 output index start location length gt Default 0 disabled end of format cell array Options 1 to n maximum number of characters in the symbol data MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 14 5 Format Assign Format Extract by ESP Parse Symbols Beceive Quality Parameters Hide Parse Table Symbol Parse il Tes e Bowens B l Cm Step Insert Data Extract Range ti t Dat tract Exi ene 2 4 The Extract Range function corresponds to the Start Location and Length parameters in the Format Extract serial command Sample Symbol Original ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPBORSTUMWX
88. routine in which the check character character is added Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Character Output Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Definition When enabled a check character character is sent along with the symbol data for added data security Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output status sym bol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6 16 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Symbologies Symbol Length 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 Usage Useful in applications where 2 5 symbols of a specific length are required Definition The Symbol Length 1 field is one of two fields against which the decoded symbol is compared before accepting it as valid or rejecting it Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status Default 16 Options 0 to 64 even only Important If Range Mode is disabled the length of the symbol must match either Symbol Length 1 or Symbol Length 2 to be considered a valid symbol If Range Mode is enabled Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 form a range into which the length of the symbol must fall to be
89. set to Enabled the imager uses a 5x margin requirement for standard linear symbols MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 6 39 Narrow Margins Symbology Identifier Symbology Identifier Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Symbology Identifier is an ISO IEC 16022 standard prefix set of characters that identifies the symbol type When enabled the imager analyzes and identifies the symbology and adds a three character identifying prefix to the data closed bracket character indicating the presence of a symbology identifier A C E F G I L Q Y b d e p Z A Code 39 C Code 128 E UPC EAN F Codabar G Code 93 l 2 5 L PDF417 and MicroPDF417 Q QR Code and Micro QR Code Y Postal Symbologies b BC412 d Data Matrix e GS1 DataBar RSS p Pharmacode z Aztec Z Non Bar Code Modifier Example d indicates a Data Matrix symbol K450 narrow margins symbology identifier status Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Explanation of Modifiers for Code 39 and Interleaved 2 of 5 For Code 39 and Interleaved 2 of 5 the modifier indicates Check Character and Check Character Output status For Code 39 only Full ASCII must be enabled to see modifiers 4 5 and 7 Modifier Check Character Wr ors Full D id 39 only erformed 0 Disabled N A No 1 Enabled Enabled No 3 Enabled Disabled No 4 Disabled N A Yes 5 Enabled Enabled Yes 7 Enabled Disabled
90. state that is only active when closed Object Plane An imaginary plane in the field of view focused by an imager s optical system at the corresponding image plane on the sensor A 38 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Appendices Output A channel or communications line Data or discrete signals that are transmitted or displayed by a device Parity An error detection routine in which one data bit in each character is set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of 1 bits in the data field is even or odd Picket Fence Orientation A linear symbol orientation in which the bars are perpendicular to the symbol s direction of travel Pitch Rotation of a linear or 2D symbol around an axis parallel to the symbol length on the Substrate See the illustration below Skew lt 4 Symbol or other object Tilt of interest d N Pitch Pixel An individual element in a digitized image array picture element PLC See Programmable Logic Controller Port Logical circuit for data entry and exit One or more ports may be included within a single connector Processing Time The time used by a vision system to receive analyze and interpret image information Often expressed in parts per minute Programmable Logic Controller PLC An electronic device used in industrial automation environments such as factory assembly lines and automotive manufacturing facilities Progressive Sca
91. store the next symbol read as the master symbol MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Matchcode Matchcode Type Definition ESP Serial Cmd Default Options Disabled Enabled Wild Card Sequential Allows the user to choose the way that master symbols will be compared with subsequently read symbols Note First set Triggering Mode to External or Serial Matchcode Matchcode Type O gt Sequential Matching Match Start Position Match Length f wild Card Sequential Sequence on Noread Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled New Master Pin Disabled Match Replace Disabled Replacement String MATCH Mismatch Replace Disabled Replacement String MISMATCH lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Wild Card 3 Sequential Has no effect on operations Instructs the imager to compare symbols or portions of symbols with the master symbol Allows the user to enter user defined wild card characters in the master symbol Instructs the imager to sequence after each match numeric only and compare symbols or portions of symbols for sequential numbers Note If Matchcode Type is set to Sequential the imager will behave as if Number of Symbols were set to 1 regardless of the user defined configuration MINI Hawk High Performanc
92. symbols enabled in Multisymbol and the number of symbols read For example a primary and two secondary readers have Number of Symbols set to 3 and Multisymbol Separator defined as 96 If the primary and the first secondary reader do not find symbols but the next secondary reader registers a good read the transmitted results would be symbol data No Read No Read a The above example assumes a best case scenario Other factors such as baud rate dynamic focus timing number of characters in a given symbol and the number of secondary readers in the daisy chain can affect timing and may need to be included in your calculations for complete accuracy MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 3 15 Auxiliary Port Connections Command Processing Mode Usage Definition Serial Cmd Options 3 16 Allows a user to send configuration settings from the host port to the auxiliary port When enabled Command Processing Mode allows commands to be entered via the auxiliary port and direct externally triggered read cycle data in one of two ways Symbol data including the serial trigger if used will be transmitted to the last port from which a command was sent f the last command came from the host port then externally triggered read cycle data will only be output to the host port K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d 5 Command Processing MIN
93. the Bar Code Dialog you can create symbols by typing the text you Bar Code Dialog wish to encode This is a useful tool for creating configuration symbols allowing you to configure your reader by reading the symbols you create Bar Code Configuration Print Save As Bar Code Value Choose a spatial orientationforthe B Rotation 0 Degrees New new symbol Drag specific configuration values from the control tree directly into this field to encode new symbols Caption Create a caption Same As Bar Code Value for the symbol that matches the Specify encoded data or write your own caption Add start configuration code Addend configuration code Save Settings Differences from Default Settings The symbol you create will be displayed in the field at the bottom of the Bar Code Dialog 2 14 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Using ESP Navigating in ESP To change imager settings or to access the Utilities Camera Terminal or Output Format views click the App Mode button o App Mode To return to EZ Mode click the EZ Mode button amp Ez Mode To make changes to configuration settings in the control trees Parameters ESP Values 1 Left click on the to Camera Setup Illumination Brightness 2 Double click the Focus Distance 400 desired parameter
94. the EZ Button allows you to locate a symbol in the imager s field of view EZ Button Hold down the EZ Button for about one second and release when you hear one short beep The amber 20 LED will illuminate and you will see the blue target pattern projected from the front of the imager Center the target pattern on the symbol Note To end all EZ Button functions press the EZ Button once and quickly release 1 10 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Quick Start Step 8 Calibrate MINI Hawk settings can be adjusted automatically for optimum symbol decoding performance by either the EZ Button or by ESP During the calibration routine the reader will flash its amber Read Rate percent LEDs and red illumination LEDs while searching camera settings and determining the best configuration for decoding symbol data Upon successful completion of this routine a green LED pattern will flash brightly and illuminate the symbol If unsuccessful the imager will emit 5 short beeps and stop searching Calibrate by EZ Button 1 Hold down the EZ Button for about two seconds and release when you hear two short beeps The 20 and 40 LEDs will illuminate 2 The imager will search camera settings to determine the best configuration for decoding symbol data Note To end all EZ Button functions press the EZ Button once and quickly release Calibrate by ESP 1 Click the Calibrate button Calibrate
95. to adjust the brightness of the image Definition Sets the gain value for the image sensor This setting can be configured through calibration which is the recommended method A higher gain value will increase the brightness of the image but the visual noise reduction performance of the system is reduced Before configuring gain settings the desired shutter speed should already be set and the gain should be configured to optimize the shutter speed setting Serial Cmd K544 shutter speed gain gt Default 20 Options 0 to 33 10 18 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Camera and IP Setup Camera Settings 3 Megapixel Camera parameters are typically obtained during the calibration process and do not necessarily need to be modified directly by the user Optics The 3 Megapixel MINI Hawk Imager has two different optical configurations available Standard Density and Micro Density Determine the optics of your imager and find the corresponding camera values in the following sections Standard Density and Micro Density Optics Shutter Speed Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Gain Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Faster shutter speeds reduce blurring in faster applications Slower shutter speeds are useful in slower applications and lower contrast applications Sets the exposure or integration time for the image sensor pixels The shutter speed setting in relatio
96. to non volatile memory to be recalled on power on whenever the associated button position is selected This is the same as sending a lt Z gt from the terminal Load New Master Functions in the same way as new master pin input whenever the associated button position is selected The new master pin s Consecutive Decode requirement holds true for this function MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 7 19 EZ Button Modes Target System Turns on the target pattern whenever the associated button position is selected To disable quickly press and release the EZ button Note This mode is the only one that does not require that the button be released before taking effect Thus as soon as the imager beeps the appropriate number of times for the position it will take effect If it is necessary to have the target system on before another operation such as calibration or read rate is performed ensure that the target system mode is assigned a lower position so that it will be activated first Bar Code Configuration Enables bar code configuration mode whenever the associated button position is selected When enabled the imager can accept configuration commands from symbols To disable quickly press and release the EZ button EZ Button Operation To execute EZ button commands Single Beep Position 1 Hold down button until a single beep is heard and the 2096 LED illuminates Two Beeps Position 2 Hold down
97. to see a high resolution image capture of the symbol Capture and Decode Mimorlmage M AEC v acc 30 Attibute Value Decoded symbol data is shown in this table MINI Hawk 1 MINIHawk BSNNEGREBEN Point to Point COMI 3115 2K N 8 1 Note For specific information on any of the icons shown above in the operations bar or configuration bar see the corresponding sections of this manual MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 2 3 Menu Toolbar Menu Toolbar File New Whenever New is selected the default configuration of ESP is loaded Mew Ctrl N Open Save Open Ctrl O When Save or Save As is selected the ESP configuration is Save Ctries saved to the host computer s hard drive and available whenever Save As the same file is selected under Open Print Ctrl P Important When you save menu changes to your hard drive these changes are not saved to your imager The illustration Import below shows how settings can be saved and received between Export ESP and the imager and ESP and the host hard drive Recent File Exit Vv Save to Imager A Receive Imager Settings Import Export Import converts the ASCII settings from a text file to ESP configuration settings Export converts the active ESP configuration settings to an ASCII text file 2 4 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Using ESP Model In t
98. up to 10 master symbols as the master symbol database which can be entered by keyboard scanned in displayed or deleted by serial or ESP commands Click the Master Database tab Enable Matchcode Type Set the Master Symbol Database Size Select the database index in which you want to enter the master symbol Do one of the following to enter master symbol data a Double click the index row to type data directly into the index b Click the Read Symbol into Selected Index to enter the next decoded symbol oak WN Set Master Symbol Loads the next symbol decoded into Database Size here the selected index Master Symbol y Database Size V Matchcode Type Read Symbol intd Selected Index ms Receive Reader s Database Send Database to Reader Master Symbol Data Double click a row to enter data into popup dialog box Loads the imager s saved Saves the displayed master symbols into ESP database to the imager Caution Since the total number of characters available for the master symbol database is limited changes to the Master Symbol Database Size will re allocate the number of characters available for each master symbol and could cause existing master symbols to be deleted See manual for details MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 13 9 Master Database Master Symbol Database Size Definition Serial
99. used MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 11 11 Database Mode Image Dimensions Definition Determines how the image dimension parameters will be implemented Serial Cmd lt K256 switch mode frame count time image process looping image dimensions Default 0 Options 0 Window of Interest 1 Region of Interest Window of Interest WOI by ESP When Image Dimensions is set to Window of Interest the database image dimension parameters are camera settings and they determine the size of the image to be captured Aches Indexes 5 z Auto Sync Database settings with Reader Advanced Options Curent moon po 4 00 Disable o o peo 2 1000 n0 400 Disable Enable white Disabled Test 1000 20 400 Disable f Enable white Disabled Test E Test e Test food 20 400 Disable E Enable white Disabled Test 1000 20 400 Disable 4 752 A Enable white Disabled Test 10 1000 20 400 Disable um Enable white Disabled Test v Capture for E very Index Show Database Index in Output Sort Index Positions on Good Reads Calibrate Receive Settings Send Settings Load Current To Index Load Index To Current Camera settings Capture Index Shutter Speed Gain Focal Distance Sub Sampling located in the left half of the highlighted area Image capture dimensions Top Left Height Width l
100. 000 15 sec 2000 2500 20 sec MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 4 3 Calibration Options Disabled Shutter Speed When this feature is disabled the shutter speed is fixed and is not part of the calibration process Enabled Shutter Speed When this feature is enabled shutter speed will be calibrated to provide the best possible image quality and performance Fast Shutter The calibration process will concentrate on achieving the fastest possible shutter setting that will still provide good performance The image quality or contrast may not be as good as what would be achieved with the Enabled setting The calibration process is not designed to choose the fastest shutter speed that can decode a symbol but rather to optimize for the fastest shutter speed that still provides good image quality 4 4 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Calibration Focus Position Definition Since focus can be configured by entering the target distance from the imager s parting line the user will normally configure the focus setting without needing to calibrate However if it is necessary to calibrate the focus distance there are two methods for doing so the standard Search Method or a Quick Focus method both of which are defined below Serial Cmd lt K529 gain shutter speed focus position symbol type WOI framing WO margin line scan height processing gt Default Quick Focus O
101. 1 2 Formatted output status for symbol 2 10 Formatted output status for symbol 10 Status Definition Status refers to the user defined formatting of a selected symbol position in the read cycle result Note that there is also a global formatting enable command that must be set for the formatting to be applied Serial Cmd lt K742 symbol number status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Assign parameters to specified symbol Format Assign by ESP M Enable Output Format Use the Set Number atid bua spin box to z determine the number of symbols to be included Set Number of Symbols 5 EX u4 in the uut phrase Dutput Phrase Symbol Preamble Symbol 1 Separator Symbol 2 Symbol 3 Symbol 4 Symbol 5 Postamble lv Enable lv Parse lv Parse i Parse Parse Parse M Enable A A Then check the Parse boxes beneath the symbols that you wish to format for user defined output 14 4 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Output Format Format Extract Output Index Definition Output Index refers to the database entry you wish to modify with this command A formatted output is built by extracting data from a symbol s original data output and or inserting user defined characters It may be helpful to think of individual indexes as positions in the final formatted output you wish to build Starting with index 1 enter either an extract or insert command to begin building your desired
102. 1 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 2 nennen enn 7 31 Diagnostic Output 2 sonecie neei ete cid dete aieea a iieiaei i 7 31 Configurable Output 3 coerente tene detected reed e Hee He de ep ene detener gett 7 32 Trend Analysis Output 3 22 5 crie ores Ea a ci edes drte se quse Ene e oss inae eds ce ee datas 7 32 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 3 sssssssssseeeeenenee eene 7 32 Diagnostic QUIPUTS p EE ES 7 32 Power Orn Reset Counts 2 22 00 A re eret e e IET Pere re Omne eH In Le dE EI So e Seb deess 7 33 Time Since Reset ipd ie dotes deed ire cose PED ear ce EP ed eene d ea AaS 7 34 Service Message ouest zetecie ied e qua cei tes ee ble eer rei taret edere Fans ed ee Ree 7 35 Frame Information cipere se AER c eate e a eie d esed dodo E tede Poco ed sede ends 7 36 Image Output ei Eee eire rire coe o tle tede tee Re se E een ioe 7 37 Database Identifier Output s nii cece cee ceeece eee E a ae a ea a a daadaa da oa o aeaa 7 40 rese e E ines a Raa A Ra aa ASE pneu ae E a eE a AS a a nS 7 41 Configuring EZ Trax Output aips 2 0 retener ene pese ode ced qoi E aa Reed quce aaie s mde oa andaa eects 7 42 This section includes instructions on setting up conditions for changing input output electrical transitions for control of the imager s internal and external devices A discrete I O in out signal is an electrical transition from one voltage level to another so that digital switching can occur MINI Hawk High Pe
103. 1 102 127 152 43 5 51 102 127 152 in 3 2 X j 1 2 3 2 3 4 5 6 15 2 3 4 5 6 M Focus Position in Focus Position Wide Axis H 16 25 W High Speed Standard Density High Speed Ultra High Density High Density Field of Views in mm High Density inches mm Depth of Field amp Focus Position 10 7254 97229 20 mil 2D 15 mil 1D 8 203 20 mil 2D 15 mil 1D 74178 6 4152 10 mil 54127 4 4102 3 76 7 5 mil 2D 5 mil 1D mm76 51 25 25 51 76 n3 2 1 i 2 8 2 3 5 6 Focus Position in Wide Axis H 4 5 W High Resolution High Density MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual A 3 Read Ranges cont General Specifications MINI Hawk 3 Megapixel Narrow bar width 1D 2D Field of View maximum Read Range with autofocus Micro Density 0028 07 mm 0033 08 mm 1 2 30 5 mm 1 9 to 2 0 48 3 mm to 50 8 mm 0033 08 mm 005 13 mm 3 0 76 2 mm 1 9 to 5 1 48 3 mm to 129 5 mm 0075 19 mm 010 25 mm 3 4 86 4 mm 1 7 to 5 6 43 2 mm to 142 2 mm 015 38 mm 020 51 mm 3 6 91 4 mm 1 7 to 6 0 43 2 mm to 152 4 mm Standard Density 0033 08 mm 005 13 mm 3 2 81 3 mm 1 9 to 3 0 48 mm to 76 2 mm 005 13 mm 0075 19 mm 5 0 127 mm 1 8 to 4 8 46 mm to 121 9 mm 0075 19 mm 010 25 mm 6 2 157 5 mm 1 6 to 6 5 41 mm to 1
104. 1280 column pointer High Speed MINI Hawk 8 to 752 column pointer 3 Megapixel MINI Hawk 8 to 2048 column pointer Narrow Margins Serial Cmd K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column width narrow margins background color symbology gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 11 6 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Configuration Database Background Color Serial Cmd K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column width narrow margins background color symbology gt Default Both Options 0 White 1 Black 2 Both Symbology Definition This field allows the user to configure the database to enable specific symbologies for selected database indexes Symbology specific parameters must be configured with the appropriate symbology command For example if fixed length Code 128 is required it must first be set up with the Code 128 command lt K474 gt To select a particular symbology add the number value associated with that symbology Examples If Data Matrix and Code 39 are required the paramater would be 2 16 18 If 1 2 5 BC412 and DataBar Limited RSS Limited are required the parameter would be 128 2048 16384 18560 Serial Cmd K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel sub sampling row pointer column pointer
105. 2 10 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Using ESP Document Memo The information you type in the Document Memo field will appear in a context sensitive text box whenever your cursor hovers over the Document Memo item on the Options menu Insert up to 250 characters to describe this document Type document specific information here Options Preferences Type document specific information here Model Memo Model Memo Similar to Document Memo the information you type in the Model Memo field will appear in a context sensitive text box whenever your cursor hovers over the Model Memo item on the Options menu Memos created in Model Memo are specific to the model enabled when the message was created Insert up to 250 characters to describe this model Type model specific information here Options Preferences Document Memo Model Memo h Type model specific information here Note Memos must be saved in a esp file if you want them to available in your next session If you do not save your current session any memos that you have entered during the session will be discarded and will be unavailable in your next session MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 2 11 Autoconnect Autoconnect If your RS 232 connection attempt fails you can use Autoconnect to establish a connection between the imager and the host a Autoconneck Connecting Select the COM Port COM1
106. 4 Matchieode Type itii on i De 9 5 Match Replace ederet eter ee oerte Re 9 10 Mismatch Replace a2 iere Etpe Rie 9 11 New Master Pins sii e eeu ette rie 9 12 Chapter 10 Camera and IP Setup Camera and IP Setup by ESP ssssseee enne 10 2 Camera and IP Setup Serial Commands sseeeee 10 3 VideO PER 10 4 Evaluatiori i rei ined ec ee N d d ete 10 5 Calibration mE dike ekiei tie aare ea nates 10 8 Window of Interest nitet crede Naeem bones eee ene dns 10 9 Configuration Database sss meme 10 13 Dynamic Setup ipe ipee sin nese Retest eee ees 10 14 X Mode M Seve MR 10 15 Pixel Sub Sampling iiini te erepto Deed 10 16 Camera Settirigs 2 i ette pae e oda cene ees 10 18 Camera Settings 3 Megapixel sse 10 19 Focal Distance inr ei eid dee eee ege LER Er eese doc 10 20 Focal Distance 3 Megapixel eseeee 10 21 Focal Distance Table Read Only seseeee 10 22 Focal Distance Table Read Only 3 Megapixel 10 23 Increment Focus Position eese tentes 10 24 Decrement Focus Position sss 10 24 Increment Focus Position 3 Megapixel 10 25 Decrement Focus Position 3 Megapixel 10 25 Illumination Brightness eoe iere tnit trenes 10 26 Color Filter ice Ret d
107. 4 2010 skype 42 Skype Technologies SA 9 24 2010 SonicWALL SSL VPN NetExtender SonicWALL Inc 4 2 2010 Ap TestTrack 8 9 2010 8 1UC232A 86 ATEN 8 6 2010 E Visionscape 8 6 2010 1 Visuel Studio 2010 Tools for SQL Server Compact 35 Microsoft Corporation 8 5 2010 Web Deployment Tool Mier 8 5 2010 Microscan Systems Inc WinMerge 212 4 Thingamahoochie Software E WPF Inspector Christian Moser 9 16 2010 ER Microscan Systems Inc Product version 1 0 0 0 m To use the Virtual COM Port again follow the steps above to re install the driver Changing the COM Port Follow these steps to change the reader s COM Port 1 Right click on My Computer in the Windows Start menu and select Properties 2 Select the Hardware tab in the System Properties dialog and click the Device Manager button Device Manager 3 Expand the Ports COM amp LPT item on the Device Manager menu Right click on Microscan Reader and select Properties 4 Select the Port Settings tab in the Properties dialog and click the Advanced button 5 Expand the COM Port Number menu on the Advanced Settings dialog and select your new COM Port number gt Advanced Settings for COM3 V Use FIFO buffers requires 16550 compatible UART Select lower settings to corect connection problems FERE nce Select higher settings for fester performance peeas Receive Buffer Low 1 High 14 14 Trenomit Buffer Low 1 ue ce COM Bot Number
108. 40 x 480 VGA 854 x 480 WVGA 1280 x 1024 SXGA 2048 x 1536 QXGA Image Sensor A device that converts a visual image to an electrical signal a CCD or CMOS array Initialize Implement serial configuration commands into the imager s active memory Input A channel or communications line Decoded data or a discrete signal that is received by a device Integration Exposure of pixels on a CMOS sensor IP See Image Processing Ladder Orientation A linear symbol orientation in which the bars are parallel to the symbol s direction of travel LED See Light Emitting Diode Light Emitting Diode LED A semiconductor device that emits light when conducting current Lens A transparent piece of material with curved surfaces which either converge or diverge light rays Machine Vision The automatic acquisition and analysis of images to obtain desired data for controlling a specific activity Multidrop A communications protocol for networking two or more imagers or other devices with a concentrator or controller and characterized by the use of individual device addresses and the RS 485 standard Noise The same as static in a phone line or snow in a television picture noise is any unwanted electrical signal that interferes with the image being read and transferred by the imager Normally Closed A discrete output state that is only active when open Normally Open A discrete output
109. 417 12 Composite 13 BC412 14 Data Matrix 15 QR Code 16 Micro QR Code 17 Aztec Code 18 Postal Symbologies MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Output Format Length Definition Specifies the length of the decoded symbol allowed to occupy this location in multisymbol output Note To filter or order a symbol the symbol must meet all requirements of the selected filter index Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology length wildcard placeholder data unused database index Default 0 Options 0 to 64 Wildcard Definition This is the character to be used in the data output field when performing a data filter comparison The wildcard character represents the end of matching and allows for variable lengths of symbol output Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt Default 2A hex Options Any ASCII input in the form of a pair of hex characters Example 2A 00 disabled See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Placeholder Definition The placeholder character requires a character to be present but does not compare the data value Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology length wildcard placeholder data unused database index Default 2 3F hex Options Any ASCII input in the form of a pair of
110. 470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Character Status Code 39 Serial Cmd K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Character Output Status Code 39 Usage Check Character Output Status added to the symbol provides addi tional data security Definition When enabled the check character character is read and compared along with the symbol data When disabled symbol data is sent without the check character Note With Check Character Output Status and an External or Serial trigger option enabled an invalid check character calculation will cause a No Read message to be transmitted at the end of the read cycle Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 6 9 Code 39 Large Intercharacter Gap Code 39 Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Large Intercharacter Gap is helpful for reading symbols that are printed out of spe
111. 545 550 556 561 565 570 574 578 582 586 590 594 597 601 gt The current focus position would be 410 4 1 Send lt K525 gt Send lt K525 gt Response lt K525 447 gt Decrement Focus Position Definition Decrements the imager s focus setting to the next focal distance supported by the imager Note Use the Focus Distance Table command lt K526 gt to find the focal distance settings supported by your imager Serial Cmd lt K525 gt Options 200 2 to 600 6 The following example assumes a focus position setting of 400 4 with access to the focus distance values shown in the imager response Send lt K526 gt Response lt K526 30 202 212 225 241 264 410 447 466 481 492 502 511 519 526 533 539 545 550 556 561 565 570 574 578 582 586 590 594 597 601 gt The current focus position would be 410 4 1 Send lt K525 gt Send lt K525 gt Response lt K525 264 gt 10 24 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Camera and IP Setup Increment Focus Position 3 Megapixel Definition Increments the imager s focus setting to the next focal distance supported by the imager Note Use the Focus Distance Table command lt K526 gt to find the focal distance settings supported by your imager Serial Cmd lt K525 gt Options 200 2 to 600 6 Standard Density 200 2 to 500 5 Micro Density The following example assumes a focus position setting of 400 4 wi
112. 65 1 mm 010 25 mm 015 38 mm 8 5 215 9 mm 1 4 to 8 5 36 mm to 215 9 mm 020 51 mm 030 76 mm 9 5 241 mm 1 0 to 10 0 25 mm to 254 mm MINI Hawk High Speed Narrow bar width Field of View Read Range 1D 2D maximum with autofocus Ultra High Density 0033 08 mm 005 13 mm 1 6 40 mm 1 9 to 4 4 47 mm to 110 mm 0075 19 mm 010 25 mm 2 5 64 mm 1 7 to 6 7 42 mm to 170 mm 015 38 mm 020 51 mm 2 9 74 mm 1 5 to 8 0 38 mm to 203 mm Standard Density 005 13 mm 0075 19 mm 2 8 72 mm 1 6 to 4 4 41 mm to 112 mm 0075 19 mm 010 25 mm 3 8 97 mm 1 5 to 6 2 38 mm to 157 mm 010 25 mm 015 38 mm 4 7 118 mm 1 4 to 7 6 36 mm to 193 mm 020 51 mm 030 76 mm 6 2 158 mm 1 3 to 10 0 33 mm to 254 mm MINI Hawk High Resolution Narrow bar width Field of View Read Range 1D 2D maximum with autofocus Ultra High Density 0033 0 08 mm 005 0 13 mm 2 2 56 mm 2 0 to 4 4 51 mm to 112 mm 0075 0 19 mm 010 0 25 mm 3 6 91 mm 1 9 to 6 7 48 mm to 170 mm 015 0 38 mm 020 0 51 mm 4 0 102 mm 1 9 to 7 7 48 mm to 196 mm High Density 005 0 13 mm 0075 0 19 mm 3 1 79 mm 1 5 to 6 0 38 mm to 152 mm 0075 0 19 mm 010 0 25 mm 4 2 107 mm 1 2 to 8 0 30 mm to 203 mm 015 0 38 mm 020 0 51 mm 5 6 142 mm 0 9 to 10 5 23 mm to 267 mm
113. 9 STX 0x18 ETX 0x0B ACK 0x0C NAK 0x0D lt K102 0 gt RS 232 Point to Point polling lt K102 1 gt RS 485 true multidrop with switched transmitter lt K143 40 gt 40 ms Response Timeout ACK NAK Main Port lt K100 9 0 1 1 gt Baud Rate 230K Parity None Stop Bits 2 Data Bits 8 lt K140 4 gt ACK NAK lt K147 01 1B 2E 1F gt Default RES and REQ 00 disabled STX 0x01 ETX 0x1B ACK 0x2E NAK 0x1F lt K102 1 gt RS 422 enabled lt K102 0 gt RS 232 enabled lt K143 50 gt 50 ms Response Timeout Auxiliary Port Listed below are several examples of Auxiliary Port commands lt K101 2 4 0 1 1 gt Half Duplex Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 2 Data Bits 8 lt K101 1 5 0 1 1 gt Transparent Baud Rate 19 2K Parity None Stop Bits 2 Data Bits 8 lt K101 3 7 0 1 1 gt Full Duplex Baud Rate 57 6K Parity None Stop Bits 2 Data Bits 8 lt K101 5 6 0 1 1 gt Command Processing Baud Rate 230K Parity None Stop Bits 2 Data Bits 8 3 22 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Communications USB HID Interface The USB version of the MINI Hawk operates as an HID Human Interface Device on the USB bus HID class devices communicate via report packets An HID may support multiple report types each of which is identified with a unique report ID The MINI Hawk supports two different report types Microscan HID Report ID 1 Keyboard Report ID 2 The imager always outpu
114. A 10 Type Command Name lt C gt Enter Decode Rate Test Read Rate lt Cp gt Enter Percent Rate Test lt J gt Exit Decode Rate and Percent Rate Test lt N gt No Read Counter lt O gt No Read Counter Reset lt T gt Trigger Counter Counter Request lt U gt Trigger Counter Reset and Clear lt V gt Good Read Match Counter lt W gt Good Read Match Counter Reset lt X gt Mismatch Counter lt Y gt Mismatch Counter Reset lt G gt Store Next Symbol Read to Database Index 1 Master Database lt Gn gt Store Next Symbol Read to Database Index n lt NEWM gt New Master Load Status it Display All Firmware Part Numbers ita Display Application Code Part Number lt b gt Display Boot Code Part Number Part Number lt p gt Display Profile Module Part Numbers Checksum t Display All Available Firmware Checksums lt la gt Display Application Code Code Checksum Ib Display Boot Code Checksum Ip Display Profile Module Checksum L1 Programmable Output 1 L2 Programmable Output 2 L3 Programmable Output 3 Device Control 1 Targeting System On I0 Targeting System Off lt l gt Disable Imager lt H gt Enable Imager lt a1 gt Include PDF Information in Preamble PDF417 lt A gt Reset does not save for power on lt Ard gt Reset and Recall Microscan Defaults Default Reset Save lt ArdWB gt PM Recall Microscan Whit
115. Also if this feature is used in conjunction with Output Filtering multiple decoded symbols in a captured image frame can be output according to their location in the field of view MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 11 13 Database Mode Region of Interest ROI by ESP When Image Dimensions is set to Region of Interest the database image dimension parameters are P and decode settings and they determine the region or area of the captured image to be processed AARE Indexes s gt Auto Sync Database settings with Reader Advanced Options lt lt WOI ROl gt gt Capture Settings Processing Settings Current 1000 p0 4 00 Disable LN A CO nns ENS Te 1000 20 400 Disable A r2 lf Enable white Disabled Test 1000 n0 400 Disable o ago fz52 f Enable white Disabled Test ago 752 7000 20 400 Disable o agn r2 ff Enable White Disabled Test 1000 20 400 Disable 0 0 480 752 gy Enable White Disabled Test v Capture for Every Index Show Database Index in Output I Sort Index Positions on Good Reads Calibrate Receive Settings Send Settings Load Current To Index Load Index To Current Narrow Margins Background and Symbol Type are all Processing Settings values 11 14 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Configuration Database Save Current Settings to Configuration Database Definit
116. CTS Usage A reader initiates a data transfer with an RTS request to send transmission The host when ready responds with a CTS clear to send and the data is transmitted RTS and CTS signals are transmitted over two dedicated wires as defined in the RS 232 standard Used only with RS 232 Definition Point to Point with RTS CTS request to send clear to send is a simple hardware handshake protocol that allows a reader to initiate data transfers to the host Serial Cmd lt K140 1 gt Point to Point with XON XOFF Usage If an XOFF has been received from the host data will not be sent to the host until the host sends an XON During the XOFF phase the host is free to carry on other chores and accept data from other devices Used only with RS 232 Definition This option enables the host to send the XON and XOFF command as a single byte transmission command of start Q or stop S Serial Cmd K140 2 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 3 5 Host Port Protocol Point to Point with RTS CTS and XON XOFF Usage Used only with RS 232 Definition This option is a combination of Point to Point with RTS CTS and Point to Point with XON XOFF Serial Cmd lt K140 3 gt ACK NAK Definition See the ACK NAK Options command lt K147 gt on page 3 7 Serial Cmd lt K140 4 gt Polling Mode Definition See the Polling Mode Options command K148 on page 3 8 Serial Cmd lt K140 5 gt Poll Address Ser
117. Camera setup interface a Terminal interface a Utilities interface and an Output Format interface ESP can be used to configure the MINI Hawk in three different ways Tree Controls Each configuration menu contains a list of all option settings that pertain to that specific element of imager operation For example the Communications menu shows a Host Port Connections option and then a list of the sub options Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits and Data Bits Each of these sub options is configurable by using dropdown menus Graphic User Interfaces Imager settings can be configured using such point and click tools as radio buttons zoom in zoom out sliders spin boxes check boxes and drag and drop functions Terminal ESP s Terminal allows you to send serial configuration and utility commands directly to the imager by typing them in the provided text field Information about using ESP in specific applications is provided in subsequent sections For ESP system requirements see Minimum System Requirements in Chapter 1 Quick Start MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 2 1 EZ Mode EZ Mode In EZ Mode you are presented with the Locate Calibrate and Test options After connecting to your imager EZ Mode is the screen you will see You will be provided with on screen instructions that will help you with positioning testing and calibration Test Click the Test button to start the Read Rate test for a quick indicat
118. Counter Memory space allocated to keep track of imager events DAC See Digital to Analog Converter Daisy Chain Linkage of primary and secondary imagers allowing data to be relayed up to the host via auxiliary port connections Decode A Good Read The successful interpretation and output of the information encoded in a symbol Default Restores ROM or flash settings initializes serial commands and resets all counters Delimited A delimited command or field is bracketed by predefined characters Decode Rate The number of good reads per second ahieved by an imager Darkfield Illumination Lighting of objects surfaces or particles at very shallow or low angles so that light does not directly enter a reader s optical hardware Depth of Field The in focus range of an imaging system Measured from the distance behind an object to the distance in front of the object with all objects appearing in focus Diffused Lighting Scattered soft lighting from a wide variety of angles used to eliminate shadows and specular glints from profiled highly reflective surfaces Digital to Analog Converter DAC A VLSI circuit used to convert digitally processed images to analog for display on a monitor Digital Imaging Conversion of an image into pixels by means of an Analog to Digital Converter where the level of each pixel can be stored digitally Digital Signal Processor DSP A VLSI chip designed for ult
119. Disabled Axial Non uniformity Disabled Unused ECC Disabled Grading Percent Cell Damage Disabled The imager s field of view is shown here When grading is completed the initial report is also shown in this viewing area Quiet Zone Disabled Symbol Angle Disabled v i gt For Help press F1 MINIHawk i MINIHawk GOMES Point to Point COMI 3115 2K N 8 1 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 8 5 Overview of Symbol Quality Locate Tab The Locate tab allows the user to determine the position of the symbol within the imager s field of view and to optimize the imager s camera settings for symbol quality evaluation ESP ESP Untitled File Model Options Connect View Help Sf a 4 r EZ Mode Autoconnect Send Recv Switch Model Parameters Setup Terminal Utilities Communication Read Cycle Symbologies 1 0 Symbol Quality Matchcode Diagnostics Parameters ESP Values BSE Report Locate Preferences Global Total Read Time Disabled Calibrate Symbol Quality Separator Contrast Quni Mode Click the Locate Click the Calibrate a ai button to display the button to optimize ISO IEC 16022 Parameters fi Symbol Contrast symbol in the camera settings Print Growth imager s field of view Axial Non uniformity Unused ECC Disabled Grading Percent Cell Damage Disabled Capture Time Disabled Locate Time Disabled Decode Time Disabled Pixels Per Element Disabled ECC Level Di
120. F As many as 4 bytes or hex pairs See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 14 7 Format Insert Format Insert by ESP Symbol Parse Stp Insert Data Extract Range Insert Sample Symbol Parse Output Add Step Remove Step Clear All Parsing Original ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPGRSTUVWxv201 23456789 OK Cancel Insert SP sr EN SoH sTx ETX Eor ENo Ack BEL es HT Lr vr rr cn so sri si nc1 pc2 pcs Deal ak SYN ETB CAN EM sup Esc Fs as ns us se Click Delete to remove characters Cancel The Format Insert process is very similar to the Format Extract process except that Insert allows you to enter characters using the Insertion Calculator shown above i Parse Symbols Send and Save Y Hide Parse Table Test Build Sequence Insert Data Extract Range Insert SP SP Extract 3 5 Notice that Extract and Insert share the same Parse Table Sample Symbol Parse Symbol Parse Stp Insert Data Extract Range Insert Extract Add Step Remove Step Clear All Parsing Sample Symbol Parse Originak micro Original amp BEDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUMwXYZ 1l23456788 Output cro lt Output CDE tees 14 8 MINI Hawk Hig
121. Focal Distances Definition Specifies the number of focal distances supported by the imager Serial Cmd K526 number of focal distances focal distance Options 1 to 255 Focal Distance Definition Each x output represents a focal distance that is supported by the imager The values are specified in 1 100ths of an inch but the focal distance increments and decrements are not that fine The focal distance is defined from a curve equation whose constants are calibrated during factory setup The output value is in terms of inches and it is multiplied by 100 to remove the decimal place For example an output of 375 would signify a focal distance of 3 75 Serial Cmd K526 number of focal distances focal distance Options 200 2 to 600 6 Standard Density 200 2 to 500 5 Micro Density MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 10 23 Increment Focus Position Increment Focus Position Definition Increments the imager s focus setting to the next focal distance supported by the imager Note Use the Focus Distance Table command lt K526 gt to find the focal distance settings supported by your imager Serial Cmd lt K525 gt Options 200 2 to 600 6 The following example assumes a focus position setting of 400 4 with access to the focus distance values shown in the imager response Send lt K526 gt Response K526 30 202 212 225 241 264 410 447 466 481 492 502 511 519 526 533 539
122. HIFT in the Modifier field when necessary Only the first Keycode in the 6 byte array will be populated MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 3 29 USB HID Interface USB HID Configuration Options The user has the following options for configuring and defaulting a USB version of the MINI Hawk Configuration Symbols Data Matrix with Configure Reader Flag Symbol configuration can be performed out of the box as the MINI Hawk is configured for Continuous Read Mode and Data Matrix is enabled by default Data Matrix symbols are used to encode configuration commands when the symbology s configure reader flag is set If the read cycle is changed or if Data Matrix is disabled another configuration default method must be used This is because the USB MINI Hawk has no external trigger unless the user has configured the EZ button as a trigger EZ Button Configuration By default basic calibration can be initiated from the EZ button 3 beeps Note that this only changes the camera image processing and symbology settings of the imager To default the USB MINI Hawk hold down the EZ button during power on Note This only overwrites Power On settings with Custom Default settings as when the Zrc command is received It does not overwrite Power On settings with Factory Defaults as when the Zrd command is received If Custom Defaults are misconfigured another method must be used to default the imager Implemen
123. I Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Communications Daisy Chain ID Status Usage Used in a daisy chain setup in cases where the host needs to know which reader in the chain sent the data Definition Each reader in a daisy chain can be assigned a one or two character ID that will appear in front of decoded data and identify its source Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note Enable disable and length must be the same in all readers Daisy Chain ID Usage Used in a daisy chain setup in cases where the host needs to know which reader in the chain sent the data A one or two character prefix which identifies the particular daisy chain Pennines reader from which the data is being sent to the host K104 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d SENTIAS status daisy chain i d Default 1 Options Any one or two ASCII characters Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K101h 3C gt For gt lt K101h 3E gt For lt K101h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 3 17 Auxiliary Port System Data Status Auxiliary Port System Data Status
124. II characters as hex values 7 40 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual I O Parameters Quality Output Separator Definition The separator character separates quality output data from symbol data Serial Cmd lt K704 separator decodes per trigger status Default Options Any ASCII character Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt K704h 3C gt For gt lt K704h 3E gt For lt K704h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Decodes per Trigger Status Definition When this feature is enabled the imager enters a state where it processes frames as configured until the end of a read cycle with or without a successful symbol decode When the read cycle ends the imager outputs any decoded symbol data along with the decodes per trigger count Serial Cmd lt K704 separator decodes per trigger status gt Default 0 Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 7 41 Configuring EZ Trax Output Configuring EZ Trax Output After you have set up your imager for EZ Trax you can configure the software in three different ways using the EZ Trax interface using the tree controls in ESP and using serial commands For detailed information about how to use the EZ Trax user interface for configuration refer to the Help menu in EZ Trax
125. Imager User s Manual 8 9 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output Symbol Quality Parameters for Data Matrix symbols specified by ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Contrast Usage Lets the user know if contrast settings are less than acceptable Definition All the pixels that fall within the area of the test symbol including its required zone will be sorted by their reflectance values to select the darkest 1096 and the lightest 1096 of the pixels The arithmetic mean of the darkest and the lightest pixels is calculated and the difference of the two means is the Symbol Contrast ANSI Symbol Contrast grading is defined this way A 4 0 if SC gt 70 B 3 0 if SC 5596 C 2 0 if SC 4096 D 1 0 if SC gt 20 F 0 0 if SC 2096 If enabled the symbol contrast is appended to the symbol data according to the ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output Mode setting Serial Cmd K709 symbol contrast print growth axial non uniformity UE C gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Print Growth Definition The extent to which dark or light markings appropriately fill or exceed their module boundaries These values are determined by counting pixels in the clock pattern of the binary digitized image then comparing it to a nominal value and minimum and maximum values The print growth grade is defined in this way ade if 050 lt PG lt 0 50 B 3 0 if 070 lt PG lt 0 70 C 2 0 if 085 lt PG
126. J O05 Welcome to Easy Setup Program Focal Distance view Note To avoid glare set the angle of the reader about 15 degrees relative to the symbol 2 Click Locate to begin Ibbdbubillashbibibilihhliahbiulbulbilluil Test Stop Decodes per Second AEC a0 131034 64 v For Help press F1 CONNECTED MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 6 29 Postal Symbologies Postal Symbology Type Usage The following 1D Postal Symbologies are used in mail sortation auditing certified mail registered mail metered mail and point of sale POS applications Definition Determines the postal symbology that will be decoded by the imager Serial Cmd lt K460 postal symbology type POSTNET status PLANET status USPS4CB status POSTNET allow B and B fields Australia Post allow 0 FCC gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 U S Post POSTNET PLANET USPS4CB 2 Australia Post 3 Japan Post 4 Royal Mail 5 KIX 6 UPU 6 30 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Symbologies U S Post POSTNET PLANET USPSACB When U S Post is enabled lt K460 1 gt the imager will only decode POSTNET PLANET and USPS4CB symbols Important POSTNET Status PLANET Status and USPSACB Status are enabled by default However if any of the three U S Post symbologies is set to disabled individually symbols of that type will not be decoded by the imager even when U S Post is e
127. K140 command see Poll Address on page 3 6 To enable true multidrop protocol the RS422 485 port must be enabled lt K102 1 gt in order to turn the transmitter on and off If RS 232 is enabled instead of RS422 485 lt K102 0 gt then Polling Mode will operate as a Point to Point polling protocol This is because the RS 232 transmitter is always left on when enabled Serial Cmd lt K148 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt RES NAK Defaults RES Reset 04 REQ Request 05 STX Start of Text 02 ETX End of Text 03 ACK Acknowledge 06 NAK Negative Acknowledge 15 Note See Polling Mode Data Flow Examples in Appendix D for sample Polling Mode communication scenarios Note See USB HID Interface on page 3 23 for protocol information relating to USB 3 8 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Communications RS 422 Status Usage RS 232 is an industry standard RS 422 is used when greater cable lengths are required and or where noise interference is an issue Definition RS 422 if enabled allows communication through RS 422 I O lines When RS 422 is enabled RS 232 is disabled When RS 422 is disabled RS 232 is enabled Serial Cmd lt K102 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note The default setting can only be changed in readers with multiplexed RS 232 RS 422 ports It is forced to 1 enabled in readers with dedicated RS 422 ports MINI Hawk High Performance Imag
128. MICROSCAN MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual P N 84 006303 Rev A Copyright and Disclaimer ii Copyright 2010 Microscan Systems Inc ISO 9001 Certified Issued by T V USA All rights reserved The information contained herein is proprietary and is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and or service Microscan manufactured equipment and is not to be released reproduced or used for any other purpose without written permission of Microscan Throughout this manual trademarked names might be used Rather than place a trademark symbol at every occurrence of a trademarked name we state herein that we are using the names only in an editorial fashion and to the benefit of the trademark owner with no intention of infringement Disclaimer The information and specifications described in this manual are subject to change without notice Latest Manual Version For the latest version of this manual see the Download Center on our web site at www microscan com Technical Support For technical support e mail helpdesk microscan com Warranty and Terms of Sale For Standard Warranty information see www microscan com warranty Microscan Systems Inc Renton Headquarters 425 226 5700 800 251 7711 Nashua Office 603 598 8400 Microscan Europe 011 31 172 423360 Microscan Asia Pacific 65 6846 1214 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Introduction T
129. N report to host 1_62_ lt K714 1 ALONG MESSAGE STREAMED OVER MULTIPLE MICROSCAN HID RE 0 REPORT ID 1 Microscan HID LENGTH 62 DATA lt K714 1 ALONG MESSAGE STREAMED OVER MULTIPLE MICROSCAN HID RE This shows the response to the lt 714 gt command Note that the command status response is not yet complete See the next report example for the complete response NUL padding 0 bytes IN report to host 1 6 PORTS gt 56 REPORT ID 1 Microscan HID LENGTH 6 DATA PORTS gt This is the end of the response to the lt K714 gt command from the previous example The entire lt K714 gt command response is as follows DATA K714 1 ALONG MESSAGE STREAMED OVER MULTIPLE MICROSCAN HID REPORTS gt NUL padding 56 bytes MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 3 27 USB HID Interface Keyboard Report Format Size 9 bytes fixed length Structure REPORT ID 1 MODIFIER 1 RESERVED 1 KEYCODES 6 Values in parentheses indicate the size in bytes of the field Important The host application does not need to understand and process Keyboard Reports This task belongs to the host operating system Keycodes are passed to the host application as if a user were typing keyboard text The host application must be the active application in order to receive keystrokes Keyboard Reports protocol requires that two reports be sent for every keystroke The first report indicates which ke
130. Output Disabled will be output in the form of an Grade Output Disabled v lt abbreviated identifier for each Disabled read cycle Enabled 7 44 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual I O Parameters Configuring EZ Trax Output by Serial Command Usage Useful for when you want to configure EZ Trax output using serial commands instead of the EZ Trax graphic interface Definition When EZ Trax output is enabled the imager will attempt to output all enabled EZ Trax options EZ Trax will not function unless enabled Serial Cmd lt K757 status comm port image mode image format JPEG quality object info output grade output Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Comm Port Definition Selects the communication port that will be used to transfer image files Serial Cmd lt K757 status comm port image mode image format JPEG quality object info output grade output gt Default Host Options 0 Host 1 Aux 2 USB Host Port Sends output using the current Host Port Aux Port Sends output using the Auxiliary Port USB Sends output using a USB connection Image Mode Definition Determines which read cycle condition triggers image file output Serial Cmd K757 status comm port image mode image format JPEG quality object info output grade output Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Good Read 2 No Read 3 No Read and Good Read 4 Mismatch Good Read Outputs
131. POSTNET allow B and B fields Australia Post allow 0 FCC gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 6 33 GS1 DataBar RSS GS1 DataBar RSS Note GS1 DataBar symbologies were previously known as Reduced Space Symbology or RSS DataBar Expanded RSS Expanded Note DataBar Expanded was previously known as RSS Expanded Usage Used to encode primary and supplementary data in retail point of sale and other applications Definition DataBar Expanded is a variable length symbology that can encode supplementary information in addition to the 14 digit EAN item identification number and is capable of encoding up to 74 numeric or 41 alphabetic characters Serial Cmd lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Where appropriate use 1 non stacked for better performance over 2 stacked and non stacked Fixed Symbol Length Status DataBar Expanded Definition When enabled the imager will check the symbol length against the symbol length field minus the embedded check character If disabled any length would be considered valid Serial Cmd lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length DataBar Expanded Usage Fixed Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data in
132. Performance Imager About the MINI Hawk High Performance Imager The key features of the MINI Hawk High Performance Imager are Powerful X Mode algorithm for Direct Part Mark decoding High Density SXGA High Speed WVGA and 3 Megapixel QXGA options Software adjustable focus USB RS 232 and RS 422 485 connectivity Support for both linear and 2D symbologies High output LED illumination EZ Button for setup and testing A blue target pattern that identifies the center point of the field of view A green flash visible from all angles to signal a successful read Compact size for easy integration into a wide variety of applications MINI Hawk Communications There are three ways to configure and test the MINI Hawk Microscan s Windows based ESP Easy Setup Program which offers point and click ease of use and visual responses to user adjustments Serial commands such as lt K100 1 gt that can be sent from ESP s Terminal or another terminal program The EZ Button at the back of the imager viii MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Introduction Warning and Caution Summary WARNING LED LIGHT DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT LED Output 564 mW Wavelength 470 nm 525 nm 617 nm IEC 60825 1 1993 A1 1997 A2 2001 Viewing the MINI Hawk s LED output with optical instruments such as magnifiers eye loupes or microscopes within a distance of 100 mm could ca
133. RE RE M T AE E E TA 12 3 AO EEE A TA A E de NE TTA EENE 12 4 WY eked ol eens tart E E E A A e ve T AE TETEE 12 5 Terminal Window MeNnu ccccccccsssesseseececeececeecesaeesseeeececeeeeeeaueasssseeeeceeeeseaeeaueeseeeseeeseeneeas 12 6 This section describes the Terminal window and macro functions in ESP MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 12 1 Terminal Window Terminal Window amp Terminal Click this button to display the Terminal view The following view will appear Copy paste save Clear screen EP ESP Untitled File Model Options Connect View Terminal Help Type text here to Terminal Type serial find matching text screen commands in the Terminal here window DoR 9 3 EZ Mode Autoconnect Switch Model j 29 Ww Parameters Setup Terminal B B ll Find Macros listed on this bar Next Row Read Rate decode sec For Help press F1 v Send lt caL gt Click on Macros arrow to Add Macro Remove Macro or Edit Macro Click on desired Macro to run Target Pattern Off Counter _ See Z The Terminal screen allows you to send serial commands to the imager by using Macros by copying and pasting or by typing commands in the Send text field The Terminal screen also displays symbol data or information from the imager You can also right click on the Termin
134. Re enter Read Cycle The programmable output is active when the Output On condition has been met and is held active until a new read cycle begins Note All of the Output On modes are inhibited when any Output on Warning is active for Output 1 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 7 23 Configurable Output 1 Trend Analysis Output 1 Note Output On under Output 1 Parameters must be set to Trend Analysis for this output to function Output 1 Parameters Output On Trend Analysis Under Output 1 Parameters expand the Trend Analysis tree Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Noread Number of Triggers 25 Number to Output On 4 Decodes per Trigger 1 Usage Useful in cases where the user doesn t want to shut down for one condition but wants to monitor quality and read conditions Definition Applies Trend Analysis settings to Output 1 With Trend Analysis the user can track the occurrences and frequency of mismatches No Reads and the number of reads per trigger and output the results to any of three outputs Example Trend Analysis Mode No Read Trigger Evaluation Period 25 triggers read cycles Number to Output On 4 In this example the imager will activate an output when 4 No Reads occur within a period of 25 triggers read cycles 7 24 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual I O Parameters Trend Analysis Mode Definition Sets the trend condition Mismatch No Read or Decodes p
135. Read starting with Index 1 The Master Symbol Database will be loaded with all symbols decoded in the read cycle as long as it does not exceed the Number of Master Symbols parameter lt K225 status gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled New Master Load Status Definition Serial Cmd 9 12 The new master status responds with the number of the next master position to be loaded where 0 represents idle or no master to be loaded Example If the user has the Number of Master Symbols set to 1 and then either sends a lt G gt or toggles an active New Master Pin the state will be 1 and prior to reading and effectively loading position 1 the response to lt NEWM gt would be lt NEWM 1 gt Once a symbol has been read and loaded the status will be cleared lt NEWM 0 gt lt NEWM gt MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 870 Camera and IP Setup Contents Camera and IP Setup by ESP need reete uie re adl E EEE aieiaiee 10 2 Camera and IP Setup Serial Commands sss enne 10 3 Morlem 10 4 EvalUation m a 10 5 ec lecum 10 8 Window of Interest E 10 9 Configuration Database 2 22 22 sccs ce cesceesteeeseccsctee edens oec de ege ede eese eee casensebeeestsencadesveedterecautes 10 13 DYNAMIC Setup E 10 14 Oum
136. S Terminate Transfer 1 The protocol makes 3 retry attempts before data is flushed and transfer is aborted A 24 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Appendices Appendix E ASCII Table Dec Hex Mne Ctrl Dec Hex Ch Dec Hex Ch Dec Hex Ch 00 00 NUL 32 20 SP 64 40 96 60 01 01 SOH A 33 21 65 41 A 97 61 a 02 02 STX B 34 22 66 42 B 98 62 b 03 03 ETX C 35 23 67 43 C 99 63 c 04 04 EOT D 36 24 68 44 D 100 64 d 05 05 ENQ E 37 25 96 69 45 E 101 65 e 06 06 ACK F 38 26 amp 70 46 F 102 66 f 07 07 BEL AG 39 27 i 71 47 G 103 67 g 08 08 BS H 40 28 72 48 H 104 68 h 09 09 HT 41 29 73 49 105 69 i 10 0A LF AJ 42 2A x 74 4A J 106 6A j 11 0B VT K 43 2B 75 4B K 107 6B k 12 0C FF L 44 2C j 76 4C L 108 6C l 13 OD CR AM 45 2D 77 4D M 109 6D m 14 OE SO N 46 2E i 78 4E N 110 6E n 15 OF Sl O 47 2F 79 4F O 111 6F o 16 10 DLE p 48 30 0 80 50 P 112 70 p 17 11 DC1 Q 49 31 1 81 51 Q 113 71 q 18 12 DC2 R 50 32 2 82 52 R 114 72 r 19 13 DC3 S 51 33 3 83 53 S 115 73 S 20 14 DC4 AT 52 34 4 84 54 T 116 74 t 21 15 NAK U 53 35 5 85 55 U 117 75 u 22 16 SYN y 54 36 6 86 56 V 118 76 V 23 17 ETB W 55 37 7 87 57 Ww 119 77 w 24 18 CAN X 56 38 8 88 58 X 120 78 x 25 19 EM Y 57 39 9 89 59 Y 121 79 y 26 1A SUB Z 58 3A 90 5A Z 122 7A z 27 1B ESC 59 3B 91 5B 123 7B 28 1C FS 60 3C 92 5C
137. S 6300 5005G MINI Hawk with Learn Mode High Speed Ultra High Density RS 232 422 485 5VDC FIS 6300 5006G MINI Hawk with Learn Mode High Speed Standard Density USB I O 5VDC FIS 6300 5007G MINI Hawk with Learn Mode High Speed Ultra High Density USB I O 5VDC FIS 6300 5008G Safety Certifications FCC UL cUL CE CB ROHS WEEE FE 4 CE ISO 9001 Registered Company TUV USA Member of TUV NORD Group 2010 Microscan Systems Inc All rights reserved Specifications subject to change Product specifications are given for typical performance at 25 C 77 F using grade A labels Performance characteristics may vary at high temperatures or other environmental extremes Warranty One year limited warranty on parts and labor Extended warranty available MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual A 5 Electrical Specifications Appendix B Electrical Specifications Power 4 0 Watts max 5VDC 5 200 mV p p max ripple 554 mA 5VDC typ Optional Int 10 28V Accy Host Connector Pin Assignments High Density 15 Pin D sub Socket Connector Pin Host RS 232 Host Aux RS 232 Host RS 422 485 In Out 1 Power 5 VDC In 2 TxD TxD TxD Out 3 RxD RxD RxD In 4 Power Signal Ground 5 NC 6 RTS Aux TxD TxD Out 7 Output 1 TTL a Out 8 Default configuration b In 9 Trigger In 10 CTS Aux RxD RxD In 11 Output 3 TTL a Out 12 New Master NPN
138. Serial S Primary 9 Secondary Secondary Imager Imager Imager S S S Host 2 Send lt K150DAISY gt 3 If necessary set the primary imager to Edge After Autoconfigure you may set the primary imager to Edge S but the other imagers must remain in Serial S H Primary M9 Secondary 9 Secondary ost Imager Imager Imager E S S MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 3 19 Response Timeout Response Timeout Usage Only used when a response is required from the host While in Multidrop if the imager does not receive an ACK or NAK from the host after sending polled data it will act on a fault The reader can be set to wait indefinitely by setting Response Timeout to zero Definition The time that the imager will wait before timing out if ACK NAK and ETX are enabled and a host response is expected Serial Cmd K143 response timeout Default 12 in 1 ms increments Options 0 to 255 A zero 0 setting causes an indefinite wait Note See USB HID Interface on page 3 23 for protocol information relating to USB 3 20 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Communications LRC Status Longitudinal Redundancy Check Usage Used when extra data integrity is required Definition An error checking routine that verifies the accuracy of transmissions It
139. Time Before First Capture Read Cycle Usage In almost any moving line application a time delay is needed to ensure that a symbol will be in the imager s field of view at the beginning of the capture sequence Definition Time Before First Capture in a moving line application is the time between an external trigger event and the occurrence of the first capture Serial Cmd lt K242 time before 1st capture time between capture 1 and capture 2 Ume between capture 7 and capture 8 gt Default 0 Options 0 to 65535 2 097 seconds in 32 uS increments Start of Read Cycle y pl m p Time Before First Capture A Processing MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 5 21 Capture Timing Time Between Captures Usage This is useful in applications where more than one symbol can appear during a single read cycle multisymbol or where line speeds are slow enough that captured frames might overlap or miss a symbol Definition A time delay can be inserted between individual frame captures in Rapid Capture Mode Serial Cmd lt K242 time before 1st capture time between captures time 1 time 2 time7 Entering Os will result in no time between captures Entering a different value in each field will vary the time delays accordingly Note You must enter time values along with comma separators for each field you want to change If you omit fields or enter only comm
140. UM gt When you send lt b gt a request for the boot code checksum the imager returns lt b BOOT_CHECKSUM gt When you send lt p gt a request for profile module checksum the imager returns lt p PROFILE_CHECKSUM gt MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 13 17 Default Reset Save Default Reset Save Understanding and controlling your imager s active saved and default settings is critical to its successful operation Serial ESP first right click in Function Cmd any menu tree EZ Button Save to Reader T Reset A gt Send No Save Me D S Reset and Recall Microscan ne s Defaults SHEEP No No o c Qu s Reset and Recall Microscan White lt ArdWB gt No No a Balance Defaults S Reset and Recall Power On Parameters Arp No No Reset and Recall Customer Default Parameters lt Are gt Do me Save Current Settings for Power On lt Z gt Save to Reader No Send and Save Save to Reader S Save Current Settings as Customer lt Zc gt Send and Sav Customer No M Default Parameters for Power On b 3 Defaults for Power On E Recall Microscan Default Parameters and Save for Power On No no Reset Microscan Default White Bal v ance Parameters and Save for lt ZrdWB gt No No g Power On Press and Recall Customer Default Parameters hold while Zrc No and Save for Power On powering on imager a When you right click in a menu tree
141. YZ Add Insert Step Add Extract Step Output BCD Remove Step Clear All Parsing Sample Symbol Original ABCDEFGHIJKKLMNOPORSTUMVWXYZ Output BCD Cancel You can extract and insert several character sequences using ESP s Symbol Parse feature In this example the selected extraction range is characters 2 4 The Sample Symbol example on the Symbol Parse dialog shows the selected character positions extracted and output as desired Simultaneously the data string from the actual selected symbol is displayed at the bottom left of the Parse Table followed by the user defined extracted output 14 6 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Output Format Format Insert Output Index Definition Output Index refers to the database entry you wish to modify with this command A formatted output is built by extracting data from a symbol s original data output and or inserting user defined characters It may be helpful to think of individual indexes as positions in the final formatted output you wish to build Starting with index 1 enter either an extract or insert command to begin building your desired output string Then with the next index number enter either an extract or insert command to continue building the output string Continue this process until you are finished building the string Serial Cmd lt K741 output index length hex string Options 1 to 100 Length
142. a bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d Default 115 2K Options 0 600 1 1200 2 2400 3 4800 4 9600 5 19 2K 6 38 4K 7 57 6K 8 115 2K 9 230K 3 10 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Communications Parity Auxiliary Port Usage Only changed if necessary to match host setting Definition An error detection routine in which one data bit in each character is set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of 1 bits in the data field is even or odd Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d Default None Options 0 None 1 Even 2 Odd Stop Bits Auxiliary Port Usage Only changed if necessary to match host setting Definition Allows the user to select the last one or two bits in each character to indicate the end of the character Serial Cmd K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d Default One Options 0 One 1 Two Data Bits Auxiliary Port Usage Only changed if necessary to match host setting Definition Number of bits in each character Serial Cmd K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d Default Eight Options 0 Seven 1 Eight MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 3 11 Auxiliary Port Connections Transparent Mode Usage Definition Seria
143. a channel for standard Microscan imager communication command input and symbol data output There are two types of Microscan HID Reports Report Type Data Content Microscan HID IN imager to host Symbol data No Reads Service messages Microscan HID OUT host to imager Commands serial triggers Note The imager is always able to receive commands and serial triggers from the host through Microscan HID OUT Reports regardless of the Microscan HID IN Report status If the imager receives a command that requests a response such as a part number query the imager will send a Microscan HID IN Report regardless of the IN Report status Serial Cmd lt K149 Microscan HID IN Report status Keyboard IN Report status Default 1 Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Microscan HID IN Reports Enabled When this feature is enabled the imager will send Microscan HID IN Reports to the host containing data originated by the imager Microscan HID IN Reports Disabled When this feature is disabled the imager will not send Microscan HID IN Reports to the host containing data originated by the imager 3 24 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Communications Keyboard IN Reports The host operating system will interpret Keyboard IN Reports from the imager as if the user were typing keyboard text The host operating system sends keystrokes to the current application This is commonly called a Keyboard Wedge configuration There is one t
144. able of Contents Chapter 1 Quick Start Step 1 Check Hardware eterne ertet Step 2 Connect the System eene Step 3 Position Imager and Symbol Step 4 Install ESP ayisien ar i e a dete otep 5 Select Model eed aer RES Step 6 Select Protocol and Connect Step 7 Locate the Symbol in the Field of View eeeessss 1 9 Step 8 Calibrate nce rire reet e Ie 1 11 Step 9 Test Read Rate teet nee 1 12 Step 10 Configure the Imager in ESP seeeeee 1 13 Step 11 Save Configuration in ESP essseee 1 14 Chapter 2 Using ESP VAT eo M 2 2 Application Mode 2 3 8 te s eed vee bet d eed oe ed ees 2 3 Menu Toolbar dieit eai e ae iu 2 4 AULOCONMECE s oii oe P ptt etas eae 2 12 VIEW ERR 2 14 Navigating inr ESP iiie Dde hina 2 15 Send Receive Options 2 1 iie dde eiie dede dite E 2 16 USNO EZ Trak uiui Si ite ct ee aia 2 18 Chapter 3 Communications Communications by ESP ssssssssssssssseeeeeeen ennt enne 3 2 Communications Serial Commands see 3 3 Host Port Connections ssseeeeen nemen 3 4 Host Port Protocol ssssseee eene nennen 3 5 ACK NAK Options erinnere ine citer decern detinere decas 3 7 Polling Mode Options ccce tentent tete tne de ee ces 3 8 RS 422 Stal s esce iecit deride
145. acceptable If enabled toggles Output 1 to an active state when Axial Non Uniformity Threshold is met K800 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Output on Unused Error Correction Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Lets the user know if symbol quality is less than acceptable If enabled toggles Output 1 to an active state when UEC Threshold is met K800 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Contrast Threshold Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 7 28 Lets the user set the acceptable level of symbol quality Conforms to ISO IEC 16022 symbol quality grading A B C D lt K800 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold Grade C 0 Grade A 1 Grade B 2 Grade C 3 Grade D MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual I O Parameters Print Growth Threshold Usage Lets the user set the acceptable level of symbol quality Definiti
146. acter Non Delimited seseseeessss 5 13 Stop Trigger Character Non Delimited eeeeeeeeees 5 14 End of Read Cycler ioiei e ee dei e eec 5 15 Capture Mode itte Eq cede eed ee dot etd edes 5 17 Capture TIMING iid imeem Al Rees 5 21 Image Processing Timeout essss emn 5 23 Image Storage nee deals 5 24 Minimum Good Reads iiini aiitra iei tie enia 5 26 Setting Up the Imager for EZ Trax sssem 5 28 Chapter 6 Symbologies Symbologies by ESP E TETE E 6 2 Symbologies Serial Commands sseseeee 6 3 Data Matrix ie ere ER RR RO PER ARNEESR 6 4 Azlec Code nu etae m eet E RE ETERA AREE 6 6 QR Code ee REDE CER RON UE aes 6 7 Micro OR Gode iere EPRHREREREPREDRERRORRR 6 8 Code 39 eiie iere Gat sees enters esee tae dece dde canet denies 6 9 Code 128 EAN 128 icis endete deiecit pe dece 6 12 up 6 15 Interleaved 2 of 5 sni eterne itte etes 6 16 irl 6 19 rh 6 20 ej 6 23 Pharmacode nen coeur tn ete tuo dnte de det Crede edes 6 27 Postal Symbologies 5 etin eere teet dede ette dedere 6 29 GS1 DataBar RSS neenon erede Iren dede ie 6 34 PDEA417 eie e e io pee es prede e ded 6 36 MiCroPDFA417 eec Ele ente ie cete ds 6 37 COmlposlilte x inrcr restet ce e
147. ain MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual lt K148 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK lt K150DAISY gt 3 3 Host Port Connections Host Port Connections The host port can be configured with RS 232 RS 422 and RS 485 connections The following settings define the basic transmission speeds and digital standards that ensure common formatting Baud Rate Host Port Usage Can be used to transfer data faster or to match host port settings Definition The rate at which the reader and host transfer data back and forth Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits Default 115 2K Options 0 600 1 1200 2 2400 3 4800 4 9600 5 19 2K 6 38 4K 7 57 6K 8 115 2K 9 230K Parity Host Port Usage Only changed if necessary to match host setting Definition An error detection routine in which one data bit per character is set to 1 or O so that the total number of bits in the data field is either even or odd Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits Default None Options 0 None 1 Even 2 Odd Stop Bits Host Port Usage Only changed if necessary to match host setting Definition One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits Default One Options 0 One 1 Two Data Bits Host Port Usage Only changed if necessary to match host setting Definition O
148. al screen to bring up a menu of further options 12 2 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Terminal Find The Find function allows you to enter text strings to be searched for in the Terminal window For example a series of symbols have been scanned into the Terminal view and you want to determine if a particular symbol whose data begins with ABC has been read 1 Type ABC into the Find box amp E EP Find jasc M 2 Press Enter The first instance of ABC will be highlighted in the Terminal window 3 Click the Find button to the left of the text field to locate additional instances of ABC MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 12 3 Send Send The Send function allows you to enter serial commands and then send them to the imager 1 Type the command into the Send box z Ls a J Qe b Parameters Setup Terminal Utilities Send v 2 Press Enter 3 Click the Send button to the left of the text field to send 12 4 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Terminal Macros Macros can be stored in a macro selection bar edited in a separate window and executed by clicking on the macro name Default Macros Add Macro Next Row grt Number Checksum Disable Scanning Enable Scanning y Exit Read Cycle ia press F1 a 4 Click on the first arrow here to see Add Click on Next Macro or Default Ma
149. alibration m E process Focus Shutter Gain Quality Gain Shutter Speed and Focal Distance Capture Settings are all configurable ees Thre in the Calibration interface Beginning calibration phoned esa Processing and effort the imager will spend Gain 32 E M wer attempting to decode a symbol m Shutter Speed 250 for each parameter configuration x Low Medium Focal Distance Quick Focus m High Definable Dropdown menu of 1D and 2D symbologies and a check box for enabling or disabling Composite symbologies Calibrate ECC 200 Code 33 m m Cancel v Composite Enabled t Gave TP calibration Window of Interest routine x Cancels the WOI Framing Disabled z calibration rocess if WOI Margin 75 Decesedi Linescan Height 64 The Window of Interest section of the Calibration interface allows the user to make precise adjustments to WOI Framing WOI Margin in pixels and the scan height of the straight line image in pixels MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 4 11 Calibration by ESP After Calibration Notice the improved image resolution after the calibration process is complete Before After The Focus Shutter Gain and Quality 240 250 38 8792 indicator bars remain stationary at the end of calibration to provide
150. and select Default Current Menu Settings or Default AII ESP Settings it is important to note that only ESP settings are defaulted To save these defaults to the reader itself you need to follow up with a Save to Reader Send and Save command b Only available in ESP if enabled under the Options pulldown menu Resets Resets A commands affect only the current settings active memory and are not saved for power on Saved for Power on Power on parameters Z commands are saved to NOVRAM and recalled and loaded into current parameters when power is cycled to the imager or the Arp command is issued Defaults Defaults are Microscan firmware settings or saved customer settings that can be recalled either by software or hardware reset 13 18 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Utilities Customer Default Parameters Customer default parameters saved by lt Zc gt are the same set of parameters as power on parameters but are saved in a different isolated section of NOVRAM This allows a user essentially to create a backup set of parameters that can be recalled in the event that the current parameters or power on parameters have been accidentally changed or are no longer desired It is important to note that a hardware default does not affect customer default parameters For example a user that has inadvertently changed communication settings and saved them with a lt Z gt command may not know the correct
151. ansmitted or read cycle timeout is enabled and a timeout occurs and at least one captured image has been processed Depending on the combination of enabled symbologies the imager may take longer than the timeout to process a captured image Note When to Output and No Read options have no affect on Continuous Read lt K200 0 gt MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Read Cycle Continuous Read 1 Output Usage Continuous Read 1 Output can be useful in applications where it is not feasible to use a trigger and all succeeding symbols contain different information It is also effective in applications where the objects are presented by hand Definition In Continuous Read 1 Output the imager self triggers whenever it decodes a new symbol or a timeout occurs If End of Read Cycle is set to Timeout and the symbol doesn t change the output is repeated at the end of each timeout period For example if Timeout is set to one second the imager sends the symbol data immediately and repeats the output at intervals of one second for as long as it continues to capture the symbol If End of Read Cycle is set to New Trigger the imager will send the current symbol data immediately but only once A new symbol appearing in the imager s range will be read and sent immediately provided it is not identical to the previous symbol Serial Cmd lt K200 1 gt Caution In automated environments Continuous Read 1 Output is not recommended
152. arapid capture mode one or multiple captures as many as 32 can be taken at an interval specified by the time between captures parameter In this mode the only limiting time factor is integration and transfer timing Continuous Capture Usage Definition Continuous Capture is useful in applications with slower line speeds or where symbol spacing may be random or not time dependent In Continuous Capture Mode image captures are taken throughout the read cycle in a multi buffered format see diagram below The imager begins processing the first captured image at the same time that it captures the second image Captures will continue occurring throughout the read cycle until an end condition occurs such as a timeout a new trigger the last frame in a capture sequence or a combination of the above Capture y UD 4 v Processing time Start of Read uM End of Cycle read cycle a MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 5 17 Capture Mode Number of Captures Usage Number of Captures is used to specify the number of captures to be processed in Rapid Capture Mode Definition Sets the total number of captures that are processed during a read cycle in Rapid Capture Mode This feature is used in conjunction with Capture Timing parameters to specify the capture sequence of a rapid capture read cycle Serial Cmd lt K241 capture mode number of captures rapid capture mode
153. arning for this output to function Output 1 Parameters Output On Diagnostic Warning Under Output 1 Parameters expand the Diagnostics tree Diagnostics Service Unit Disabled Serial Cmd K790 unused 1 service unit Default 0 Options 0 Disabled Service Unit When Diagnostic Warning is enabled the Output On configuration has no effect The output will remain active as long as one of the diagnostic warning conditions is met The output will become inactive once it detects that there are no diagnostic warning conditions Definition Allows the user to set up the output to toggle to active when the service timer has expired This condition will only be held for one service timer click Note This feature cannot be used if the imager is in a Continuous Read mode Serial Cmd lt K790 unused 1 service unit gt Default 0 Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 7 30 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual I O Parameters Configurable Output 2 Note Output 2 has the same parameters and default settings as Output 1 Output 2 Parameters Output On Symbol Quality Output State Negative Pulse Width 5 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 Diagnostics Serial Cmd K811 0utput on output state pulse width output mode Trend Analysis Output 2 Note Output On under Output 2 Parameters must be set to Trend Analysis for this output to function Output 2 Pa
154. as the fields will remain as previously set Important If the imager is configured to capture more than 8 images the last or 8th delay value will be repeated for the remaining captures Default 0 Options 0 to 65535 2 097 seconds in 32 uS increments Note Number of Captures and number of frame delays Time Between Captures must be the same Start of Read Cycle Time Delay Between Captures 0 End of Diagram A Read Cycle mn 2 3 d 5 Time Delay Between Captures varies Diagram B E La an Lu TE e ea 5 22 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Read Cycle Image Processing Timeout Usage Useful in higher speed applications where image processing time is long enough that not all captures have an opportunity to be processed Definition Specifies the maximum amount of time to process a captured image When the timeout expires the image processing is aborted This timeout works in both Rapid Capture and Continuous Capture modes as well as with the Configuration Database Serial Cmd K245 image processing timeout Default 5000 ms 5 sec Options 1 to 65535 in 1 ms increments Notes The timeout period does not include capture time f a timeout occurs during processing and no symbols in the field of view have been decoded the image will be recorded as a No Read For this reason a
155. ata is encoded in four types of bars states each of which is identified by a name and a value This type of postal symbol is known as 4 state Each bar has a tracker or middle section to which an ascender top section or descender bottom section may be added The 4 state format allows the symbol to contain more information and makes it easier to decode 4 state symbols can also be printed easily in a variety of media including dot matrix inkjet and laser Definition If U S Post and USPSACB Status are both enabled the imager will decode USPSACB symbols Serial Cmd lt K460 postal symbology type POSTNET status PLANET status USPS4CB status POSTNET allow B and B fields Australia Post allow 0 FCC gt Default Enabled Options 0 7 Disabled 1 Enabled POSTNET Allow B and B Fields Definition If U S Post and POSTNET are enabled and POSTNET Allow B and B Fields is enabled the imager will allow B and B fields in POSTNET symbols Serial Cmd lt K460 postal symbology type POSTNET status PLANET status USPS4CB Status POSTNET allow B and B fields Australia Post allow 0 FCC gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Australia Post Allow 0 FCC Definition f Australia Post is enabled and Australia Post Allow 0 FCC is enabled the imager will allow O FCC in Australia Post symbols Serial Cmd lt K460 postal symbology type POSTNET status PLANET status USPS4CB status
156. ata string that can be added to the front of the decoded data lt K141 status preamble character s gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled within any protocol Preamble Characters Serial Cmd Default Options lt K141 status preamble character s gt M corresponds to carriage return To enter control characters within a serial command hold down the Ctrl key while typing the desired character Example lt K141 1 CNTL m gt to enter the control character M Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt K141h 3C For gt K141h 3E For K141h 2C See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 3 33 Postamble Postamble Postamble Status Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Useful for identifying and controlling incoming data For example defining the postamble as a carriage return and a line feed causes each decoded message to be displayed on its own line Allows the user to enable or disable up to four postamble characters that can be added to the end of the decoded data K142 status postamble character s gt Enabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled within any protocol Postamble Characters Serial Cmd Default Options K142 status postamble character s gt M J corresponds to carriage re
157. atch star stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Interleaved 2 of 5 lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode Status gt UPC EAN lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplemental status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Code 128 EAN 128 lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding gt Code 93 lt K475 status fixed symbol length status symbol length gt PDF417 lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Pharmacode lt K477 status fixed bar count status fixed bar count minimum bar count bar width mode direction fixed threshold value Data Matrix lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status gt QR Code lt K480 status gt BC412 lt K481 status check character output fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt DataBar 14 RSS 14 lt K482 status gt DataBar Limited RSS Limited lt K483 status gt DataBar Expanded RSS Expanded lt K484 stat
158. ation App Code v Request Part No App Code Request Checksum Firmware Update Application code versions are specific to your imager Consult with your sales representative before downloading application code If needed an application code will be sent to you in the form of a mot file To download application code 1 First be sure that your imager is connected to the host 2 Apply power to the imager 3 Before updating you should verify the current firmware 4 Click in the Firmware Update text box and select the file type you want to download This will open a file locator box 5 Navigate to the appropriate file it will be a mot file open the file and click Start Caution Do not interrupt power or disconnect the host cable while download is in progress Be sure that each download is complete before moving on to the next Important When updating firmware be sure that the application code and boot code versions are mutually compatible MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 13 15 Firmware Firmware Verification Request Part Number by ESP You can send a request to the imager for part numbers checksums boot code and application code 1 Click the Firmware tab 2 From the pulldown selection box to the left of the Request Part No button make your selection 3 Select the code type to see its part number displayed in the text field to the right of the Request Part No button
159. atted data and the F that precedes the frame number Output Coordinates Serial Cmd lt K734 output frame number output coordinates Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Disabled When Output Coordinates is set to Disabled the coordinates are not output as part of the symbol data Enabled When Output Coordinates is set to Enabled the four sets of object coordinates for the first successfully decoded symbol are attached to the symbol data output in the following format nnn mmm where nnn is a 3 digit X coordinate and mmm is a 3 digit Y coordinate The validation separator is located between the end of the already formatted data and the first coordinate point The point with the lowest X Y sum will be output first followed by the next three points in a clockwise direction Example 032 040 287 056 287 279 048 271 7 36 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual I O Parameters Image Output Usage This feature allows the user to select what read cycle condition triggers the image file output Definition Used to output an image file when a specified read cycle condition has been met such as No Read or Good Read When the read cycle is complete the normal read cycle output will occur including any configured postamble or preamble data The read cycle will the check if image output is enabled and if the specified read cycle condition has been met If both these conditions are tru
160. atus ECC 120 status ECC 130 Status gt QR Code lt K480 status gt BC412 lt K481 status check character output fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt DataBar 14 RSS 14 lt K482 status gt DataBar Limited RSS Limited lt K483 status gt DataBar Expanded RSS Expanded lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length MicroPDF417 K485 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 6 3 Data Matrix Data Matrix Usage Very useful where information needs to be packed into a small area and or where symbols need to be applied directly to the substrate with laser etching chemical etching dot peen or other methods Definition Data Matrix is a type of Matrix symbology and has subsets ECC 000 ECC 200 ECC 200 symbols have an even number of rows and an even number of columns Most of the symbols are square with sizes from 10x10 to 144x144 Some symbols however are rectangular with sizes from 8x18 to 16x48 All ECC 200 symbols can be recognized by the upper right corner module being light binary 0 instead of dark ECC 200 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 200 Data Matrix symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status Default Enabled Note This is the only symbol type enabled b
161. bled ECC 120 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 120 symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ECC 130 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 130 symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 6 5 Aztec Code Aztec Code Usage Used in document imaging railway ticket validation and some postal applications Definition A 2D matrix symbology built on a square grid with a square bull s eye pattern at the center Aztec Code can encode up to 3 832 numeric or 3 067 alphabetical characters or 1 914 bytes of data The level of Reed Solomon error correction used with Aztec Code is configurable from 5 to 95 of the total data region The recommended error correction level is 23 of symbol capacity plus codewords Serial Cmd lt K458 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6 6 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Symbologies QR Code Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Widely implemented in the automotive industry in Japan and throughout their worldwide supply chain
162. bol for each parameter configuration Serial Cmd lt K529 gain shutter speed focus position symbol type WO framing WOI margin line scan height processing Default Medium Options 0 Low 1 Medium 2 High 3 Definable Low The imager will spend a low amount of effort attempting to decode the given symbol for each parameter configuration Medium The imager will spend a medium amount of effort attempting to decode the given symbol for each parameter configuration High The imager will spend a high amount of effort attempting to decode the given symbol for each parameter configuration Definable The processing time for each image frame is defined by the Image Processing Timeout parameter lt K245 gt 4 10 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Calibration Calibration by ESP ESP s Calibration view incorporates all the functionality of the lt K529 gt Calibration Options command in a single easy to use intuitive interface This calibration process allows the user much finer control of individual parameters than the calibration routine in EZ Mode or on the Video tab Before During Calibration Before and After tabs give the user an authentic representation of the difference in what the imager sees before and after the calibration routine Before After 240 250 32 8732 Focus Shutter Gain and Image Quality values are all tracked in real time during the c
163. bologies 2D Symbologies Data Matrix ECC 0 200 Aztec Code QR Code Micro QR Code Stacked Symbologies PDF417 MicroPDF417 GS1 DataBar RSS Composite and Stacked Linear Symbologies Code 39 Code 128 BC412 Interleaved 2 of 5 Pharmacode UPC EAN Codabar Code 93 Postal Read Parameters Pitch 30 Skew 30 Tilt 360 Decode Rate Up to 10 decodes per second Focal Range 2 to 6 50 8 to 152 4 mm autofocus MINI Hawk Dimensions A 2 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Appendices Read Ranges Standard Density Field of Views M dum Standard Density inches mm eer Depth of Field Focus Position 30 mil 2D 20 mil 1D 8 228 30 mil 2D 20 mil 1D 76 5 D mil 2D 3 mil 11 215 ay ilz 7 5 mil 2D 5 mil 1D 5 mil 2D 3 mil 1D mm76 51 25 25 51 76 mi2o sm in 3 2 i 1 2 3 2 3 4 5 6 d Focus Position in Wide Axis H 4 5 W 3 Megapixel Standard Density Standard Density Fields of View mm Standard Density inches mm Ten Depth of Field 9 Focus Position 9 229 20 mil 1D 30 mil 2D us Ultra High Density Fieldsof View Tm Ultra High Density 20 mil 1D 30 nil 2D inches mm 8 7203 Depth of Field Focus Position 178 77178 152 Smi 10 mil 1D 15 mil 2D 61152 427 75 mil2D doy 10 mil 4D 15 mil 2D 102 4 1102 76 3776 7 5 mil 1D 10 mil 2D 51 3 3 mil 1D 5 mil 2D 25 1 25 mm78 51 25 25 51 76 5 5
164. bration operations and to follow the progress of those operations using cues such as progress bars real time representations of calibration values and other dynamic user feedback See Chapter 4 Calibration for full documentation of this feature Before After 240 250 32 8792 Focus Shutter Gain Quality Beginning calibration Processing Gain 32 Med z Shutter Speed 250 Focal Distance Quick Focus i Symbology Settings ee Symbology Type ECC 200 Code 39 zi Cancel v Composite Enabled Save Window of Interest WOI Framing Disabled WOI Margin 75 zd Linescan Height 64 Ec ESP s Calibration interface shown during a calibration routine 10 8 Before After 240 250 38 8732 Ps HE om L H Focus Shutter Gain Quality Capture Settings Processing Gai 38 ha Medium Shutter Speed 250 SZ FocalDistance Quick Focus X Symbology Settings det un Symbology Type ECC 200 Code 39 x Cancel v Composite Enabled Save Window of Interest WOI Framing Disabled X WOI Margin 75 EI Linescan Height 64 a ESP s Calibration interface shown after a calibration routine MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Camera and IP Setup Window of Interest The active pixel area of the image sensor is called the Window of Interest WOI The WOI allows the user to select an area of the field of view in which the de
165. cal distances focal distance Illumination Brightness lt K536 brightness gt Skew Correction lt K537 line speed symbol direction Camera lt K541 shutter speed gain Pixel Sub Sampling K542 pixel sub sampling AEC AGC mode AEC AGC brightness Morphological Pre Processing K550 morphological pre processing gt Morphological Operation MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual K551 0 morphological operation operator size 10 3 Video Video The Video view is similar to the EZ Mode interface in that the user has the ability to perform the same Locate Calibrate and Test routines There is also a focal distance adjustment tool to the right of the video view Video also features Capture and Decode functionality which is similar to the Configuration interfaces Communication Read Cycle Symbologies I O Matchcode and Diagnostics Video Evaluation Calibration WO Configuration Database Dynamic Setup Calibrate Initiates Calibration routine Locate Activates the imager s target pattern and initiates live video display of the symbol in the field of view Initiates the Test routine Allows the user to test the imager s read rate and decodes per second and also displays decoded symbol data in the field at the bottom of the screen Click Stop to end the Test routine Allows the user to tak
166. ce Imager User s Manual 6 35 PDF417 PDF417 Usage Used in applications where a large amount of information over 32 characters needs to be encoded within a symbol typically where the symbol is transported from one facility to another For example an automobile assembly line might use a single symbol with multiple fields of information that will be read at several stations along the way without reference to a database Definition A two dimensional multi row 3 to 90 continuous variable length symbology that has high data capacity for storing up to 2 700 numeric characters 1 800 printable ASCII characters or 1 100 binary characters per symbol Each symbol character consists of 4 bars and 4 spaces in a 17 module structure Serial Cmd K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note Sending a1 will cause PDF417 data to be prefaced with information consisting of error correction level ECC Level n number of rows n Rows number of columns n Columns number of informative code words n Info Code Words and the number of data characters n Data Characters This feature can be disabled by re sending a1 Fixed Symbol Length Status PDF417 Serial Cmd lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length PDF417 Usage Used to increase
167. characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For K409h 3C For gt lt K409h 3E gt For lt K409h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Threshold Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default 300 5 minutes Options 1 to 65535 Resolution Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default Seconds Options 0 Seconds 1 Minutes MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 7 35 Frame Information Frame Information Output Frame Number Serial Cmd lt K734 output frame number output coordinates Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Disabled When Output Frame Number is set to Disabled the frame number is not output as part of the symbol data Enabled When Output Frame Number is set to Enabled the number of the frame in which the symbol was first decoded is attached to the symbol output information The output format is Fnnn where nnn is a 3 digit decimal value from 0 to 255 The frame number rolls over to 0 once it passes 255 If this feature is enabled the frame information will follow the symbol data and it will precede any symbol quality data if symbol quality settings are enabled see Symbol Quality Separator on page 8 8 The symbol quality separator is located between the end of the already form
168. cification Important Do not use Large Intercharacter Gap with Narrow Margins enabled because a large intercharacter gap over 3x could cause a narrow margin 5x to be interpreted as an intercharacter gap When enabled the imager can read symbols with gaps between symbol characters that exceed three times 3x the narrow element width K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Code 39 Definition Serial Cmd Default Options When enabled the imager will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered valid K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Code 39 Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 6 10 Fixed Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Specifies the exact number of characters that the imager will recognize this does not include start and stop and check character characters The imager ignores any symbology that does not match the specified length lt K470 status check character status check chara
169. ckground color symbology gt Default 0 Options High Resolution MINI Hawk 0 to 1280 column width High Speed MINI Hawk 0 to 752 column width 3 Megapixel MINI Hawk 0 to 2048 column width MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 11 5 Configuration Database Status Row Depth Definition Serial Cmd Default Options The image dimension settings can be applied as a Window of Interest or a Region of Interest depending on the image dimension mode selected in the Database Mode command K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column width narrow margins background color symbology gt High Resolution MINI Hawk 1024 High Speed MINI Hawk 480 3 Megapixel MINI Hawk 1536 High Resolution MINI Hawk 3 to 1024 row pointer High Speed MINI Hawk 3 to 480 row pointer 3 Megapixel MINI Hawk 3 to 1536 row pointer Column Width Definition The image dimension settings can be applied as a Window of Interest or a Region of Interest depending on the image dimension mode selected in the Database Mode command Serial Cmd K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column width narrow margins background color symbology gt Default High Resolution MINI Hawk 1280 High Speed MINI Hawk 752 3 Megapixel MINI Hawk 2048 Options High Resolution MINI Hawk 8 to
170. cros Click on subsequent Row to see the When you default macros the entire arrows to edit macros next row of macros set is restored to their original macros macro commands When you click on the macro name the macro is executed in the Terminal window If this is a command it is sent to the reader at the same time that it is displayed Editing a Macro When you click the arrow next to any macro and select Edit the following appears Macro Entry Macro Name Read Rate percent Macro Yale lt C p gt Cancel You can edit an existing macro or type in the Macro Name text field and define it in the Macro Value text field Click OK MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 12 5 Terminal Window Menus Terminal Window Menus Right click on the Terminal window to display the following menu Copy Paste Clear Select All Save Change Font Change Echo Font Enable Echo Change Background Color gt Non Printable Characters gt Default Settings Keyboard Macros Copy selected text to clipboard Paste from Terminal or other text Clear all text in Terminal window Select All text in the Terminal window Save brings up a Save As dialog Change Font of text in Terminal brings up a Font dialog sue Echo Font to change typed text brings up a Font ialog Enable Echo enables Echo text typed by user Change Background Color of Terminal window Non Printable Characters a
171. ct the method for processing captured images Serial Cmd K551 0 morphological operation operator size Default Erode Options 0 Erode 1 Dilate 2 Open 3 Close Erode Erode increases the dark cell size of a symbol Useful for increasing the dark cell size of a dark on light Data Matrix symbol Dilate Dilate increases the light cell size of a symbol Useful for increasing the light cell size of a light on dark Data Matrix symbol 10 32 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Camera and IP Setup Open Open removes minor light defects of dark cells by performing a Dilate function followed by an Erode function Close Close removed minor dark defects of light cells by performing an Erode function followed by a Dilate function E i i I L a a MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 10 33 Morphological Operation and Operator Size Operator Size Definition Operator Size determines the size of the area or pixel neighborhood measured in pixels in which the morphological operation is being performed Serial Cmd lt K551 0 morphological operation operator size Default Small Options 3 Small 3 pixels by 3 pixels 5 Medium 5 pixels by 5 pixels 7 Large 7 pixels by 7 pixels 10 34 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual EN 71 Configuration Database Contents Configuration Database Serial Commands
172. cter output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set 10 1 to 64 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Symbologies Full ASCII Set Code 39 Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Must be enabled when reading characters outside the standard character set 0 9 A Z etc The user must know in advance whether or not to use the Full ASCII Set option Since Full ASCII Set requires two code words to encode one character it is less efficient Standard Code 39 encodes 43 characters zero through nine capital A through capital Z minus symbol plus symbol forward slash space decimal point dollar sign and percent symbol When Full ASCII Set is enabled the imager can read the full ASCII character set from 0 to 255 lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 6 11 Code 128 EAN 128 Code 128 EAN 128 Usage Code 128 is a smaller symbology useful in applications with tight spots and high security needs Definition A very dense alphanumeric symbology It encodes all 128 ASCII characters itis continuous has variable length and uses multiple element widths measured edge to edge Serial Cmd KA74 status fixed symbol length status fix
173. d BC412 will be active for this database index Pharmacode Add 4096 If enabled Pharmacode will be active for this database index DataBar 14 RSS 14 Add 8192 If enabled DataBar 14 will be active for this database index Important If the stacked and non stacked operation is required the DataBar 14 command must be configured as follows lt K482 2 gt If the DataBar 14 status parameter in the lt K482 gt command is set to either DISABLED or ENABLED the imager will only read non stacked DataBar 14 symbols DataBar Limited RSS Limited Add 16384 If enabled DataBar Limited will be active for this database index DataBar Expanded RSS Expanded Add 32768 If enabled DataBar Expanded will be active for this database index Important If the stacked and non stacked operation is required the DataBar Expanded command must be configured as follows lt K484 2 gt If the DataBar Expanded status parameter in the lt K484 gt command is set to either DISABLED or ENABLED the imager will only read non stacked DataBar Expanded symbols 11 8 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Configuration Database Micro QR Code Add 65536 If enabled Micro QR Code will be active for this database index Aztec Code Add 131072 If enabled Aztec Code will be active for this database index Postal Symbologies Add 262144 If enabled Postal Symbologies will be active for this database index MINI Hawk High Performa
174. d number to output on gt ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 3 Note Output On under Output 3 Parameters must be set to Symbol Quality for this output to function Output 3 Parameters Output On Symbol Quality Serial Cmd lt K802 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold Diagnostics Output 3 Note Output On under Output 3 Parameters must be set to Diagnostic Warning for this output to function Output 3 Parameters Output On Diagnostic Warning Serial Cmd lt K792 unused 1 service unit 7 32 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual I O Parameters Power On Reset Counts Note Power On Reset Counts is a read only command Power On Serial Cmd K406 power on resets power on saves power on flash saves Power On uses a 16 bit counter that increments each time the imager is powered on Resets Serial Cmd lt K406 power on resets power on saves power on flash saves Resets uses a 16 bit counter that increments each time the imager is reset This value is reset at power on Power On Saves Serial Cmd lt K406 power on resets power on saves power on flash saves Power On Saves uses a 16 bit counter that increments each time an imager setting is saved for power on with a lt Z gt command Power On Flash Saves Serial Cmd lt K406 power on r
175. e the image file will be output to the user specified communication port in the user specified image file format Serial Cmd lt K739 image output mode communication port file format JPEG quality Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Good Read 2 No Read 3 No Read or Good Read 4 Mismatch Good Read If a Good Read condition is met during the read cycle the image file corresponding with the first Good Read will be output The image file will immediately follow the read cycle output and postambles For a Good Read condition to occur all symbols in the read cycle must qualify No Read If a No Read condition occurs during the read cycle the image file corresponding with the first No Read will output The image file will immediately follow the read cycle output and postambles There are conditions in which the read cycle may have a No Read condition but the image will not be output For example if the read cycle is looking for two No Read symbols in the same image capture but one is a Good Read the image will not be output because it is not considered a No Read image No Read or Good Read If a No Read condition or a Good Read condition occurs the first image of either kind will be output Mismatch If a Good Read occurs during the read cycle but the image is a Mismatch condition the first Mismatch image will be output MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 7 37 Image Output Communication Port
176. e Balance Arp Reset and Recall Power On Parameters Arc Reset and Recall Customer Default Parameters 13 2 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Utilities lt Z gt Save Current Settings for Power On lt Ze gt Save Current Settings as Customer Default Parameters for Power On Default Reset Save lt Zrd gt dig ue E Default Parameters and Save lt ZrdWB gt Bees idea o White Balance Parameters Zrc Recall Customer Default Parameters and Save for Power On lt gt Imager Status Byte lt K gt All Status Request Imager Status lt K gt All Descriptor Status Request Request Commands lt K gt All Range Status Request lt Knnn gt Single Status Request lt Knnn gt Single Descriptor Status Request lt Knnn gt Single Range Status Request lt LEARN gt Initiate Learn Operation Learn lt UNLEARN gt Initiate Unlearn Operation lt LEARN gt Display Learn Status lt uy path filename gt Y Modem Upload Transfer Options lt dy path filename gt Y Modem Download Transfer Options Other Operational lt op 9 gt Image Library Request Commands lt CAL gt Autocalibrate lt BCCFG gt Enter Bar Code Configuration lt VAL gt Static Validation lt WB gt White Balance Calibration MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 13 3 Read Rate Read Rate Utilities Click this button to bring up the Utilities view Read Rate by ESP To s
177. e Imager User s Manual 9 5 Matchcode Type Sequential Matching Usage Useful in tracking product serial numbers that increment or decrement sequentially Definition With Sequential enabled Sequential Matching determines if a count is in ascending incremental or descending decremental order Serial Cmd K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch Default Increment Options 0 Increment 1 Decrement Match Start Position Usage Match Start Position is useful in defining specific portions of a symbol for comparison For example if a symbol contains a part number manufacturing date and lot code info but you are only interested in the part number information you can set the imager to sort only the part number and ignore the other characters Definition Match Start Position determines the portions of symbols that will be matched by defining the first character in the symbol from left to right that will be compared with those of the master symbol when Matchcode Type is set to Enabled or Sequential Function For example if Match Start Position is set to 3 the first 2 characters read in the symbol will be ignored and only the 3rd and subsequent characters to the right will be compared up to the number of characters specified by Match Length Serial Cmd K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position ma
178. e an image capture of the symbol in the field of view at any time and to decode the symbol data Similar to the Capture and Decode function in the Configuration views Capture and Decode Test Stop ED v Decodes per Second Contrast 4 00 inches Attribute Number of Symbols 1 Clicking this icon enables the Symbol 1 focal distance slide control to Symbol Data Microscan the right of the video view The focal distance value is i displayed just below the icon When enabled shows the Symbol data and symbol in higher contrast Test results are than the default contrast shown in this field value 10 4 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Evaluation In Evaluation you can view images currently in the imager capture and decode a symbol save it as a digital file and perform histogram and line scan evaluations When you click on the Evaluation tab you will see the images that are currently stored in the imager Click Receive to refresh this view Click Capture Decode to display the current stored image Only one capture and decode event will occur regardless of read cycle settings Click Read to trigger a read cycle If there is enough time in the read cycle up to 32 good reads or 6 full scale images can be captured and displayed depending on the size of the images and depending on the number enabled in Number of Cap
179. e by ESP Matchcode by ESP 1S Parameters Click the Parameters button and then the Matchcode tab 9 2 Parameters ESP Values Matchcode Matchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position 0 Match Length 1 wild Card Enabled lt Sequence on Mismatch Disabled New Master Pin Match Replace Disabled Replacement String MATCH Mismatch Replace Disabled To change a setting double click the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options To open nested options single click the MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Matchcode Matchcode Serial Commands Matchcode Type K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch Number of Master Symbols K224 number of master symbols New Master Pin lt K225 status gt Enter Master Symbol Data lt K231 master symbol number master symbol data gt Request Master Symbol Data lt K231 gt for all or lt K231 master symbol number gt Delete Master Symbol Data lt K231 master symbol number gt Match Replace lt K735 status match replacement string gt Mismatch Replace lt K736 status mismatch replacement string gt MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 9 3 Overview of Matchcode Overview of Matchcode Definition
180. e e epe Eo iced 13 9 aln cm 13 15 Default Reset Save eee nete deed eni dore edic tee 13 18 Imager Status Requests eee dreht retener 13 20 Learn Operations 2 nemici cete ced edd reaali 13 22 Other Operational Serial Commands see 13 23 Chapter 14 Output Format Output Format Serial Commands sss 14 2 Output Format Stats eisieu eaea eiae a aagi 14 3 FOrMat ASSIQM e E A E E EE E 14 4 Format AE e E E e OTE 14 5 oane A AEE a EEP ien ee ert E TT 14 7 Output Filter Configuration e 14 9 Ordered Output Filter esseen 14 13 Appendices Appendix A General Specifications eeeeee A 2 Appendix B Electrical Specifications see A 6 Appendix C Serial Configuration Commands eese A 10 Appendix D Communications Protocol sseee A 16 Appendix E ASCII Table mee A 25 Appendix F Interface Standards sssssssssssssseee A 26 Appendix G Operational Tips ssssse em A 27 Appendix H Using an External Trigger eee A 28 Appendix USB to Serial Virtual COM Port Driver A 29 Appendix J MINI Hawk Image Output see A 32 Appendix K Glossary Of Terms essem A 35 Index MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual vii About the MINI Hawk High
181. e field of view and a good read occurs the green LEDs will illuminate and stay on for the duration of time set in Green Flash Duration Only one read will occur during that time unless more than one symbol is enabled in Number of Symbols Note If Static Presentation Mode is selected but the imager is not in Continuous Read the Green Flash will not occur To use Static Presentation 1 Enable Continuous Read 2 Select the number of symbols 3 Enable Static Presentation in Green Flash Mode 4 Select the read time in Green Flash Duration Match The green LEDs will flash when a match condition is met If multisymbol is enabled then green flash LEDs will illuminate only if all symbols qualify as a match If matchcode is disabled then this mode will activate the LEDs on a good read Mismatch Same as Match except that LEDs will illuminate on a mismatch Strobe Green flash LEDs will act as an illumination strobe for image capture If it is required that the green flash LEDs be the only illumination for image capture then the internal illumination LEDs can be disabled 7 10 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual I O Parameters Target Pattern Usage Assists users in positioning and locating symbols in the center of the imager s field of view Definition The user can control when the targeting system is ON or OFF and can save this condition for power on Serial Cmd K750 green flash mode target pattern statu
182. e of Search Pass is to decode a symbol in as few configurations as possible during calibration This process is designed to quickly identify symbology type and any image processing parameters that are already calibrated as well as determining focus position Running Search Pass Prog Rating Decode Quality Focus Shutter Gain Locate 12 0 0 0 313 250 0 0 14 0 0 0 313 250 9 0 16 0 0 0 313 250 18 0 18 2174 1 72 313 250 27 24 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 4 15 Initiating Calibration Focus Pass The purpose of Focus Pass is to determine the optimal focal position of the optical system This is accomplished by determining the inside and outside focus positions and then recording the center position as the desired focal position Running Focus Pass Prog Rating Decode Quality Focus Shutter Gain Locate 38 0 0 0 353 250 0 0 38 0 0 0 353 250 9 0 38 4256 2 48 353 250 18 5 38 0 0 0 409 250 0 0 38 4236 2 28 409 250 9 5 38 0 0 0 447 250 0 0 38 4236 2 28 447 250 9 4 38 0 0 0 492 250 0 0 38 4232 2 24 492 250 9 4 38 0 0 0 536 250 0 0 38 2128 1 24 536 250 9 5 38 0 0 0 572 250 0 0 38 0 0 0 572 250 9 0 38 2144 1 40 572 250 18 4 38 0 0 0 601 250 27 0 38 0 0 0 601 250 36 0 38 0 0 0 601 250 45 0 38 0 0 0 601 250 45 0 38 0 0 0 601 250 45 0 38 0 0 0 601 250 45 0 42 4280 2 72 297 250 45 6 42 4280 2 72 283 250 45 5 42 4280 2 72 270 250 45 5 42 4280 2 72 258 250 45 5 42 4280 2 72 247 250 45 5 42 4280 2 72 236 250 45 6 42 4280 2
183. ears giving the system extra time to decode and transmit the data to the host Definition Timeout ends the read cycle causing the reader to stop reading symbols and send the symbol data or No Read message when the time set in Timeout elapses times out if When to Output is set to End of Read Cycle If in Continuous Read 1 Output a timeout initiates a new read cycle and allows the same symbol to be read again With External Edge Serial Data or Serial Data or External Edge enabled a timeout ends the read cycle and symbol data or a No Read message is sent to the host With External Level enabled the read cycle does not end until the falling edge trigger occurs or a timeout occurs The next read cycle does not begin until the next rising edge trigger MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 5 15 End of Read Cycle New Trigger Usage New Trigger is an effective way to end a read cycle when objects move past the reader at irregular intervals not timing dependent Definition New Trigger ends the current read cycle and initiates a new one when a new trigger occurs New Trigger refers only to a rising edge trigger With External Edge Serial Data or Serial Data or External Edge enabled an edge or serial trigger ends a read cycle and initiates the next read cycle In the case of External Level a falling edge trigger ends the read cycle but the next read cycle does not begin until the occurrence of the next rising edge t
184. ed Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Code 93 Definition When disabled the imager will accept any Code 93 symbol provided is doesn t exceed the system s maximum capabilities When enabled the imager will reject any Code 93 symbol that doesn t match the fixed symbol length Serial Cmd lt K475 status fixed symbol length status symbol length Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Length Code 93 Definition This is the symbol length value against which all Code 93 symbols will be compared Serial Cmd lt K475 status fixed symbol length status symbol length Default 10 Options 1 to 64 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 6 19 Codabar Codabar Usage Used in photo finishing and library applications Previously used in medical applications but not typically used in newer medical applications Definition Codabar is a 16 bit character set 0 through 9 and the characters and with start stop codes and at least two distinctly different bar widths Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Start Stop Match Codabar Definition When disabled the imager will decode Codabar symbols whether or not the start and stop characters are the same When
185. ed Symbol Angle Disabled If you enable the outputs shown above they will be returned Locate Time in this order Microscan Grading Symbol Symbol Contrast Decode Time Data ISO IEC 16022 Microscan Grading 01 23456789abcdefghijklmnopqrstuv 256 A 30 2103 17 Total Pixels Per Element Read Time Microscan Grading Capture Time Microscan Grading 8 4 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Symbol Quality Report Tab The Report tab allows the user to initiate Data Matrix Grading and to generate and save grading reports To save the report as a PDF file an HTML file a CSV file or an RTF file click the Save Report button Reports appear in the viewing area underneath the Data Matrix Grading and Save Report buttons ESP ESP Untitled File Model Options Connect View Help o 97 Ww 4 BAR f interface i divided EZ Mode Autoconnect Send Recv Switch Model Parameters Setup Terminal Utilities into three sections Communication Read Cycle Symbologies yo Symbol Quality Matchcode Diagnostics Report Locate and Preferences Parameters ESP Values SM Symbol Quality Report Locate Preferences Global Total Read Time Disabled Data Matrix Grading Save Report Symbol Quality Separator SP See the reader s manual for information Output Mode Grade regarding these parameters Data Matrix ISO IEC 16022 Parameters Symbol Contrast Disabled Print Growth
186. ed database index gt 00 NUL Any ASCII input in the form of a pair of hex characters Maximum length 63 bytes defined Examples 41422A AB Data 0 NUL represents string matching disabled See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Database Index Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 14 12 The index of the database entry that decodes a given symbol must equal this setting for filtering to occur A setting of 0 allows any database index for this filter entry lt K744 filter number symbology length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt 0 any index 0 to 10 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Output Format Ordered Output Filter Definition Number of Filters refers to the number of active output filters 0 disables all output filters Any non zero numeral will enable filtering to be performed using the filter indexes covered by this value For example if the number of filters is 1 then only filter index 1 will be applied If the number of filters is 2 then only filter index 1 and filter index 2 will be applied etc Serial Cmd lt K745 number of filters Default 0 Options 0 to 10 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 14 13 Ordered Output Filter 14 14 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual T Ppendices Contents Appendix A General Specif
187. ed and good noread No symbol was decoded in this image Mismatch Symbol was decoded but did not match pending No attempt was made to decode this image The image may be in a numbered sub folder 0 9 indicating age 0 older 9 newer The filename will describe the resolution and file type Valid file types are jpg and bmp The directory locations file names and file types will vary depending on reader configuration A 32 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Appendices Upload Image Select a file from the file list above and then send the command lt uy path filename extension gt Now initiate the Y modem transfer and save the file Y modem uploads will vary depending on the program or language See the HyperTerminal example below Image Upload Using HyperTerminal Open the HyperTerminal application by clicking Start Programs Accessories Communication and then HyperTerminal Enter a name and select an icon then select OK In the connection window select the COM port and then click OK Adjust COM Properties settings to match the reader reader defaults shown below COM4 Properties Jeg Port Settings Bts per second 115200 x Data bits 8 x Parity None x Stop bits 1 x Bow control None x OK Cancel Apply Click OK and you will see the HyperTerminal screen Retrieve an image list by sending lt op 9 gt lt op 9 gt lt op 009 0 good 0 1280x1024 _ gs
188. ed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values 9 10 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Matchcode Mismatch Replace Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Provides a convenient shortcut for applications that need to output a predefined text string whenever a symbol does not match a master symbol Outputs a user defined data string whenever a mismatch occurs and Matchcode is enabled lt K736 status replacement string Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Replacement String Definition Serial Cmd Default Options User defined data string that when enabled replaces symbol data whenever a mismatch occurs lt K736 status replacement string gt MISMATCH An ASCII string up to 64 characters Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K736h 3C gt For gt lt K736h 3E gt For lt K736h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 9 11 New Master Pin New Master Pin Definition Serial Cmd Default Options If Matchcode and New Master Pin are enabled and the new master pin is momentarily connected to ground must be held low for a minimum of 10 ms master symbol information will be loaded into the database based on the next read cycle that achieves a Good
189. ed symbol data is transmitted to the host K705 symbol data output status when to output Good Read 0 Disabled 1 Match 2 Mismatch 3 Good Read Note Symbol Data Output Status if set to Match or Mismatch will not take effect unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory It is useful when an application only needs to use the discrete outputs and can allow the imager to do the decision making When Disabled the host does not need the symbol data and the communication lines are used only for setup and status checks When set to Disabled the imager will not transmit any data that is generated during a read cycle symbols No Reads etc Match is used in an application that requires specific symbol information and needs to sort route or verify based on matching the specific symbol data When set to Match the imager transmits symbol data whenever a symbol matches a master symbol However if Matchcode Type is Disabled it transmits on any good read Note A No Read can still be transmitted if Enabled Mismatch is typically used as a flag within the host system to prevent an item from being routed in the wrong container With Mismatch enabled the imager transmits symbol data whenever the symbol data information does NOT match the master symbol Note A No Read can still be transmitted if Enabled MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual I O Parameters Good Read U
190. ed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Code 128 EAN 128 Definition When enabled the imager will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered a valid symbol Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Code 128 EAN 128 Usage Fixed Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Definition This specifies the exact number of characters that the imager will recognize this does not include start stop and check character characters The imager ignores any symbol not having the specified length Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding Default 10 Options 1 to 64 6 12 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Symb
191. ee the number of decodes per second click the Decodes sec radio button on the Read Rate tab in the Utilities view and click the Start button To see the percentage of decodes click the Percent radio button and then the Start button To end a Read Rate test click the Stop button the Start button becomes a Stop button during an active Read Rate test Important When Read Rate is enabled the Configuration Database is not active regardless of how the imager is configured Percent T Clear Output Read Rate by Serial Command Enter Decodes Second Test Sending lt C gt instructs the imager to transmit the decodes per second and symbol data if any The decode rate can vary dramatically due to the angle and location of the symbol in relation to the field of view This test is very useful in aligning and positioning the imager during setup Enter Percent Test Sending lt Cp gt instructs the imager to transmit the percentage of decodes and any decoded symbol data End Read Rate Test Sending lt J gt ends both the Percent test and the Decodes Second test 13 4 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Utilities Counters Counter commands can be a numeric value from 00000 to 65535 After reaching the maximum numeric limit of 65535 an error message will be displayed and the counter will automatically roll over and start counting again at 00000 To obtain the cumulative total of counts aft
192. em in which signals can travel simultaneously between devices Gain The amount of energy applied to pixel gray scale values prior to output expressed in dB optimal signal strength Good Read A decode The successful scanning and decoding of the information encoded in a bar code symbol Gradient The rate of change of pixel intensity first derivative Gray Scale Variations of values from white through shades of gray to black in a digitized image with black assigned the value of zero and white the value of one MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual A 37 Glossary of Terms Half Duplex A communications system in which signals can travel between devices in both directions but not simultaneously Histogram A graphical representation of the frequency of occurrence of each intensity or range of intensities gray levels of pixels in an image The height represents the number of observations occurring in each interval Host A computer PLC or other device that is used to execute commands and process data and discrete signals Image Projection of an object or scene onto a plane i e screen or image sensor Image Processing IP Transformation of an input image into an output image with desired properties Image Resolution The number of rows and columns of pixels in an image A higher resolution means that more pixels are available per element of the symbol being read Examples 6
193. entation of the numeric count of the occurrence of each intensity gray level in an image The horizontal axis represents the values of gray levels and the vertical axis represents the number of pixels for each gray level Note Since histograms are performed in the imager the results will be saved regardless of whether the image was uploaded as a JPEG jpg or a bitmap bmp 1 From the Evaluation window click the Histogram button The current image is transferred into the histogram operation This may take a moment since all the relevant pixels are being evaluated intensively 2 When the Histogram window opens you may need to expand the window and or adjust the scroll bars in order to bring the image into view 3 To generate a histogram click and drag your cursor diagonally across the symbol or a portion of the symbol The image will be surrounded by an area of interest box a dashed blue line with red anchor points that can be selected and moved by placing a cursor inside the box and can be resized by clicking and dragging the anchor points good 254 0 60ms Evaluate C Line Scan Histogram Results Max Light 192 Min Dark 16 Median 68 Mean 67 High Peak 0 Low Peak 34 Variance 646 Number of Pixels 10 6 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Camera and IP Setup Line Scan 1 From the Evaluation tab click the Line Scan button A window like that shown below
194. er Symbol Decoded Symbol Master Symbol after Decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 abc 004 sequenced on mismatch 004 004 005 005 def 006 sequenced on mismatch 006 ghi 007 sequenced on mismatch 007 007 008 As an example of Sequence on Mismatch Disabled consider the following decodes Master Symbol Decoded Symbol Master Symbol after Decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 abc 004 sequenced because of previous match 004 004 005 005 def 006 sequenced because of previous match 006 ghi 006 not sequenced 006 006 007 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 9 9 Match Replace Match Replace Usage Provides a convenient shortcut for applications that need to output a predefined text string whenever a symbol matches a master symbol Definition Outputs a user defined data string whenever a match occurs and Matchcode is enabled Serial Cmd K735 status replacement string Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Replacement String Definition User defined data string that when enabled replaces symbol data whenever a match occurs Serial Cmd K735 status replacement string Default MATCH Options An ASCII string up to 64 characters Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K735h 3C gt For gt lt K735h 3E gt For lt K735h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detail
195. er Trigger that will activate the output Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Noread mi Number of Triggers Number to Output On MAMES Decodes per Trigger Decodes per Trigger Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes per trigger threshold Default No Read Options 0 Mismatch 1 No Read 2 Decodes per Trigger Mismatch Output will be activated when the number of mismatches equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers No Read Output will be activated when the number of No Reads equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers Decodes per Trigger Output will be activated when the number of decodes equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 7 25 Configurable Output 1 Trigger Evaluation Period Definition The number of triggers to examine for the trend analysis condition Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes per trigger threshold Default 0 Options 0 to 255 Number to Output On Usage Example If Number to Output On is set to 3 and Trend Analysis Mode is set to No Read then the output will not be activated until 3 No Reads have occurred Definition Sets t
196. er User s Manual 3 9 Auxiliary Port Connections Auxiliary Port Connections The auxiliary port offers an alternative port that can be configured to communicate by RS 232 in several modes including daisy chain As with the host port parameters the auxiliary port settings baud rate parity stop bits and data bits must be identical with those of the auxiliary device Usage An auxiliary port connects the imager to a remote display or to other readers that can display or transfer data Definition These commands set the communication parameters with the auxiliary port which can be used to configure menus send data to the host display data transmissions originating from the host and relay data from other imagers set in tandem daisy chained Auxiliary Port Mode Usage Can be used to transfer data faster or to match an auxiliary device Definition Determines the flow of data between the auxiliary port device s the imager and the host Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Transparent 2 Half duplex 3 Full duplex 4 Daisy chain 5 Command Processing Baud Rate Auxiliary Port Usage Can be used to transfer data faster or to match an auxiliary device Definition The rate at which the imager and host transfer data back and forth Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits dat
197. er motor position required to obtain the user defined setting In this way there is consistency between imagers for any given focal distance input Note To view a list of focal distances supported by your imager use the lt K526 gt command 10 20 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Camera and IP Setup Focal Distance 3 Megapixel Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Default Options This setting provides a means for configuring the focal distance of the imager The input value is in terms of inches and is divided by 100 internally For example 400 sets the imager to a focal distance of 4 inches It is important to note that the imager may not have an exact match for the focal position requested The imager has a range of steps that are calibrated and mapped to focal positions This input value is matched to the closest focal position step that the system supports It is also important to keep in mind that the resolution of the system is not linear As the imager s focal distance setting increases the resolution decreases This effect is offset somewhat by the fact that the depth of field increases at greater focal distances lt K525 focal distance Standard Density 400 4 200 2 to 600 6 Micro Density 300 3 200 2 to 500 5 Note In the factory the imager calibrates its focus curve and matches the focus motor steps to various focal positions Therefore each imager has a sli
198. er the rollover has occurred add 65536 per each rollover the imager does not keep track of the number of rollovers to the current count Note All counter values will be lost if power is recycled to the imager or if the imager receives a Reset or Save command Counters by ESP You can access Counters from ESP s Utilities menu Click the Request button to display the appropriate count or Clear to set the counter to zero Request All Clear All Request Clear IA npe Request Clear Good Read Pa Request Clear Mors Request Clear Mini MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 13 5 Counters by Serial Command No Read Counter Sending lt N gt displays the total number of No Reads that have occurred since the last reset No Read Counter Reset Sending O sets the No Read Counter to 00000 Trigger Counter Sending lt T gt displays the total number of triggers since the last reset Trigger Counter Reset Sending lt U gt sets the trigger counter to 00000 Good Read Match Counter or Good Read Counter Sending V displays the total number of good reads matching the master symbol or if Master Symbol is not enabled the number of good reads since the last reset This counter is always enabled but will only work as a match count when Master Symbol is enabled If Master Symbol is not enabled this counter records the number of good reads This count can be requested at any ti
199. erial Data or External Edge trigger mode either a Start trigger character or a hardware trigger can start an edge trigger read cycle K230 stop character gt NUL 00 in hex disabled Two hex digits representing an ASCII character Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K230h 3C gt For gt lt K230h 3E gt For lt K230h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values 5 14 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Read Cycle End of Read Cycle Definition The read cycle is the time during which the imager will attempt to capture and decode a symbol A read cycle can be ended by a timeout a new trigger or by the last frame in a capture sequence or a combination of the above End of Read Cycle Mode Note When operating in Continuous Read or Continuous Read 1 Output the imager is always in the read cycle Serial Cmd lt K220 end of read cycle read cycle timeout Default Timeout Options 0 Timeout 1 New Trigger 2 Timeout or new Trigger 3 Last Frame 4 Last Frame or New Trigger Timeout Usage Typically used with Serial Data or External Edge and Continuous Read 1 Output It is effective in highly controlled applications when the maximum length of time between objects can be predicted It assures that a read cycle ends before the next symbol app
200. ernal Level Definition To consider a change in state on the trigger input the level must be stable for the trigger filter duration In an edge mode the imager will trigger a read cycle if the active state has been uninterrupted for the entire trigger filter duration In a level mode the leading edge is filtered such that on an active edge the state must be held interrupted for the trigger filter duration before a trigger will occur Serial Cmd lt K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter trailing edge trigger filter Default 313 10 ms Options 1 to 65535 Trigger filter range 32 0 us to 2 10 seconds Trailing Edge Trigger Filter Usage Used to ignore spurious triggers when Trigger Mode is set to External Edge or External Level Definition To consider a change in state on the trigger input the level must be stable for the trigger filter duration In an edge mode the imager will trigger a read cycle if the active state has been uninterrupted for the entire trigger filter duration In a level mode the trailing edge is filtered such that on the falling edge the state must be held for the trigger filter duration before the trigger will be deemed inactive Serial Cmd lt K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter trailing edge trigger filter Default 313 10 ms Options 1 to 65535 Trigger filter range 32 0 us to 2 10 seconds 5 10 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Read Cycle External Trigger
201. ert lt K741 output index length hex string gt Format Assign K742 symbol number status gt Format Status lt K743 output format status gt Output Filter Configuration lt K744 filter number symbology length wildcard placeholder data unused database index Ordered Output Filter lt K745 number of filters gt MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual A 13 Serial Configuration Commands Serial Command Format Serial commands are of two types utility and configuration Rules that apply to both utility and configuration commands Aless than and greater than character enclose the commands Commands and data are case sensitive That is characters must be entered as upper or lower case as specified Serial Utility Commands These are sent during operations and are not followed by lt A gt or lt Z gt Serial Configuration K Commands These begin with a single K character followed by a 3 digit numeric character data fields and an initializing command as follows Knumeric parameter data data etc gt lt initializing command An initializing command lt A gt or lt Z gt may follow the command A lt Z gt initializes the imager s memory and saves for power on an A initializes the imager s memory but does not save for power on For example to enable UPC and save the change for power on send lt K473 1 gt lt Z gt To change Baud Rate and reset w
202. es visual grading of specific ISO IEC 16022 parameters Definition Determines which ISO IEC 16022 parameter the imager will grade via the EDs Serial Cmd lt K737 LED mode ISO IEC 16022 grade Default Final Grade Options 0 Final Grade 1 Symbol Contrast 2 Print Growth 3 Axial Non Uniformity 4 Unused ECC 7 14 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual I O Parameters Serial Verification Allows the user to verify configuration command status Serial Command Echo Status Usage This command is useful in removing any doubt about the imager s interpretation of any configuration command For example if the current preamble is SOM and lt K701 1 START gt is entered the imager will echo back lt K701 SOM gt since the attempted entry START exceeds the four character limit for that command Therefore it is rejected and the existing SOM message is echoed back and remains the preamble message Definition When enabled a configuration command received from the host is echoed back to the p host with the resultant settings Host at Mmager Function If a command with multiple fields is processed some of the fields may have been processed properly while others were not The changes will appear in the string echoed back so that the user will know which fields did or did not change Serial Cmd lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output
203. esets oower on saves power on flash saves Power On Flash Saves uses a 16 bit counter that increments each time an imager setting is saved to the customer parameter section of flash memory with a Zc command MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 7 33 Time Since Reset Time Since Reset Note Time Since Reset is a read only command Hours Serial Cmd lt K407 hours minutes gt Default 16 bit counter 0 to 65535 Hours uses a 16 bit counter that increments every 60 minutes Minutes Serial Cmd lt K407 hours minutes gt Default 16 bit counter 0 to 60 Minutes uses a 16 bit counter that increments every 60 seconds Note Time counts are reset at power on but not with an lt A gt or lt Z gt command 7 34 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual I O Parameters Service Message When Service Message is enabled a message of up to 10 ASCII characters is sent whenever the system detects that the service timer s limit has been reached The service timer is reset at power on meaning that the service timer s limit is the amount of time since last reset Service timer increments can be set in seconds or minutes Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution Default 0 Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Service Message Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default SERVICE Options An ASCII string between 1 and 10 characters Important The ASCII
204. est K command value and ending with the highest K command value lt K gt All Range Status Request This request will return the current settings of all commands within the user defined range Hex Value TMMUONDWESOONAMANRWNHAO Binary Bit Digits BoE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 o 1 1 1 110 00 1101011 110 110 110111 1111010 1111011 1111110 1111111 starting with the lowest user defined K command value and ending with the highest user defined K command value 13 20 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Utilities lt Knnn gt Single Status Request This request will return the value of the variables associated with the requested K command The request of a single entry of a database command cannot exceed the number of database slots for the specific command lt Knnn gt Single Descriptor Status Request This request returns the basic functional description of all fields in the requested K command lt Knnn gt Single Range Status Request This request will return the value range and storage type description of all fields in the requested K command Knnn Display Command Wildcard This request will return the individual K command status description and range for each parameter MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 13 21 Learn Operations Learn Operations Learn Sending the LEARN command from ESP s Term
205. ete dace 10 27 Skew Corretto ve 3 toe oct qe e ie didus 10 28 Morphological Pre Processing een 10 31 Morphological Operation and Operator Size sessssss 10 32 Chapter 11 Configuration Database Configuration Database Serial Commands sees 11 2 Number of Active Indexes ssseee emen 11 3 Configuration Database Status sese 11 4 Database Mode 5 nis cere gere teni a dee deter EE dete 11 10 Save Current Settings to Configuration Database 11 15 Load Current Settings from Configuration Database 11 16 Request Selected Index Settings sssseesess 11 17 Request All Configuration Database Settings ssssss 11 18 Chapter 12 Terminal Terminal WindOW cte ird rcp tate ee Ree cuit peace 12 2 FG Saks EE 12 3 Ia aana 12 4 vi MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Introduction Macros 5o iouis 12 5 Terminal Window Menus esee emen 12 6 Chapter 13 Utilities Serial Utility Commands seem en 13 2 Read Rate sissies nene eid el ee d a A 13 4 crie i a e Ga eed eee in eee a it 13 5 Device Control 5 erint erede ee eI aee ee ede de n 13 7 Differences from Default sese 13 8 Master Database did eee dee eei tt
206. ettings from Configuration Database Definition Allows the configuration settings contained in a selected database index to be loaded to current active configuration settings Serial Cmd lt K255 index gt Example K255 5 This command phrase loads the configuration settings contained in database index 5 to current active configuration settings Load Current Settings from Configuration Database by ESP Active Indexes 5 TT Auto Sync Database settings with Reader _ Advanced Options _ Advanced Options Capture Settings Woi RO P Settings S LA y UA S 5 AC ACA M MEE Curent fidd 20 400 Disable fo fg Reo 52 Enable White ECC 200 i EN ZH GENE e a NUM ETT COH CONN EON LEN mmm es FT INMUINNIUN CN FT UNHUNNCUN NM 5s CON COMM DEO DING C amp io o a psa o o Bo 2 Enable White Enable White bi Enable White D Enable White Disabled Test C 7 i000 o foo Disable o p pao 752 Click the Load Index to Current button to load C 8 i000 po o0 sek o o e 2 cs f QNO HX Dusk D B o 7B C 10 1000 0 400 psa fO p feo fz52 Enable white Disabled Tea config u rati on setti ngs IV Capture for Every Index Show Database Index in Output Sort Index Positions on Good Reads from the se l ected l nd ex cate KERS ESE AET o Losilndn Toren deti to current active settings
207. f code words reserved for error detection A 4 0 if UEC gt 62 B 3 0 if UEC gt 50 C 2 0 if UEC gt 37 D 1 0 if UEC gt 25 F 0 0 if UEC lt 25 If enabled the UEC is appended to the symbol data according to the ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output Mode setting Serial Cmd K709 symbol contrast print growth axial non uniformity VEC gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 8 11 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output by ESP ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output by ESP ESP s Symbol Quality interface allows you to evaluate Data Matrix symbols for compliance with ISO IEC 16022 requirements First determine which ISO IEC 16022 Parameters you need to evaluate using the Symbol Quality tree control Data Matrix ISO IEC 16022 Parameters Symbol Contrast Enabled Print Growth Enabled Axial Non uniformity Enabled Unused ECC Enabled Once you have set these Data Matrix evaluation parameters go to the Preferences Tab and set your Data Matrix Grading Report output preferences After your output preferences are set click the Data Matrix Grading button Data Matrix Grading There will be a wait of a few seconds and then the evaluation results will appear in the Symbol Quality view in a format similar to the one shown below Data Matrix Grading Report GRADE ISO IEC Symbol Contrast 88 i A 16022 Print Growth 8 26
208. f the calibration routine the background color will be set to the appropriate value depending on the symbol in the field of view The Illumination Brightness parameter is not part of the calibration process and it must be configured appropriately prior to calibration Gain Definition When enabled gain will be calibrated to provide the best available image quality and performance When disabled gain is fixed and is not part of the calibration process Serial Cmd K529 gain shutter speed focus position symbol type WOI framing WO margin line scan height processing Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Shutter Speed Definition Unless an application is a static setup the shutter speed setting should be configured by the user based on the application For dynamic applications the user should configure the shutter speed setting so the calibration process can optimize the gain for that setting Serial Cmd lt K529 gain shutter speed focus position symbol type WOI framing WO margin line scan height processing Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Fast Shutter Note The following table shows general guidelines for shutter speed configurations based on various line speeds The configurations shown depend on the imager s optical configuration and on symbol element size Shutter Speed Line Speed 0 250 static 250 750 5 sec 750 1500 10 sec 1500 2
209. f the symbol does not pass this calculation it will not be decoded When set to Both the imager will perform both the Mod 16 and NW7 modulus 11 check character calculations on the symbol If the symbol does not pass either calculation it will not be decoded Serial Cmd KAT1 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Mod 16 2 NW7 Mod 11 3 Mod 16 and NW7 Check Character Output Codabar Definition When this field is disabled and a check character calculation is enabled the imager will strip the verified check character from the symbol data out put This condition must be accounted for if a fixed length is also being used When enabled the imager will output the check character as part of the symbol data This condition must be accounted for if a fixed length is also being used Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6 22 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Symbologies UPC EAN Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Used primarily in point of sale applications in the retail industry It is commonly used with Microscan readers in ap
210. filter a White Balance may be required to balance the red green and blue cells of the image sensor General Purpose When enabled the General Purpose filter is applied to the captured RGB image to produce a gray scale image The gray scale image can be used in most applications but the filtering process increases processing time The General Purpose filter should be used when reading 2D symbols linear symbols that are not positioned horizontally in the field of view or a combination of both Horizontal 1D Symbols When enabled the filter for Horizontal 1D Symbols is applied to the captured RGB image to produce a gray scale image that is designed specifically to provide the best suitable image for a linear symbol that is horizontally positioned in the field of view The Horizontal 1D Symbols filter should be used when reading linear symbols that are positioned horizontally in the field of view MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 10 27 Skew Correction Skew Correction Note Skew Correction does not apply to the High Speed version of the MINI Hawk which has a global shutter The MINI Hawk s CMOS image sensor has a rolling shutter mechanism that controls pixel integration row by row unlike a global shutter gt Full Image Height which performs light integration of all pixels at 4 once When a row of pixels has integrated Bee cc o Y light for the amount of time specified by the Full Image Width user defined sh
211. for future use For example if your imager has settings that you do not want to change choosing Yes would allow you to load those settings to ESP and save them in an ESP file for later retrieval Receiving the imager s settings will also assure that you will not be subsequently saving any unwanted changes that you or someone else has made previously in ESP Saving Send No Save lt A gt Saves ESP settings to current Receive Reader Seis memory Save to Reader gt Send No Save Send and Save lt Z gt Default Current Menu Settings Senden Sav Activates all changes in Default all ESP Settings Send and Save as Customer Defaults current memory and saves to the imager for power on Advanced Options E Send and Save as Customer Defaults lt Zc gt Saves your default settings for quick retrieval This option will be visible only if you have checked Enable Send and Save as Customer Defaults in ESP Preferences 2 16 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Using ESP Defaulting When you select Default Current Menu Settings or Default all ESP Settings you are only defaulting the ESP settings Advanced Options Send Current View This is the same as Save to Reader gt Send No Save except that only the commands in the current configuration Save to Reader gt tree are sent Receive Reader Settings Default Current Menu Settings Default all Setti Send Current Command efault all Settings D i b i This is t
212. for variable symbol lengths Definition Wild Card Character allows a user to define a wild card character as part of the master symbol Serial Cmd K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch Default asterisk Options Any ASCII character Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt K223h 3C For gt lt K223h 3E gt For lt K223h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 9 7 Matchcode Type Sequence on No Read Usage Sequence on No Read is useful when the imager needs to stay in sequence even if no decode occurs Definition When Sequence on No Read is Enabled and Matchcode is set to Sequential the imager sequences the master symbol on every match or No Read When disabled it does not sequence on a No Read Serial Cmd K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled As an example of Sequence on No Read Enabled consider the following decodes Master Symbol Decoded Symbol Master Symbol after Decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 No Read 004 sequenced
213. g sites for additional information about linear and 2D symbologies http www aimglobal org standards aimpubs asp http barcodes gs1us org dnn_bcec Default aspx tabid 82 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 6 1 Symbologies by ESP Symbologies by ESP Parameters Click the Parameters button and then the Symbologies tab To change a setting double click the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options Parameters ESP Values Symbologies 2D Symbologies Data Matrix ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status ETI EE Dion 1D Symbologies Stacked Symbologies Composite Narrow Margin Status Symbology Identifier Background Color Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled para Disabled Disabled Disabled white To open nested options single click the MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Symbologies Symbologies Serial Commands Narrow Margins Symbology ID K450 narrow margin status symbology identifier status Background Color lt K451 background color Composite lt K453 symbology status separator status separator Aztec Code lt K458 status gt Micro QR Code lt K459 status gt Postal Symbologies lt K460 postal symbology type POSTNET status PLANET
214. ger Character lt K229 gt and Undelimited End Trigger Character lt K230 gt To use Edge Mode you must enable and use the Undelimited Start Trigger Character lt K229 gt To use Serial Mode you must use the Delimited Trigger defined by lt K201 gt or enable and use the Undelimited Start Trigger Character lt K229 gt To use Serial and Edge Mode you must use the Delimited Trigger defined by lt K201 gt or enable and use the Undelimited Start Trigger Character lt K229 gt Communications For the USB version of MINI Hawk no communications serial commands have any effect on the imager except the following USB HID Report Status lt K149 gt Preamble lt K141 gt Postamble lt K142 gt EZ Button Default on power on cannot be disabled lt K770 default gt lt K770 1 gt This ensures a level of safety for recovering from misconfigured Power On settings lt Z gt However it is not foolproof as defaulting with the EZ button only recovers Custom Default settings which can be misconfigured themselves For this reason do not save to Custom Default settings lt Zc gt until the imager s configuration has been tested Symbologies If the imager is going to be configured with Data Matrix symbols do not disable Data Matrix lt K479 gt Disabling Data Matrix will prevent the imager from reading configuration symbols MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 3 31 ASCII Character Entry Modifier ASCII Characte
215. ger is in a read cycle 7 22 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual I O Parameters Output State Definition Sets the active electrical state of the discrete output Serial Cmd lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode Default Negative Options 0 Negative 1 Positive Pulse Width Definition Sets the time in 10 ms increments that the discrete output remains active Serial Cmd lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode Default 5 Corresponds to 50 ms Options 0 to 255 0 to 2 55 seconds Divide the number entered on the command line by 100 for time in seconds Output Mode Definition Sets the condition in which the discrete output is de activated Serial Cmd K810 0utput on output state pulse width output mode Default Pulse Options 0 Pulse 2 Latch Mode 2 3 Latch Mode 3 Pulse This is the default mode of operation in which the programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active for the duration of the selected pulse width Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the opposite condition selected under Output On has been met For example if No Read is enabled under Output On the programmable output will go active on a No Read and remain active until the opposite condition a good read occurs Latch Mode 3 Unlatch
216. ght for both x and y directions When enabled the pixels per element value is appended to the symbol data Serial Cmd lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Error Correction Level Data Matrix Only Definition Outputs the Data Matrix ECC level When enabled the ECC level is appended to the symbol data Serial Cmd lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Matrix Size Data Matrix Only Definition Defines the symbol matrix size in number of pixels in both the x and y axis When enabled the matrix size value is appended to the symbol data Serial Cmd lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 8 14 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Symbol Quality Quiet Zone Data Matrix Only Definition When this feature is enabled the size of the quiet zone is evaluated and a PASS or FAIL message is appended to the symbol data Serial Cmd lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixel
217. ghtly different focus map of stepper motor positions vs focal positions This allows the user to enter a focal distance that causes the imager to select the closest stepper motor position required to obtain the user defined setting In this way there is consistency between imagers for any given focal distance input Note To view a list of focal distances supported by your imager use the lt K526 gt command MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 10 21 Focal Distance Table Read Only Focal Distance Table Read Only Number of Focal Distances Definition Specifies the number of focal distances supported by the imager Serial Cmd lt K526 number of focal distances focal distance Options 1 to 255 Focal Distance Definition Each x output represents a focal distance that is supported by the imager The values are specified in 1 100ths of an inch but the focal distance increments and decrements are not that fine The focal distance is defined from a curve equation whose constants are calibrated during factory setup The output value is in terms of inches and it is multiplied by 100 to remove the decimal place For example an output of 375 would signify a focal distance of 3 75 Serial Cmd K526 number of focal distances focal distance Options 200 2 to 600 6 10 22 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Camera and IP Setup Focal Distance Table Read Only 3 Megapixel Number of
218. gth minimum number of bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 5 Options 1 to 16 Minimum Number of Bars Pharmacode Definition Sets the minimum number of bars that a Pharmacode symbol must have to be considered valid Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum number of bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value Default 2 Options 1 to 16 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 6 27 Pharmacode Bar Width Status Pharmacode Definition Serial Cmd Default Options If set to Mixed the imager will autodiscriminate between narrow bars and wide bars If set to All Narrow all bars will be considered as narrow bars If set to All Wide all bars will be considered as wide bars If set to Fixed Threshold it will use the fixed threshold value to determine whether the bars are narrow or wide The Bar Width Status setting will be ignored when the imager is able to tell the difference between the narrow and the wide bars K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum number of bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value Mixed 0 Mixed 1 All Narrow 2 All Wide 3 Fixed Threshold Direction Pharmacode Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Specifies the direction in which a symbol can be read lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum numbe
219. gy since 1988 is an alphanumeric symbol with a set of 35 characters each encoded by a set of 4 bars in 12 module positions All bars have a single width it is the presence 1 or absence 0 of bars in each of the twelve module positions that make BC412 binary This symbology is also bi directional and self clocking with a start character and a stop character Serial Cmd lt K481 status check character output fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Character Output BC412 Usage Check Character Output added to the symbol provides additional security Definition When enabled the check character character is read and compared along with the symbol data When disabled symbol data is sent without the check character Serial Cmd lt K481 status check character output fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status BC412 Definition When enabled the imager will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered valid Serial Cmd lt K481 status check character output fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length BC412 Definition When enabled the check character character is read and compared along with the symbol data When disabled
220. h Performance Imager User s Manual Output Format Output Filter Configuration Definition Output filtering is a method of providing a set of good read qualifiers and also providing ordered output There is a filter for up to the first 10 positions in a multisymbol output The first filter corresponds to the first symbol output at the end of the read cycle Each filter has has settings for the following four EI Symbology Symbol Length Data and Configuration Database umber Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology length wildcard placeholder data unused database index Rules for Output Filter Configuration Output Filter Configuration Rule 1 Each symbol that is decoded must match one of the filters before it can be saved to a read cycle record There is an exception to this rule however when the number of symbols required for a read cycle exceeds the number of active filters In such a case unfiltered symbols can be placed into unfiltered output positions For example if the number of symbols required is 6 but there are only 4 active filters the last 2 positions can be filled by any unfiltered qualified symbol Output Filter Configuration Rule 2 The same filter setup can be used multiple times For example filters 1 2 and 3 can be set up to filter Data Matrix symbols and the output will occur in the order the symbols are decoded Output Filter Configuration Rule 3 All qualified symbols will be sorted
221. h Performance Imager User s Manual 5 1 Read Cycle by ESP Read Cycle by ESP Parameters ESP Values Read Cycle Parameters Multisymbol IURE Trigger Clickthe Parameters button and then the l Serial Trigger Read Cycle tab Decodes Before Output 1 End of Read Cycle Timeout Read Cycle Timeout Capture Mode New Trigger Capture Time Timeout or New Trigger Store Noread Image Last Frame Image Processing Settings To open nested options To change a setting single click the double click the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options 5 2 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Read Cycle Read Cycle Serial Commands Trigger Mode Filter Duration K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter trailing edge trigger filter Serial Trigger Character K201 serial trigger character External Trigger State K202 external trigger state End of Read Cycle K220 end of read cycle read cycle timeout Minimum Good Reads lt K221 minimum good reads Multisymbol K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator Start Trigger Character lt K229 start character Stop Trigger Character K230 stop character Capture Mode K244 capture mode number of captures rapid capture mode Capture Timing lt K242 time before first capture time between first and second captures
222. have just drawn to resize the region of interest You can also click on the center of the window of interest and move it 3 Test the new settings in Read Rate Mode Video Evaluation Calibration WOI Configuration Database Dynamic Setup Window of Interest Reset Capture and Decode Top D Height 1024 3 NoDecode tto H wan ha 3 Video Evaluation Calibration WOI Configuration Database Dynamic Setup Window of Interest Reset Capture and Decode Top D Height 104 Z No Decode wto H wan 1280 3 Note To remove the window of interest click the Reset button or click anywhere in the WOI pane Note that all pixels not in the WOI are defined as black Because the imager has far less processing to do in a smaller window read rates typically increase dramatically One possible downside is that the chance of missing a symbol increases with the smaller window Always verify that your WOI will be large enough to allow for any random movement of symbols in your field of view 10 10 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Camera and IP Setup Window of Interest by Serial Command The figure shows where to locate the start position of the row and column pointers and how to measure the column depth and row WOI Row Pointer width dimensions f lt i gt Top Row Pointer WOI Column Poin
223. he Model menu you can select any of the models supported by ESP When you choose a different model the connection to your present model will be terminated Model MINI Hawk 32 MINI Hawk 1 New Model Remove Model To connect to another model select New Model choose a new model from the pop up menu that appears and click OK Note When you save an ESP file you are saving the settings of all the models defined in that file MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 2 5 Menu Toolbar Options The Options menu allows you to save memos and set up ESP Onti Preferences Pref Note Preferences will be saved and loaded into ESP whenever ESP X is opened next whether or not you save the ESP file Document Memo Model Memo Preferences General Tab ESP Preferences General Terminal Bar Code Options Advanced On Startup Toolbar Style The Toolbar Style options allow you to Reload Last File Show Both Icon and Text determine how ESP M Show Model Prompt C Only Show Icon will display the mode options in the two rows V Show Connect Prompt Only Show Text at the top of the screen Receive After Connect Skip EZ Mode Enable Send and Save as Customer Defaults Default Settings Reload Last File At startup reloads the last file saved to the host computer s hard drive Show Model Prompt At startup shows the model menu displaying all supported reade
224. he number of Trend Analysis Mode events mismatches No Reads or reads trigger as configured by Trend Analysis Mode to occur within the trigger evaluation period before activating the associated output Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes per trigger threshold Default 0 Options 0 to 255 Decodes per Trigger Threshold Definition When set to this mode and when the appropriate output is set to output on trend analysis the imager will function in a Decodes per Trigger mode during the read cycle and the trend analysis operation Output will be activated based on whether or not the symbol decode count at the end of the read cycle crosses the decodes per trigger threshold Note Although this setup causes the imager to function in a Decodes per Trigger mode the decode count will only be appended to the symbol data if the status of the Decodes per Trigger command is enabled Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes per trigger threshold gt Default 0 Options 0 to 65535 7 26 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 1 I O Parameters Note Output On under Output 1 Parameters must be set to Symbol Quality for this output to function Output 1 Parameters Output On Symbol Quality Under Output 1 Parameters expand the Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 tree Symbo
225. he same as Send Current Advanced Options Current View f View except that it saves only the SURGENS comman command that is currently selected Add Exception Remove Exception Add Remove Exception After you perform a Receive Reader Settings command and you click on the Add Exception option you may see a list of serial commands These are commands that may be in your imager s firmware but not included in or different from your current version of ESP You can edit these commands by double clicking on them and changing them as needed It is important to note that these commands will be saved to your imager whenever you send a Save to Reader command or an lt A gt or a lt Z gt command Also if there is a corresponding ESP menu item the ESP Value column for that item will be blank following a Receive Reader Settings command 1 From the Send Recv button or by right clicking in any blank section of a tree control view MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 2 17 Using EZ Trax Using EZ Trax For detailed information about using EZ Trax refer to the Help menu in EZ Trax software or the EZ Trax Quick Start Guide available on the Microscan Tools CD For information about how to configure the MINI Hawk for use with EZ Trax see Setting Up the Imager for EZ Trax in Chapter 5 Read Cycle 2 18 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual ENNEN 3 Communications Contents Communications by ESR oit ete
226. host knows precisely when the object is in the field of view It is also useful in determining if a No Read has occurred Definition In Serial Data the imager accepts an ASCII character from the host or controlling device as a trigger to start a read cycle A Serial Data trigger behaves the same as an External Edge trigger Serial commands are entered inside angle brackets as shown here lt t gt Serial Cmd lt K200 4 gt Note In Serial Data sending a non delimited start serial character will start a read cycle however a non delimited stop serial character has no effect Serial Data and Edge Usage Serial Data or External Edge is seldom used but can be useful in an application that primarily uses an external sensing device but occasionally needs to be triggered manually An auxiliary terminal can be connected to the auxiliary port so the user can send the serial trigger character through the imager to the host Definition In this mode the imager accepts either a serial ASCII character or an external trigger pulse to start the read cycle Serial Cmd lt K200 5 gt Note In Serial Data sending a non delimited start serial character will start a read cycle however a non delimited stop serial character has no effect MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 5 9 Trigger Mode and Filter Duration Leading Edge Trigger Filter Usage Used to ignore spurious triggers when Trigger Mode is set to External Edge or Ext
227. ial Cmd K140 protocol address Default 1 Options 1 to 50 1 Poll address Ox1C Select address Ox1D 2 Poll address Ox1E Select address Ox1F 50 Poll address 0x7E Select address Ox7F Note See USB HID Interface on page 3 23 for protocol information relating to USB 3 6 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Communications ACK NAK Options Definition These parameters take effect for ACK NAK lt K140 4 gt on the main RS 232 or RS 422 ports not on the Auxiliary Port and are completely independent of the Polling Mode Options lt K148 gt The imager always follows the protocol in both directions to and from the host There is no option to disable it from either direction Serial Cmd lt K147 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK RES NAK Defaults RES Reset 00 disabled REQ Request 00 disabled STX Start of Text 00 disabled ETX End of Text 00 disabled ACK Acknowledge 06 NAK Negative Acknowledge 15 The following are general outlines of the ACK NAK protocol Items that are framed by brackets can either be disabled or enabled LRC does not include STX but it does include preamble postamble and ETX Symbol Data Output TX to host STX preamble SYMBOL DATA postamble ETX LRC Response from host ACK NAK Sent when LRC ETX postamble or timeout waiting for more data are detected if REQ is disabled depending on what is enabled Commands from Host to Imager TX t
228. ications 00 0 2 ccccccceceeesneceeceeeeaeceeeesenaeceeeesecaaeeeeeseceaeeseeseseeeeeeeeeneeaees A 2 Appendix B Electrical Specifications sse nennt A 6 Appendix C Serial Configuration Commands ssssssssssssssssseeeeenen enne nnn A 10 Appendix D Communications Protocol eesssssssesseseee nennen nnne nennen nennen A 16 Appendix E ASC Table i e t e ettari lage eb laces iecore e e E Eaa iniata A 25 Appendix F Interface Standards ener nnne esent nnn A 26 Appendix G Operational Tips c cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecaeceeeeseeaeceeeeseaaeaeeeeeeceeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetees A 27 Appendix H Using an External Trigger ssssssssssssssseneeeeene eene nnne A 28 Appendix USB to Serial Virtual COM Port Driver sssssssssssseseseneneern enne A 29 Appendix J MINI Hawk Image Output ssssssssssssesesssesseeseen enne ennt ennt sene A 32 Appendix K Glossary of Terims cccceeececeeeeeeeecaeeeeeececaeceeeeseaaeceeeeseaaeaeeeeseeeeaeseeeeseeeeeeeetes A 35 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual A 1 General Specifications Appendix A General Specifications Mechanical Height 1 25 4 mm Width 1 8 45 7 mm Note Nominal dimensions shown Depth 2 10 53 3 mm Typical tolerances apply Weight 2 oz 57 g Environmental Enclosure IP54 category 2 Operating Tempurature 0 to 40 C 32 to 104 F
229. id excessive skew or pitch Maximum skew is 30 maximum pitch is 30 The illustration below shows skew axis pitch axis and tilt axis Skew bb lt Symbol opm P i nee 4 Pitch Reader Note For accuracy of testing and performance Microscan recommends using a mounting arm adapter kit Contact your Microscan sales manager for details about mounting arm adapter kits and other accessories 1 4 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Quick Start Step 4 Install ESP ESP Software can be found on the Microscan Tools CD that is packaged with the MINI Hawk 1 Follow the prompts to install ESP from the CD 2 Click on the ESP icon to run the program Note ESP can also be installed from the Download Center at www microscan com Minimum System Requirements 166 MHz Pentium processor Pentium Il processor recommended Windows 7 Vista XP or 2000 operating system nternet Explorer 5 0 or higher 64 MB minimum RAM 128 MB RAM recommended 80 MB hard drive space 800 x 600 minimum 256 color display 1024 x 768 32 bit color recommended MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 1 5 Select Model Step 5 Select Model When you start ESP the following menu will appear Select a Model Current Legacy EELDE TT OX 830 Qx 870 MS 890 MS Connect MS Connect 210 5100 EZ Match AEK Quadrus MINI IPTE Quadius MINI MINI Hawk 0X Hawk Velocity LEE HS 2D MS
230. iddle of the symbol If the symbol is tilted such that the scan line will not pass completely through the symbol the scan width will be adjusted to include the entire symbol Refer to the diagram below ZA A Straight Line Framed This parameter is the same as Straight Line except that the Window of Interest will also frame the scan line on the symbol length as well The scan line includes the symbol plus an additional margin area determined by the WOI Margin parameter MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 4 9 Calibration Options Window of Interest WOI Margin Definition Sets the margin size that is applied to the calibrated symbol This parameter is expressed in number of pixels If the margin causes the image to exceed the maximum image size it will be reduced accordingly Serial Cmd K529 gain shutter speed focus position symbol type WOI framing WOI margin line scan height processing Default 75 pixels Options 20 to 1280 Line Scan Height Definition This parameter is only used with the Straight Line modes It sets the scan height of the straight line image and it is expressed in number of pixels Serial Cmd K529 gain shutter speed focus position symbol type WO framing WOI margin line scan height processing gt Default 64 pixels Options 3 to 1024 Processing Definition This setting defines the amount of time and effort the imager will spend attempting to decode a sym
231. ier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Symbol Quality Separator by ESP Parameters ESP Values Symbol Quality Global Total Read Time Disabled default separator SP the Symbol When you double click on the Quality Separator Calculator appears Use the calculator keypad for one click separator configuration Symbol Quality Separator Output Mode Grade Symbol Quality Global Total Read INE Disabled Output Mode C gs NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENG ISO IEC 16022 Parameters Symbol Contrast ACK BEL BS HT med mm Print Growth _FF pe so si DLE oct Axial Non uniformity DC2 Dc3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB Unused ECC CAN EM SUB ESC FS Gs Grading R P Percent Cell Damage Ls us se Capture Time Click Delete to remove characters 8 8 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Symbol Quality Data Matrix Output Mode Note Output Mode applies to ISO IEC 16022 symbol quality parameters Definition Output Mode specifies how the four output parameters if enabled are formatted Serial Cmd lt K708 symbol quality separator output mode Default Grade Options 0 Grade 1 Value Grade If in Grade Mode a grade A B C D is appended to the symbol data Value If in Value Mode the calculated value for the given parameter is appended to the symbol data MINI Hawk High Performance
232. ies 7 32 Trend Analysis Output 3 essem enne 7 32 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 3 eese 7 32 Diagnostic Output 9 2 unice onte oreet tp sep eaan dune 7 32 Power On Reset Counts ssssssssseeee eene 7 33 Time Smee Reset iirst crece deren E Ra Ruta e dune deba 7 34 Service Message eret prr rente rhe enn 7 35 Frame Information sse mee 7 36 Image OU p 3 retener ee RR ERE 7 37 Database Identifier Output sssssssssssseeeenenn 7 40 Quality OUtpUl 2 itte erm re CD Ret 7 41 Configuring EZ Trax Output ssssssssssssseseeeneeeren ene 7 42 Chapter 8 Symbol Quality Symbol Quality Serial Commands esee 8 2 Overview of Symbol Quality see 8 3 Symbol Quality by ESP ssssseeee eene eene 8 4 Symbol Quality Separator Data Matrix Output Mode 8 8 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output eene 8 10 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output by ESP osese 8 12 Microscan Symbol Quality Output eee 8 13 Microscan Symbol Quality Output by ESP scce 8 16 Chapter 9 Matchcode Matchcode by ESP 1 nie eni dte i de dee e fee eins 9 2 Matchcode Serial Commands esee 9 3 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual v Table of Contents Overview of Matchcode ssssseseeeene enne 9
233. igger signal associated with the appearance of an object Falling edge is the trigger signal associated with the subsequent disappearance of the object This applies both to External Level and External Edge External Edge Object p 1 di Object 1 moving in front of the detector beam causes a change in Object a read cycle detector Initiate Second Read Cycle M 1 lt j change in the trigger state This sig Neel ends the previous read cycle unless ete ctor u Initiate Read Cycle the trigger state which initiates the Object 2 moving in front of the detector beam causes another nal initiates a new read cycle and Timeout is enabled and a good read or timeout has not occured Definition Serial Cmd 5 8 This mode is highly recommended in any application where conveying speed is constant or if spacing object size or read cycle timeouts are consistent External Edge as with Level allows the read cycle active state to begin when a trigger change of state from an external sensing device is received However the passing of an object out of sensor range does not end the read cycle The read cycle ends with a good read output or depending on the End of Read Cycle setting a timeout or new trigger occurs lt K200 3 gt MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Read Cycle Serial Data Usage Serial Data is effective in a highly controlled environment where the
234. ightness output between imagers through a factory calibration operation Each of the brightness settings is calibrated to provide the same level of intensity for each imager Serial Cmd lt K536 brightness gt Default High Options 0 Off 1 Low 2 Medium 3 High 4 Constant Constant When set to Constant the illumination is the same as the Medium setting However the LEDs will always be on during a read cycle and will only be off between read cycles This cuts down on perceptible LED flashing 10 26 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Camera and IP Setup Color Filter Note Color Filter is only available for the 3 Megapixel MINI Hawk Definition The 3 Megapixel MINI Hawk s image sensor captures images in color and then processes them for optimal decode performance Color image processing requires image captures to be filtered or the R G and B cells to be equalized This is achieved by applying one of the available filters or by performing a white balance with the current camera configuration before attempting to decode a symbol This option specifies the filter method that is applied to the RGB color image to produce a monochrome image Usage K543 color filter Default General Purpose 0 Disabled Options 1 General Purpose 2 7 Horizontal 1D Symbols Disabled When Color Filter is disabled no filter is applied to the captured image If you are attempting to decode symbols without a
235. ill need to write an application that can receive the image 8 bit format 7 data bit communication will not work split up the data and write the file The data is format info and then image data so an ASCII terminal will not work The format of the data will be added for readability SOH DATALEN FRAMETYPE SCHEMA DATA CRC SOH SOH character DATALEN the length of data to follow 32 bit integer from 00000000 to FFFFFFFF FRAMETYPE 21 SCHEMA 2 DATA image data CRC CRC16 check digit at the end includes SOH and everything after except the CRC More information on these formats is available at http partners adobe com public developer en tiff TIFF6 pdf and http www exif org specifications html A 34 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Appendices Appendix K Glossary of Terms Aberration The failure of an optical lens to produce an exact point to point correspondence between the object and its resulting image Various types are chromatic spherical coma astigmatism and distortion Absorption The loss of light of certain wavelengths as it passes through a material and is converted to heat or other forms of energy Active Illumination Lighting an area with a light source coordinated with the acquisition of an image Strobed flash tubes and pulsed lasers are examples ADC See Analog to Digital Converter AID Converter See Analog to Digital Converter AGC See
236. inal will put the imager into a mode of operation that will cause it to learn the next Data Matrix symbol decoded This mode of operation will remain active until either a Data Matrix symbol is decoded or the call is made to disable the mode and revert back to normal operation Upon decoding a Data Matrix symbol the image processing will save pertinent information regarding the target symbol to allow it to be processed more quickly and consistently The data collected by the Learn operation can be saved for a Power On condition by sending the lt Z gt command Unlearn Sending the lt UNLEARN gt command will cause the imager to discard any information acquired during a Learn operation The Unlearn state can be saved for a Power On condition by sending the lt Z gt command Learn Status Sending the LEARN request will return the current status of Learn operations Responses are sent in this format lt LEARN 0 gt Default symbol has not been learned LEARN 1 Learn operation in progress lt LEARN 2 gt Symbol has been learned Learn Persistence The learn state and parameters persist in the same way as ordinary parameters Examples AMINI Hawk in a Learned state has not been saved Cycling power will remove any Learned state information and the imager will power on in its configured state AMINI Hawk is saved in a Learning state The imager will power on in the Learning state and will learn the first Data Mat
237. ion Allows current active configuration settings to be saved to a selected database index Serial Cmd lt K255 index gt Example K255 5 This command phrase saves the imager s current active configuration settings to database index 5 Save Current Settings to Configuration Database by ESP aS s x Auto Sync Database settings with Reader Advanced Options lt lt WOl ROI Capture Settings Processing Settings Curent i000 po 4 00 o Disable D peo 752 Test 0 4 e Test EN EHE CONO ET i E QNM es c c 6 e C amp roo 20 400 Disable D o faso 752 Enable white Disabled Test c c 6 C 1000 20 400 Disable 0 0 490 752 u Enable White Disabled Test 1000 20 400 Disable 0 0 480 752 Enable White Disabled Test 1000 20 400 Disable 0 0 480 7520 Enable White Disabled Test 10 hooo o 400 Disable o o aoo 752 Enable white Disabled Test v Capture for Every Index Show Database Index in Output Sort Index Positions on Good Reads Calibrate Receive Settings Send Settings Load Current To Index Load Index To Current Click the Load Current to Index button to save the imager s current configuration parameters to the selected database index MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 11 15 Load Current Settings from Configuration Database Load Current S
238. ion of the imager s read capabilities and the limits of your application When Decodes per Second is unchecked the test will count the percentage of decodes relative to the number of actual scans Click Stop to end the test Calibrate The calibration routine that will optimize the imager by comparing Read Rates at various camera and image processing settings Enter App Mode to access configuration trees and other setup features Click Calibrate to begin the initial calibration routine Calbration is explained at the left of the EZ Mode screen and also in Quick Start odel Options Connect Help 3 App Mode Autoconnect Switch Model Eme eiusg Welcome to Easy Setup Program ae x T PN Click Locate to activate the MINI Hawk s blue target pattern LEDs Center the target pattern on the symbol The display shows you where the symbol is located in the imager s field of view Starts Read Rate test For Help press F1 omenen Point to Point Comi Ends Read Rate test 2 2 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Application Mode Using ESP From EZ Mode you can click on the App Mode button to access specific configuration menus Utilities tools Camera setup Output Format options and a Terminal window where serial commands can be entered App Mode Note The App Mode and EZ Mode buttons appear in the same p
239. ion under the definition of Pitch Substrate The surface upon which a linear or 2D symbol is printed stamped or etched Symbol Transitions The transition of bars and spaces on a symbol used to detect the presence of a symbol on an object Symbology A symbol type such as Code 39 or Code 128 with special rules to define the widths and positions of bars and spaces to represent specific numeric or alohanumeric information Tilt Rotation of a linear or 2D symbol around an axis perpendicular to the substrate See the illustration under the definition of Pitch Trigger A signal transition or character string that initiates a read cycle Very Large Scale Integration VLSI The creation of integrated circuits by combining thousands of transistor based circuits on a single chip VLSI See Very Large Scale Integration Watchdog Timer A security device that detects system crashes and attempts to reset the imager A 40 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual
240. iscrete output when the data does not match that of the master symbol or the symbol has not been decoded before the end of the read cycle Match or Good Read Activates a discrete output when the symbol data matches the master symbol Note If you want to output for a good read and Matchcode is not enabled you can enable any output for Match Mismatch Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data does not match that of the master symbol No Read Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data is not decoded before the end of the read cycle MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 7 21 Configurable Output 1 Trend Analysis Usage Typically used when successful decodes are occurring but a discrete output is needed to flag a trend in quality issues Definition Activates discrete output when a trend analysis condition is met depending on the trend analysis option enabled Symbol Quality Usage Typically used when a discrete indication is needed to flag a symbol quality condition Definition Activates discrete output when a symbol quality condition is met depending on the symbol quality option enabled Diagnostic Warning Usage Typically used when a discrete indication of a diagnostic condition is needed Definition Activates discrete output when a diagnostic warning condition is met depending on the diagnostic option enabled In Read Cycle Definition Activates a discrete output when the ima
241. ital pixel data processing and minimum row time requirements of the image sensor 16 1 At 16 1 16 pixel signals from 4 adjacent rows and columns are combined so that only 1 pixel is output for every 16 pixels sampled An image with the dimensions 640 x 480 will be scaled to 160 x 120 Since the resolution of the output image is reduced the frame rate will increase but not by the factor of the image reduction This is due to the overhead time of digital pixel data processing and minimum row time requirements of the image sensor 10 16 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Camera and IP Setup AEC AGC Mode Note AEC AGC Mode is only applicable to the High Speed version of the MINI Hawk Definition AEC AGC Mode Automatic Exposure Control Automatic Gain Control Mode maintains optimal self adjusting exposure and gain settings This ensures that acquired images fall in a desirable region of the camera s sensitivity range for optimal image luminance Usage K542 pixel sub sampling AEC AGC mode AEC AGC brightness Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 AEC 2 AGC 3 AEC AGC AEC AEC enables Automatic Exposure Control In this mode the optimal setting for exposure shutter is computed and updated for every frame It may take several frames to adjust the shutter value to the correct setting The current camera shutter parameter is updated at the end of the read cycle see Camera Settings Note The mi
242. ithout saving changes for power on send lt K100 3 gt lt A gt Serial Configuration Command Conventions All data fields except the last must be followed by a comma without a space NUL cannot be used The characters lt gt and can be used but only if entered as hex pairs see ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 All fields preceding a modified field must be included If there is no change in preceding fields then commas alone can be entered in these fields For example if only the last field in the following command is changing lt K100 4 1 0 0 gt can be entered as lt K100 0 gt All fields following a modified field can be omitted For example to change Baud Rate only send lt K100 3 gt A 14 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Appendices Concatenating Configuration Commands Commands can be concatenated added together in a single string or data block For example lt K145 7 gt lt K220 1 gt lt K450 1 gt lt A gt enables LRC sets End of Read Cycle mode to New Trigger enables Narrow Margins and resets the data buffers without saving the changes for power on Serial Command Status Request To ensure that any command was received and accepted you can send the Show Reader Status command lt gt The status of a specific serial command can be requested by entering the command followed by a question mark For example send lt K142 gt to request the status of Postamble
243. iver S e To continue click Next MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual A 29 USB to Serial Virtual COM Port Driver 4 Read the License Agreement shown below If you accept the terms of the agreement click the radio button next to the statement I accept this agreement and click Next BS To continue accept the following license agreement To read the entire agreement use the scroll bar or press the Page Down key Software Product License Carefully read the tems and conditions of this agreement befor EES eo ee eee se terms and conditions as Licensee If your organization does not agree with the tems and conditions of this agreement do not continue with installation and promptly retum the oae Prot ral all eat moc nemus asl corneal i Microscan Systems Inc Microscan 700 SW 39th Street Renton accept this agreement NS I dont accept this agreement Important After accepting the license agreement and clicking Next you may see a Windows Security warning that states Windows can t verify the publisher of this driver software If you receive this warning choose the Install this driver software anyway option 5 The driver files will begin installing This may take several seconds Do not interfere with the installer during this process Microscan USB to Serial Driver Installer Installing the USB Virtual COM Port Driver for your Microscan Imager E c e Plea
244. ixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Codabar Definition When disabled the imager will accept any Codabar symbol provided it doesn t exceed the system s maximum capabilities When enabled the imager will reject any Codabar symbol that doesn t match the fixed length Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Length Codabar Definition This is the value against which all Codabar symbol lengths will be compared Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 10 Options 1 to 64 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 6 21 Codabar Check Character Type Codabar Definition When disabled the imager will not perform any character checking calculations on decoded Codabar symbols When set to Mod 16 the imager will perform a modulus 16 check character calculation on the symbol If the symbol does not pass this calculation it will not be decoded When set to NW7 The imager will perform an NW7 modulus 11 check character calculation on the symbol I
245. l Cmd Options A common application in conjunction with handheld imagers is one that employs an auxiliary readout to detect misapplied symbols In Transparent Mode data is passed between the auxiliary port and the host The imager buffers data from the auxiliary port and echoes the keyed data on the auxiliary port Auxiliary port data is passed through to the host whenever a return key is pressed at the Aux auxiliary port or whenever symbol data is Host Port sent If sent with symbol data it is processed y on a first in first out basis B Auxiliary port data to the host is always sent Imager with a preamble and postamble If the imager is in a polling mode with the host auxiliary port data will still pass through Data Originating from the Imager Transmission to the auxiliary port occurs immediately upon a good read Aux Data sent to the auxiliary port does not include Host Port a preamble or a postamble Vv lt I e Communications with the auxiliary port is a always in Point to Point protocol even if the Imager host is in a polled protocol mode Data Originating from the Host All host data is echoed to the auxiliary port in Host B unpolled mode Vv a Imager lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt 1 Transparent
246. l Cmd lt K460 postal symbology type POSTNET status PLANET status USPS4CB status POSTNET allow B and B fields Australia Post allow 0 FCC Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled PLANET Status Usage PLANET Postal Alphanumeric Encoding Technique is a symbology used by the United States Postal Service to track and identify items during delivery Each PLANET symbol is either 12 or 14 digits long and encodes data in half height and full height bars making PLANET a 2 state symbology The symbol always starts and ends with a full height bar or guard rail and each individual digit is represented by a set of five bars in which two of the bars are always short Definition If U S Post and PLANET Status are both enabled the imager will decode PLANET symbols Serial Cmd lt K460 postal symbology type POSTNET status PLANET status USPS4CB status POSTNET allow B and B fields Australia Post allow 0 FCC Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6 32 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Symbologies USPS4CB Status Usage USPS4CB also called Intelligent Mail is used by the United States Postal Service to sort and track individual items as well as flats of mail USPS4CB combines the capabilities of POSTNET and PLANET and can encode 31 digits 65 bars USPS4CB symbols are slightly longer than POSTNET symbols and offer additional flexibility in choosing symbol height and width D
247. l Quality ISO IEC 16022 Output on Symbol Contrast Disabled Output on Print Growth Disabled Output on Axial Non uniformity Disabled Output on Unused ECC Disabled Symbol Contrast Threshold Grade C Print Growth Threshold Grade C Axial Non uniformity Threshold Grade C Unused ECC Threshold Grade C Output on Symbol Contrast Usage Lets the user know if symbol quality is less than acceptable Definition If enabled toggles Output 1 to an active state when Symbol Contrast Threshold is met Serial Cmd lt K800 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Output on Print Growth Usage Lets the user know if symbol quality is less than acceptable Definition If enabled toggles Output 1 to an active state when Print Growth Threshold is met Serial Cmd lt K800 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 7 27 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 1 Output on Axial Non Uniformity Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Lets the user know if symbol quality is less than
248. le the output will be 5 Serial Cmd lt K231 master symbol number Caution Be sure to add the or you will delete the master symbol Note This command returns the number of master symbols if no number is included ESP 1 Click the Utilities button and the Master Database tab 2 Click the Receive Reader s Database button Master Symbol Database Size V Matchcode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index 5 Receive Reader s Database Send Database to Reader Request All Master Symbol Data Definition This command will return master symbol data for all symbols enabled up to 10 Serial Cmd lt K231 gt 13 12 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Utilities Read Next Symbol as Master Symbol Definition After you ve set the size in the database you can order the imager to read the next symbol as the master symbol for any given master symbol number Serial Cmd Gmaster symbol number To store the next symbol decoded as master symbol 1 send lt G gt or G1 To store the next symbol decoded as the master symbol for any other master symbol database number send Gmaster symbol number 1 10 gt For example G5 will cause the next symbol read to be entered as master symbol 5 ESP In the Master Database tab under the Output Format menu 1 Select the master symbol index number in which you want to store the symbol data 2 Click the Read Symbol into Selected Index button
249. llows you to hide non printable characters or to show them in Standard or Enhanced format Default Settings returns all the above settings to default Keyboard Macros allows you to create new keyboard macro commands that can be sent from function keys F2 F4 F5 etc Terminal Dropdown Menu The dropdown Terminal menu has Capture Text Save Current Text Send File Find Next and Find Previous functions as well as the same functions defined above Terminal 12 6 Capture Text lets you append data in real time to a capture Tob text file of your choice While in operation the text file Save Current Text cannot be opened You can select Pause to interrupt Send File the capture flow or Stop to end the flow and open the file Change Font Save Current Text saves all text in the Terminal Change Echo Font window to a text file Enable Ech SendFile allows you to browse for specific files and DANE EENG send them to the reader Change Background Color lt Find Next searches for a user defined section of text Non Printable Characters gt in the Terminal Default Settings Find Previous operates in the same way as Find Next but searches backward through Terminal text Find Mext F3 Find Previous Shift F3 Keyboard Macros MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual ee 73 Utilities Contents Serial Utility Commands sss nennt nter ninh tener nnne tentes nn seen nnne nnns
250. lly 4 14 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Calibration Calibration Progress Output to Terminal When initiated by serial command or EZ button the autocalibration operation will output progress and process information to a terminal if the system is configured to do so Terminal Depending upon how the calibration options are configured the autocalibration process can have up to 5 steps Quick Focus Search Pass Focus Pass Medium Pass Fine Tune Pass Calibration data is shown in a simple table format under 8 category headings each of which are defined below Heading Definition Prog Progress indicator with a range of 0 100 Indicates percent complete Rating Rating indicator higher ratings are more favorable Decode Number of successful decodes for the pass Quality Quality indicator higher ratings are more favorable Focus Focus position under operation Shutter Shutter setting under operation Gain Gain setting under operation Locate Time required to locate symbol expressed in milliseconds Calibration Progress Output Examples Terminal Quick Focus This mode is only run if Quick Focus calibration mode is enabled see Focus Position on page 4 5 Quick Focus calibration mode is designed to quickly locate the focus setting for an object at the center of the imager s field of view There is no terminal output for this operation Search Pass The purpos
251. lly to all three Symbol Quality standards Capture Time Definition Capture time in milliseconds is a fixed overhead that includes the time of capture and transfer of the image When enabled the capture time is appended to the symbol data Serial Cmd lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Locate Time Definition The time in milliseconds from the start of image processing until the symbol has been located and is ready to be decoded When enabled the locate time is appended to the symbol data Serial Cmd lt K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 8 13 Microscan Symbol Quality Output Decode Time Definition The time in milliseconds required to decode a symbol When enabled the decode time is appended to the symbol data Serial Cmd K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Pixels Per Element Data Matrix Only Definition The number of pixels for each element either dark or li
252. longer timeout should be tried to ensure that the symbol is decoded successfully MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 5 23 Image Storage Image Storage Image Storage Type Definition Allows the user to store images from separate read cycles and to retrieve them later The number of available slots for storage depends on the mode of operation If the imager is in Rapid Capture Mode the number of images that can be stored is equivalent to the maximum number of the rapid count the current rapid count setting If the imager is in Continuous Capture Mode a number of images equivalent to the maximum number of the rapid count minus 3 Serial Cmd lt K244 image storage type image storage mode Default Disabled Clear Options 0 Disabled Clear 1 Store on No Read Disabled Clear Upon selection of this option all saved images will be cleared and the imager will not store images for later viewing Store on No Read This option will cause the imager to store an image upon exiting the read cycle for retrieval at a later time If multiple captures are present during the duration of a read cycle the stored image will be the last image processed for that read cycle This image is stored in RAM and can be retrieved as long as power is cycled to the imager and as long as the imager has not been reset via a reset save sequence Other commands that can initialize storage in RAM are ones that change capture modes or put the imager in
253. lowing precise timing or no delay at all between captures Also consecutive captures are regarded as the same symbol if the output data is the same Start of Read Cycle No Time Delay Between Captures Diagram A mE ELESE uis read cycle Time Before First Capture t Time Delay Between Captures i End of Diagram B be vu Pry seg eie ee edd read cydo lt Processing MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 5 19 Triggered Capture Usage Useful in applications where each decode must be treated as a discrete event regardless of symbol data Definition The first trigger event starts the read cycle and subsequent triggers will continue until the predetermined Number of Captures is met or until the predetermined End of Read Cycle condition is met whichever occurs first Note If End of Read Cycle is set for New Trigger and the read cycle qualifications have not been met the read cycle will only end once it receives the first trigger after reaching the predetermined Number of Captures setting First trigger starts the read Captures on every trigger Capture cycle J on New Trigger or Timeout as configured Y Y y E Read cycle ends Processing 5 20 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Capture Timing Note Capture Timing applies only to Rapid Capture Mode
254. m the previous transaction Error Condition 1 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data IMAGER_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX LRC HOST_TX Nothing Host should ACK here timeout reached IMAGER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached IMAGER TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached IMAGER TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached IMAGER_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 data is flushed MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual A 23 Communications Protocol Error Condition 2 HOST TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data IMAGER TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX LRC HOST_TX Nothing Host should ACK here timeout reached IMAGER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again HOST_TX NAK Host rejects data frame Retry Event IMAGER_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX LRC Unit sends again HOST_TX ACK Host receives data IMAGER_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 Error Condition 3 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data IMAGER_TX Ox1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX BAD LRC HOST_TX NAK Host rejects bad LRC data Retry Event IMAGER_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX GOOD LRC Unit sends again HOST_TX ACK Host receives data IMAGER_TX RE
255. me Good Read Match Counter Reset Sending lt W gt sets the Match Counter to 00000 Mismatch Counter Sending X displays the number of decoded symbols since the last reset that do not match the master symbol Mismatch Counter Reset Sending Y sets the Mismatch Counter to zero 13 6 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Utilities Device Control Device Control by ESP Dutputs Dutput 1 Pulse Dutput 2 Pulse Dutput 3 Pulse Extras Disable Reader Enable Reader Device Control by Serial Command Output 1 Pulse Sending lt L1 gt activates the link between Output 1 and Output 1 of the host connector regardless of Master Symbol or Output 1 status Output 2 Pulse Sending L2 activates the link between Output 2 and Output 2 of the host connector regardless of Master Symbol or Output 2 status Output 3 Pulse Sending lt L3 gt activates the link between Output 3 and Output 3 of the host connector regardless of Master Symbol or Output 3 status Disable Reader Sending lt I gt will turn the imager OFF end the current read cycle and will not allow the imager to enter another read cycle until turned ON This feature is useful during extended periods of time when no symbols are being decoded or the imager is being configured Disabling the imager will not affect any commands that have already been downloaded Enable Reader Sending lt H gt will turn the imager
256. n A non interlaced scan that doubles the number of visible picture lines per field by displaying all picture lines at once Protocol The rules for communication between devices providing a means to control the orderly flow of information between linked devices RAM See Random Access Memory Random Access Memory RAM A data storage system used in computers composed of integrated circuits that allow access to stored data in any sequence without movement of physical parts Read Cycle A programmed period of time or condition during which a reader will accept symbol input Read Only Memory ROM A data storage medium used in computers and other electronics primarily used to distribute Firmware Real Time Processing In machine vision the ability of a system to perform a complete analysis and take action on one part before the next one arrives for inspection Reader MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual A 39 Glossary of Terms Region Area of an image Also called a region of interest for image processing operations ROM See Read Only Memory Saturation The degree to which a color is free of white One of the three properties of color perception along with hue and value Scattering Redirection of light reflecting off a surface or through an object Skew Rotation of a linear or 2D symbol around an axis parallel to the symbol height on the substrate See the illustrat
257. n Default Right Options 0 Right 1 Left If a symbol enters the field of view from the left it will be skewed as shown in the image below The image is processed from top to bottom meaning that the top of the symbol is captured first The amount of skew is dependent on the speed at which the symbol moves through the imager s field of view The symbol below was captured at a line speed of 40 inches per second Additional Notes on Skew Correction Autocalibration does not perform skew correction It is assumed that during autocalibration the symbol is stationary so skew correction is not required Images are corrected before they are processed Therefore if an image is still pending at the end of the read cycle it will not have been skew corrected 10 30 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Camera and IP Setup Morphological Pre Processing Morphological Pre Processing allows the user to select the method for processing images and to choose the operator size for that method Important This command must be set to Enabled for Morphological Operation to function Serial Cmd lt K550 morphological pre processing gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 10 31 Morphological Operation and Operator Size Morphological Operation and Operator Size Morphological Operation Definition Morphological Operation allows the user to sele
258. n page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 7 7 Read Duration Output Read Duration Output Usage Useful in evaluating actual read cycle timing results especially when initially setting up an application to determine maximum line speed obtainable based on spacing between symbols Definition When enabled the duration of the read cycle in milliseconds is appended to the symbol data The read duration is the time from the beginning of the read cycle until data is output Read Duration Output Mode Serial Cmd lt K706 status separator gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Important To measure the entire read cycle when in External Level trigger mode set When to Output Symbol Data to End of Read Cycle This output can measure over 49 days worth of duration if exceeded the OVERFLOW message will be output in place of the duration Read Duration Output Separator Definition User defined character that separates the symbol information from the Read Duration Output Serial Cmd lt K706 status separator gt Default space character Options Any ASCII character Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt K706h 3C For gt lt K706h 3E gt For lt K706h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of
259. n to the speed of the object is critical If a slow shutter speed is selected to capture fast moving objects blurring or smearing of the image will occur As shutter speed is increased more light and gain become necessary because the pixels exposure time has decreased K544 shutter speed gain gt 60 Standard Density 80 Micro Density 15 to 15 000 Can be used to adjust the brightness of the image Sets the gain value for the image sensor This setting can be configured through calibration which is the recommended method A higher gain value will increase the brightness of the image but the image will be noisier Important Shutter Speed should be adjusted before Gain Each of the image sensor s colors has a separate gain setting and the white balance adjustment provides gain offsets for color channels R red G green and B blue to provide consistent white across the image Adjustments to both the R and B channels are usually required The gain value that is set here is the base gain value for all colors If a color requires additional gain to provide white balance the offset is added to this gain value However when in the analog gain range the gain offset cannot exceed 42 and when in the digital gain range the gain offset cannot exceed 48 For optimal white balance avoid setting gain near these values Note Microscan recommends using only the analog gain range 0 to 42 Image quality is degraded within the digi
260. nabled For example if U S Post is enabled but POSTNET Status is disabled lt K460 1 0 gt POSTNET symbols will not be decoded by the imager See POSTNET Status PLANET Status and GS1 DataBar RSS for more detail about U S Post symbologies Australia Post When Australia Post is enabled lt K460 2 gt the imager will only decode Australia Post symbols Japan Post When Japan Post is enabled lt K460 3 gt the imager will only decode Japan Post symbols Royal Mail When Royal Mail is enabled lt K460 4 gt the imager will only decode Royal Mail symbols KIX When KIX is enabled lt K460 5 gt the imager will only decode KIX symbols UPU When UPU is enabled the imager will decode UPU symbols For example if Postal Symbology Type is set to UPU and POSTNET Status is enabled and lt K460 6 1 gt the imager will attempt to decode both UPU and POSTNET symbols MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 6 31 Postal Symbologies POSTNET Status Usage POSTNET is used by the United States Postal Service to direct mail The ZIP Code or ZIP 4 Code is encoded in the symbol Data is encoded in half height and full height bars making POSTNET a 2 state symbology The delivery point usually the last two digits of the address or post office box number is also typically encoded in POSTNET symbols Definition If U S Post and POSTNET Status are both enabled the imager will decode POSTNET symbols Seria
261. namic Setup Dynamic Setup Dynamic Setup is used to calculate image capture timing during a read cycle Without proper timing the imager will not be able to decode all symbols in a read cycle An external trigger is used to activate image captures so the user can make timing adjustments as capture events occur Video Evaluation Calibration WOI Configuration Database Dynamic Setup 100 Read Rate is represented graphically in real time as the user makes adjustments to the time delay between image captures The user can control Capture Number of Captures and Number of Symbols using these spin boxes 0 Number of Number of Capture Captures Symbols Read Rate 1 6 E 1 Delay Sec Delay Adjustment Ps pte 066464 Q Pose C Fine Decrease Increase y 2 The Delay Adjustment slider allows the user extremely precise control of the time delays between image captures in a read cycle Delay values are shown in seconds in the field above the slider The Coarse and Fine Delay Adjustment options determine whether larger or smaller adjustment increments will be used 10 14 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Camera and IP Setup X Mode The MINI Hawk is equipped with powerful X Mode technology which provides industry leading decode performance on both printed and direct part mark symbols with minimum configuration requi
262. nce Imager User s Manual Symbologies Pharmacode Usage Used mostly with packaging for the pharmaceuticals industry Definition Encodes up to five different numbers each with its own color which may be entered in decimal or binary format with a 1 represented by a thick bar and a 0 represented by a thin bar Bar width is independent of height In decimal format each part can be up to 999 999 In binary format each input can have up to 19 ones and zeros Important When Pharmacode is enabled other linear symbologies will not decode properly Disable Pharmacode before reading other linear symbologies Serial Cmd KA47T status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum number of bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Pharmacode Definition When enabled the imager will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered valid Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum number of bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Pharmacode Definition Specifies the exact number of bars that must be present for the imager to recognize and decode the Pharmacode symbol Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol len
263. nce Imager User s Manual 11 9 Database Mode Database Mode Switch Mode Definition Selects the event that causes the imager to load the next database entry to current active settings When Frame Count Time expires and Image Process Looping is enabled the next database entry with modifications to camera settings will be used Note The image capture event always occurs when the first database entry is used Note The Switch Mode setting has no effect on Rapid Capture Mode which always operates in Number of Image Frames mode with a frame count of 1 Serial Cmd K256 switch mode frame count time image process looping image dimensions Default 1 Options 0 Time 1 Number of Image Frames Time When Switch Mode is set to Time the imager will load the next database entry to current active settings after a predefined time interval The timer will start upon use of a database entry If the timer expires during an image capture event the timer will not start again until that database entry has been incremented and the new database entry has been loaded to current active settings Number of Image Frames When Switch Mode is set to Number of Image Frames the database entry is incremented after the predetermined number of image capture events has occurred Frame Count Time Definition Indicates the Number of Image Frames that must be captured or the amount of Time that must transpire before the imager will load the nex
264. ne or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default Eight Options 0 Seven 1 Eight Note See USB HID Interface on page 3 23 for protocol information relating to USB 3 4 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Communications Host Port Protocol Usage In general the point to point protocols will work well in most applications They require no address and must use RS 232 or RS 422 communications standards Definition Protocols define the sequence and format in which information is transferred between the reader and the host or in the case of Multidrop between the readers and a concentrator Serial Cmd K140 protocol address Default Point to Point Options 0 Point to Point 1 Point to Point with RTS CTS 2 Point to Point with XON XOFF 3 Point to Point with RTS CTS and XON XOFF 4 ACK NAK 5 Polling Mode Note In all protocol modes the preamble lt K141 gt and postamble lt K142 gt character strings can be used to frame the decode data and both are included in calculating the LRC Longitudinal Redundancy Check Point to Point Standard Usage Used only with RS 232 or RS 422 Definition Standard Point to Point requires no address and sends the data to the host whenever it is available without a request or handshake from the host Serial Cmd lt K140 0 gt Point to Point with RTS
265. nect the power supply 4 to the IB 131 3 Apply power to the imager Important If you are using a USB model you must connect the device to the host computer before powering on Otherwise the unit will not be recognized as a USB device Scanner 6 o d O SOH Network 3 4 5 b d J N Hardware Configuration Caution Be sure that all cables are connected BEFORE applying power to the system Always power down BEFORE disconnecting any cables MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 1 3 Position Imager and Symbol Step 3 Position Imager and Symbol Position the imager at a focal distance between 2 and 6 inches from the symbol Tip the imager relative to the symbol to avoid the glare of direct specular reflection The case parting line should be perpendicular to the plane of the symbol by either pitching the symbol or the imager as shown Position the imager in a place with as little ambient light as possible Symbols can be rotated tilted at any angle however for best results symbols should be aligned with the FOV field of view Parting Line C 3 Stand t Focal distance Imager and Symbol Orientation In the case of linear symbols aligning the bars in the direction of their movement ladder orientation will minimize the chances of blurring and will produce better reads Important Avo
266. nimum slowest shutter setting will not exceed the frame read out time of the current image dimension For example a full size image has a minimum frame read out time of 15 ms Therefore the slowest shutter that can be achieved is 15 ms or 1 67 AGC AGC enables Automatic Gain Control In this mode the optimal setting for gain is computed and updated for every frame It may take several frames to adjust the gain value to the correct setting The current camera gain parameter is updated at the end of the read cycle see Camera Settings AEC AGC AEC AGC enables both Automatic Exposure Control and Automatic Gain Control In this mode the optimal settings for exposure shutter and gain are computed and updated for every frame It may take several frames to adjust the shutter and gain values to the correct settings Important In this mode only the Automatic Exposure Control AEC is active while the gain value remains fixed at its minimum setting The Automatic Gain Control AGC only becomes active if the AEC has driven the shutter value to its minimum slowest setting and the desired image brightness has still not been obtained When this occurs the shutter value will remain fixed while gain is adjusted The current camera shutter and camera gain parameters are then updated at the end of the read cycle see Camera Settings AEC AGC Brightness Note AEC AGC Brightness is only applicable to the High Speed version of the MINI Hawk Defi
267. nition AEC AGC Brightness allows the desired image luminance to be adjusted within the range of 1 darkest to 56 brightest Usage lt K542 pixel sub sampling AEC AGC mode AEC AGC brightness gt Default 30 Options 1 to 56 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 10 17 Camera Settings Camera Settings Camera Settings are typically obtained during the calibration process and do not necessarily need to be modified directly by the user Optics The MINI Hawk has three different optical configurations available Standard Density High Density and Ultra High Density Determine the optics of your imager and find the corresponding camera values in the following sections Standard Density High Density and Ultra High Density Optics Shutter Speed Usage Faster shutter speeds reduce blurring in faster applications Slower shutter speeds are useful in slower applications and lower contrast applications Definition This value sets the exposure or integration time for the image sensor pixels The shutter speed setting in relation to the speed of the object is critical If a slow shutter speed is selected to capture fast moving objects blurring or smearing of the image will occur As shutter speed is increased more light and gain become necessary because the pixels exposure time has decreased Serial Cmd K544 shutter speed gain Default 250 SD 30 HD 300 UHD Options 15 to 12 500 Gain Usage Can be used
268. nnnnes 8 13 Microscan Symbol Quality Output by ESP sssssssseeee eene emm eene enne nene 8 16 This section describes parameters that when enabled will output detailed symbol quality evaluations MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 8 1 Symbol Quality by ESP Symbol Quality by ESP 7 Parameters ESP Values j Symbol Quality Ba Ciim Global 4 To open nested options single click the Click the Parameters Data Matrix button and then the ISO IEC 16022 Parameters Symbol Quality tab Symbol Contrast Disabled Print Growth Disabled Axial Non uniformity Disabled Unused ECC Disabled Grading Percent Cell Damage Disabled Capture Time Disabled Locate Time Disabled Decode Time Disabled Pixels Per Element Disabled ECC Level Disabled Matrix Size Disabled Quiet Zone Disabled Disabled m Enabled To change a setting double click the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options 8 2 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Symbol Quality Symbol Quality Serial Commands Symbol Quality Separator Data Matrix Output Mode K708 symbol quality separator data matrix output mode ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output K709 symbol contrast print growth axial non uniformity unused ECC Microscan Symbol Quality Output K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element
269. o Imager STX command ETX LRC Response from Imager ACK NAK Sent when LRC ETX or command ending angle bracket gt are received depending on what is enabled Command Response from Imager to Host TX to host STX preamble COMMAND RESPONSE DATA postamble ETX LRC Response from host ACK NAK Sent when LRC ETX postamble command ending angle bracket gt or timeout waiting for more data are detected depending on what is enabled As with Polling Mode lt K140 5 gt the imager can optionally perform the REQ and RES event sequences in ACK NAK mode If the sender does not receive an ACK or NAK it will send REQ to request such a response if enabled When the sender receives an ACK too many NAKs or times out if already enabled it will send a RES if enabled to terminate the transaction Note See ACK NAK Data Flow Examples in Appendix D for sample ACK NAK communication scenarios Note See USB HID Interface on page 3 23 for protocol information relating to USB MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 3 7 Polling Mode Options Polling Mode Options Definition These parameters only take effect for Polling Mode K140 5 on the main RS 232 or RS 422 ports not on the Auxiliary Port and are completely independent of the ACK NAK Options lt K147 gt The values of protocol characters can be changed but the protocol events cannot be disabled The polling mode address is configured in the
270. ocated in the right half of the highlighted area 11 12 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Configuration Database Region of Interest ROI When Image Dimensions is set to Region of Interest the database image dimension parameters are P and decode settings and they determine the region or area of the captured image to be processed ROI coordinate data is based on the full image size The WOI of the captured image will be configured to cover all the ROI settings in the current active database entry In the following example there are three active database settings each with a different ROI configuration Their coordinates are based at point 0 0 of the full scale image In this example DB1 and DB3 determine the size of the captured image WOI while DB2 has no impact The image WOI is not configurable It is automatically set up by the database according to the ROI settings row pointer j x column pointer column size Camera WOI Full Image Size High Resolution Imager 1280 x 1024 High Speed Imager 752 x 480 3 Megapixel Imager 2048 x 1536 Note Since the ROI parameters are not a camera setting a change in ROI parameters from one index to another does not indicate an image capture event This feature is intended to be used in conjunction with Image Process Looping to allow different regions of a captured image to be processed using different IP and decode settings
271. ogram each of the EZ button s 4 positions from a selection of 8 modes Serial Cmd lt K771 position 1 mode position 2 mode position 3 mode position 4 mode Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Single Beep Two Beeps Three Beeps Four Beeps 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Read Rate 1 Read Rate 1 Read Rate 1 Read Rate 2 Calibrate 2 Calibrate 2 Calibrate 2 Calibrate 3 Save for Power On 3 Save for Power On 3 Save for Power On 3 Save for Power On 4 Unused 4 Unused 4 Unused 4 Unused 5 Load New Master 5 Load New Master 5 Load New Master 5 Load New Master 6 Unused 6 Unused 6 Unused 6 Unused 7 Target System 7 Target System 7 Target System 7 Target System 8 Unused 8 Unused 8 Unused 8 Unused 9 Bar Code Config 9 Bar Code Config 9 Bar Code Config 9 Bar Code Config Disabled When set to disabled the associated button position will have no function associated with it and the position will be skipped over Read Rate Read Rate will be initiated when the associated button position is selected Read Rate will perform decodes second and is the same as sending a lt C gt from the terminal To exit Read Rate Mode quickly press and release the EZ button Calibrate Calibration will be initiated when the associated button position is selected To abort calibration quickly press and release the EZ button Save for Power On All imager settings will be saved
272. ol Type Don t Calibrate Processing High a SE Send configuration settings K7 14h 5a5a5a5a gt Message 4227 tothe imager without pure K715h 5abababa Bad Symbol Message ZZZZ by clicking Send to Reader lt K716h 5a5a5a5a gt No Symbol Message 227 i S Send and Save Send to Reader 4 Click Save As to save the Send configuration settings to the report as plain text or a imager and save in ESP by clicking tab delimited text file Send and Save To create a symbol containing any of the command settings in the table click Generate Barcode This will bring up the Bar Code Dialog To save the Differences from Default report either as plain text or as a tab delimited text file click Save As Click Send and Save to send the settings to the imager and save them or Send to Reader to send the settings without saving them Important The use the Differences from Default feature you must connect to the imager and Receive Reader Settings via the Send Recv button on the toolbar 13 8 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Utilities Master Database Important The Master Database is used for all Matchcode modes except Sequential and Wild Card both of which use Master Database Index 1 Master Database Overview Usage Used where more than one master symbol is required as in a Multisymbol setup for matching and other Matchcode operations Definition Allows the user to define
273. ologies EAN 128 Status Code 128 EAN 128 Definition When this field is disabled the imager will not check any Code 128 labels for conformance to EAN requirements or perform any special formatting When enabled the imager can read symbols with or without a function 1 character in the first position If a symbol has a function 1 character in the first position it must conform to EAN format Symbols that conform to EAN format will also be subject to the special output formatting options available in this command Note Code 128 status must be enabled for EAN status to be active If EAN status is required the imager will only decode symbols that have a function 1 character in the first position and that conform to EAN format All symbols read will be subject to the special output formatting options available in this command Note Code 128 status must be enabled for EAN status to be active Serial Cmd K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Required Output Format Code 128 EAN 128 Definition In Standard the imager will not apply special EAN output formatting options In Application the imager will apply the special EAN output formatting options to decoded EAN conforming symbols Serial Cmd
274. on Conforms to ISO IEC 16022 symbol quality grading A B C D Serial Cmd lt K800 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold Default Grade C Options 0 Grade A 1 Grade B 2 Grade C 3 Grade D Axial Non Uniformity Threshold Usage Lets the user set the acceptable level of symbol quality Definition Conforms to ISO IEC 16022 symbol quality grading A B C D Serial Cmd lt K800 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold Default Grade C Options 0 Grade A 1 Grade B 2 Grade C 3 Grade D Unused Error Correction Threshold Usage Lets the user set the acceptable level of symbol quality Definition Conforms to ISO IEC 16022 symbol quality grading A B C D Serial Cmd lt K800 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold Default Grade C Options 0 Grade A 1 Grade B 2 Grade C 3 Grade D MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 7 29 Diagnostics Output 1 Diagnostics Output 1 Note Output On under Output 1 Parameters must be set to Diagnostic W
275. on No Read 004 004 005 005 No Read 006 sequenced on No Read 006 No Read 007 sequenced on No Read 007 007 008 As an example of Sequence on No Read Disabled consider the following series of decodes Master Symbol Decoded Symbol Master Symbol after Decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 No Read 003 not sequenced 003 003 004 004 No Read 004 not sequenced 004 No Read 004 not sequenced 004 004 005 9 8 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Matchcode Sequence on Mismatch Note Matchcode must be set to Sequential for this command to function Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Enable this parameter if every trigger event should have a decode and more than one consecutive mismatch may occur Disable this parameter if every trigger event should have a decode but no more than one consecutive mismatch may occur When set to Enabled the master symbol sequences on every decode match or mismatch When set to Disabled the master symbol will not sequence whenever consecutive mismatches occur K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled The imager will sequence the master to one more or one less than the decoded symbol As an example of Sequence on Mismatch Enabled consider the following decodes Mast
276. oo many photons are being produced to be received by a pixel The pixel overflows and causes the photons to go to adjacent pixels Blooming is similar to overexposure in film photography except that in digital imaging the result is a number of vertical and or horizontal streaks appearing from the light source in the picture Baud Rate The number of discrete signal events per second bits per second Capture The act of acquiring and storing video images in an imager or host computer Also the image captured CCD See Charge Coupled Device MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual A 35 Glossary of Terms Charge Coupled Device CCD A semiconductor device with an array of light sensitive elements that converts light images into electrical signals Check Character A Modulus 43 or Modulus 10 character that is added to encoded symbol data for additional data integrity CMOS See Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor CMOS Like CCDs CMOS imagers include an array of photo sensitive diodes one diode within each pixel Unlike CCDs however each pixel in a CMOS imager has its own individual amplifier integrated inside Connector A plug or socket on a device or cable providing in out connectivity for various circuits and pins Concentrator Intermediary device that relays data from imagers to a host and commands from the host to the imagers or other devices
277. ormance Imager User s Manual EN 5 Read Cycle Contents Read Cycle by ESP Hame a eter rte Re eee evens de e ED d ee od e eode deua 5 2 Read Cycle Serial Commands sse esee nennen tenen entente nnne 5 3 Read Cycle Setup nn ees n te ioc cuneta De o abt c Ee Od oM RAE ARE CUR anal 5 4 T Eure E 5 5 Trigger Mode and Filter Duration rennen enne n nennen nennen 5 6 External Trigger Polarity 5 2 sei o e dle ee stet e dti 5 11 Serial Trigger Start Trigger Character Non Delimited sssssssssssssseneeen nee 5 13 Stop Trigger Character Non Delimited ssssssssssssss eene enne 5 14 End of Read Cycle ox uem ie ee ised beg ie gales dutelte lese miis dene 5 15 Capture Mode e e eee Lea ERU UAR a Dee 5 17 Capture Timing oe Ede ite Leto E a Ss eS SE 5 21 Image Processing Timeout sessssssssssssssesseeeee etin nenen et en entrate nete n nennen enters nnne 5 23 Image Storage tees tiet bes oU Op i ae edu e Ute dte s c ten oed 5 24 Minimum Good Reads a a etes 5 26 Setting Up the Imager for EZ Trax ccccccccccceceeceeeececneceeeeeeceeeeeesesaeceeeeseeeaeseeseseeaeeeesenenaeeeeeeeea 5 28 After you ve established communications and completed basic read rate testing you will need to address the spatial and timing parameters associated with your application This section explains those parameters MINI Hawk Hig
278. osition to allow easy switching between these primary modes Communication Read Cycle Symbologies I O Parameters Symbol Quality Matchcode Diagnostics Video Evaluation Calibration Window of Interest Configuration Database Ordered Output Output Format Dynamic Setup Return to EZ Mode ESP ESP Untitled File Model Options Connect View Help u 9 EZMode Autoconnect Send Recv Switch Model Parameters Setup Terminal Utilities Device Control Communication Read Cycle Symbologies 1 0 Symbol Quality Matchcode Diagnostics lt a Differences Parameters ESP Values Communications R5232 422 Host Port Host Port Connections Baud Rate 115 2K Parity Mone Stop Bits One Data Bits Eight Host Protocol Point to Point Host 422 Status Disabled R5232 Auxiliary Port Aux Port Connections Baud Rate 115 2K Parity None Stop Bits One Data Bits Eight Aux Port Settings Mode Disabled Daisy Chain ID Status Disabled Daisy Chain ID 1 USB HID Report Status Preamble Disabled Postamble Enabled Response Timeout 12 LRC Status Disabled Aux Port System Data Status Disabled For Help press F1 Yy gi lt Open the Terminal view DER Read Rate Counters Master Database Firmware Click on tabs in this row to access configuration trees like the one shown here Click Capture and Decode to read the symbol in the field of view and
279. out reached timeout reached Timeout Reached transaction aborted data is flushed MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual A 17 Communications Protocol Setup 2 RES 0x00 disabled REQ 0x00 disabled STX 0x00 disabled ETX 0x00 disabled ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC enabled Transfer 1 HOST TX lt K141 0 gt a IMAGER_TX ACK Transfer 2 HOST_TX lt K141 gt B IMAGER_TX ACK IMAGER_TX lt K141 0 gt a HOST_TX ACK Error Condition Transfer 1 HOST_TX lt k141 0 gt x BAD LRC IMAGER_TX NAK HOST_TX lt K141 0 gt a GOOD LRC IMAGER_TX ACK A 18 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Setup 3 RES 0x00 disabled REQ 0x00 disabled STX 0x28 ETX 0x29 y ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC enabled Transfer 1 HOST TX lt K141 0 gt H IMAGER_TX ACK Transfer 2 HOST_TX lt K1412 gt k IMAGER_TX ACK IMAGER_TX lt K141 4M gt w HOST_TX ACK MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Appendices A 19 Communications Protocol Setup 4 RES 0x21 REQ Ox3D STX 0x28 ETX 0x29 y ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC enabled Transfer 1 HOST TX lt K141 0 gt H IMAGER_TX ACK Transfer 2 HOST_TX lt K100 gt n IMAGER_TX ACK HOST_TX if IMAGER_TX lt K100 8 0 0 1 gt X HOST_TX ACK IMAGER_TX i Error Condition Transfer 1 HOST TX lt K141 0 gt H IMAGER_TX ACK HOST_TX lt K100 gt n IMAGER_TX
280. ow you to concatenate configuration profiles and to perform more complex operations than would be possible with only one set of configuration parameters Definition Determines the specific database index that will be used Serial Cmd K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column width narrow margins background color symbology gt Options 1 to 10 Shutter Speed Serial Cmd lt K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column width narrow margins background color symbology gt Default 250 Options 15 to 12 500 3 Megapixel MINI Hawk 15 to 15 000 Gain Serial Cmd lt K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column width narrow margins background color symbology gt Default 20 Options 0 to 33 3 Megapixel MINI Hawk 0 to 48 Focal Distance Serial Cmd Default Options 11 4 lt K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel sub sampling row pointer column pointer row depth column width narrow margins background color symbology gt 400 4 200 to 600 3 Megapixel MINI Hawk Micro Density 200 to 500 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Configuration Database Pixel Sub Sampling Serial Cmd K255 index shutter speed gain focal distance pixel sub sampling row pointer column pointer row
281. p to 4000 feet 1219m in length Like RS 232 RS 422 communication is designed for only two devices on a single line and must have a common ground It can be used wherever RS 232 is used USB The Universal Serial Bus can connect up to 127 devices to a host at a maximum of 6 megabytes per second Mbps of bandwidth A 26 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Appendices Appendix G Operational Tips Cleaning The MINI Hawk has a hard coated window that should only be cleaned with alcohol 100 isopropyl Mounting When mounting the MINI Hawk do not insulate the stand mount The bottom panel is the hottest part of the imager and metal to metal contact is necessary for heat dissipation MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual A 27 Using an External Trigger Appendix H Using an External Trigger Two types of inputs are used on Microscan readers 5 volt devices have NPN trigger inputs 10 28 volt devices have optoisolated inputs and outputs 5 Volt Devices To trigger a 5 volt device the input has to be pulled down to signal ground NPN This can be done by relays or by a transistor sourced signal If a 5 volt device is used in combination with an IC 332 it must be connected as a 10 28 volt device Reader Sensor Reader Sensor 10 28 Volt Devices To trigger a 10 28 volt device a small amount of current needs to flow from Trigger to Trigger If a PNP source is used T
282. plications in combination with Matchcode when there is a need to verify that the right product is being placed in the right packaging UPC Universal Product Code is a fixed length numeric continuous symbology UPC can have two or five digit supplemental bar code data following the normal code The UPC Version A UPC A symbol is used to encode a 12 digit number The first digit is the number system character the next five are the manufacturer number the next five are the product number and the last digit is the checksum character When enabled the imager will read UPC Version A and UPC Version E only lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A Enabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EAN Status Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options EAN is the European version of the UPC symbology and is used in European market applications Note UPC must be enabled for EAN to take effect EAN is a subset of UPC When enabled the imager will read UPC Version A UPC Version E EAN 13 and EAN 8 It also appends a leading zero to UPC Version A symbol information and transmits 13 digits If transmitting 13 digits when reading UPC Version A symbols is not desired disable EAN Note The extra character identifies the country of origin lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental t
283. products introduced in 2014 are expected to be WEEE and RoHS2 compliant Microscan will mark the products with the CE marking that complies with the RoHS2 process to acquire CE certification per the example given Example 1 gt gt Machinery directive EMC directive RoHS2 Declaration of Conformity MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual xi Statement of RoHS Compliance xii MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual EE 7 Quick Start Contents Step 1 Check Hardware sesssssssssssssseeeee nennen nennen anann arineko torrea nsa ga sinas isse ses ern a na 1 2 Step 2 Connect the System iiiar iaeiiai dene ede denen enean la redde 1 3 Step 3 Position Imager and Symbol ssssssssssssssssssssssese eee ener enne nennen 1 4 NlcepAan3coccLc 1 5 Step 5 Select Models enisi iieiaei air cete ce dee ede dete cda cedendo redeo iniiai di 1 6 Step 6 Select Protocol and Connect sss eese eene eene nnns nnns nennen 1 7 Step 7 Locate the Symbol in the Field of View ssssssssssssseeeneeeen eene nnne 1 9 Step 8 Calibrate 1 eene eere idede ciet rece cve seeded Ya eden ede d eese Pese td ec de e ee odia eodd 1 11 Step 9 Test Read Rate i side indeceduereesecec de tedio Inde de e eieiei ridode areor i ee idc 1 12 Step 10 Configure the Imager in ESP sssssssssssss
284. ptions 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Quick Focus Disabled When this feature is disabled the focus position is fixed and is not part of the calibration process Enabled Search Method When this feature is enabled the focus position will be calibrated to provide the best possible image quality and performance This method is essentially a search method that attempts to identify the desired focus using a search algorithm that cycles through focus settings to try and locate the desired focus as quickly as possible This is accomplished when the given symbol in the field of view is decoded Once a focus distance that will decode the given symbol has been located the search algorithm will fine tune the search to locate the inside and outside focal distances The final focus distance will be between the inside and outside values Note This method can be time consuming if the focus is not found on the first pass Quick Focus Quick Focus is designed to quickly locate the focus setting for an object in the field of view This is accomplished with minimal processing of the image by analyzing a histogram of the image frame Before performing the focus calibration a value for shutter speed and gain is determined and then the calibration process will step through the focus range of the system capturing the required number of image frames for each focal position A histogram is performed on each image frame and the histogram
285. put on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold gt ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 2 lt K801 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold gt ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 3 K802 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold Configurable Output 1 K810 output on output state pulse width output mode Configurable Output 2 lt K811 output on output state pulse width output mode Configurable Output 3 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual K812 output on output state pulse width output mode 7 3 Symbol Data Output Symbol Data Output Symbol Data Output Status Note Symbol Data Output relates to data and should not be confused with Outputs 1 2 and 3 listed in the Output Parameters which describe output states and functions Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Disabled Usage Definition Match Usage Definition Mismatch Usage Definition 7 4 Useful when the host needs symbol data only under certain conditions Defines the conditions under which decod
286. r _ Advanced Options Capture ty lt lt WOl ROI SAS 247 SL Processing Settings Ss Wy f e LIP PLE Ss Current 1000 20 4 00 Disable 0 fo aen 752 L Enable white ECC 200 i UNMUNHLCNN EH 2 LEN ET EE Ea 7 ENIM CONI Rt IN ENIM CG el IN ENNICN NETS NN CNN DUDEN Enable white Disabled Test 1000 20 400 Disable 0 480 752 Enable White Disabled Test foo 20 400 Disable fO 3 4 5 amp fio n 400 Disable 0 480 752 8 480 752 E o o o o Enable White Disabled Test 1000 20 400 Disable 0 480 752 Enable White Disabled Test 10 oon on 400 Disable 0 o 480 752 Enable White Disabled Test c c c c c c Calibrate _ Receive Settings Send Settings Load Current To Index v Capture for Every Index Show Database Index in Output Sort Index Positions on Good Reads q Load Index To Current Sort Index Positions on Good Reads moves the database entry that produces the first successful decode to the top of the list MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 11 3 Configuration Database Status Configuration Database Status Index Usage Useful for applications that require several different complex imager configurations to be applied sequentially Multiple database indexes all
287. r 1 data is flushed MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual A 21 Communications Protocol Error Condition 2 HOST TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data IMAGER TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX HOST_TX Nothing Host should ACK here timeout reached IMAGER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again HOST_TX NAK Host rejects data frame Retry Event IMAGER_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX Unit sends again HOST_TX ACK Host receives data IMAGER_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 The protocol makes 3 retry attempts before data is flushed and transfer is aborted A 22 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Appendices Setup 2 Address 0x01 translates to Poll Req Ox1C Unit Select Ox1D RES 0x04 REQ 0x05 STX 0x02 ETX 0x03 ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC enabled Transfer 1 HOST TX RES 0x1D REQ Select Unit 1 to receive data IMAGER TX Ox1D ACK Unit responds with its address HOST TX STX T ETX LRC IMAGER_TX Ox1D ACK Unit responds with its address HOST TX RES Terminate Transfer 2 Transfer 2 HOST TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data IMAGER TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX LRC IMAGER_TX ACK HOST_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 Starting with a RES ensures a clean transaction without leftovers fro
288. r Entry Modifier Commands that require ASCII text fields such as Preamble and Postamble commands can be sent to the imager as hex pairs see Appendix E ASCII Table for conversions Serial Cmd Format lt Knnnh 00 FF gt To enter ASCII fields as hex values 00 to FF add a lower case h directly after the command s K number and then enter the hex value that corresponds with the desired ASCII character Example Consider the Postamble command Serial Cmd lt K142 status postamble character s gt Imagine that your application requires the ASCII character gt to be the postamble in your symbol decode output The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs So to make gt the postamble in your symbol decode output enter the Postamble command as follows K142h 3E Note that the status field contains only a This is because the only field that is being changed is the postamble character s field See Serial Configuration Command Conventions on page A 14 for a more detailed explanation of this command shortcut 3 32 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Communications Preamble Preamble Status Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Useful for identifying and controlling incoming data For example defining the preamble as a carriage return and a line feed causes each decoded message to be displayed on its own line Defines a one to four character d
289. r a daisy chain and decoded data is relayed from one reader to another until the data reaches the host A primary reader has its host port linked to the host computer and its auxiliary port linked to the host port of the first secondary reader in the chain Thereafter each secondary reader s auxiliary port is linked to the host port of the secondary reader that is farther from the host in the daisy chain Each reader in the chain can be assigned an ID that accompanies any data that it sends Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d Options 4 Daisy Chain Function Before the primary reader times out it checks its auxiliary port for data It should be set to wait at least 30 ms for each secondary reader in the daisy chain If no data is received within the read cycle timeout the primary reader sends a No Read message to the host Otherwise the complete data is sent If for example the primary reader is set to timeout in 120 ms the first secondary reader reader downstream might be set to 90 ms the next to 30 ms and so forth thus assuring that at least 30 ms elapses between transmissions Daisy chained readers can send a series of symbols by enabling Multisymbol and a common multisymbol separator If the primary reader does not receive the expected number of symbols No Read messages are appended to the data string to make up the difference between the number of
290. r new trigger Start of read cycle End of read cycle Read cycle duration Host This is when host activates trigger expects output MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual I O Parameters No Read Message Usage Used in applications where the host needs serial verification that a symbol has not been read and especially useful in new print verification Definition When enabled and if no symbol has been decoded before timeout or the end of the read cycle the No Read message will be transmitted to the host No Read Message Mode Serial Cmd lt K714 No Read message status No Read message Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Disabled Only symbol data is output after a read cycle Enabled When the imager is in a triggered mode a No Read message will be appended for each failed read attempt No Read Message Definition Any combination of ASCII characters can be defined as the No Read message Serial Cmd lt K714 No Read message status No Read message Default NOREAD Options A string of up to 64 characters Note No Read Message will only be transmitted if Symbol Data Output is set to Match Mismatch or Good Read No Read Message can be set to any ASCII character Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt K714h 3C For gt lt K714h 3E gt For lt K714h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier o
291. r of bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value Forward 0 Forward 1 Reverse Fixed Threshold Value Pharmacode Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 6 28 Used when Bar Width Status is set to Fixed Threshold Defines the minimum difference in pixels that will distinguish a narrow bar from a wide bar lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum number of bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value 10 1 to 65535 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Symbologies Postal Symbologies Important Postal Symbologies must have a minimum pixels per element value of 4 to be decoded reliably by the MINI Hawk The imager must be configured to specific read range field of view and camera parameters before decoding Postal Symbologies For optimal decode results with a Standard Density SD imager Set Focal Distance to 6 and set gain and shutter settings for a high contrast image Position the imager 3 5 to 6 from the symbol 5 10 if Pixel Sub Sampling is disabled Position the symbol as close to the center of the imager s field of view as possible Note Measurements based on a 16 mil 60 dpi POSTNET symbol ESP ESP Untitled File Model Options Connect Help m v 9 AppMode Autoconnect Switch Model Position the postal symbol in the center of the ner a 1 First position the imager at the desired imager s field of L
292. r white background first and if there is no decode will then attempt to decode for black background MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 6 41 Background Color 6 42 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual EBENE O Parameters Contents I O Parameters by ESPERE to EUER SER BER ERE RESP EL aE HRS PE NERO 7 2 VO Parameters Serial Commands sse enne nere enne 7 3 Symbol Data Output e e ctr eat tnr rU ERE RC RR RU RD ER rne ERE ER ee Ee eges 7 4 No Read RVI oTe 0 e e E A E 7 7 Read Duration Output EE EEEE ETE E ER cab utes ERE ERE ERR cabnceg cgdedenteedcuadsacteveense 7 8 Output Indicators eee atr edere taste ehe RUE te REPRE RERO RE REDE e Ut ege ERR 7 9 D Mu EE 7 13 LED Configuration E E 7 14 NIEVE 7 15 AU ME 7 17 EZ Button Modes 55 1 reor a neds eee ed cece dI eee cerned cede antecedents edi ne eR Reed e eid 7 19 Configurable Output 1 etit dee erre earn e Ere de Mav oed eie eec cie edoide aiai 7 21 Trend Analysis Output 1 1 noie cese eere ionic cedri reca eene tn aene dde genet gis 7 24 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 1 ssssssssseeeeeneneennen nennen 7 27 Diagnostic Output 1 eines sie dpt ne Secon odes Set es ecee de ree e cae eai i 7 30 Configurable Output 2 aa eene ede deter tae ce e Ec e Eee Xe Ee Dee die ether ptg 7 31 Trend Analysis Output 2 2 leitete trente Shoes bred Eiaa diaii este ade Exec nee etnies 7 3
293. ra high speed arithmetic processing Often imbedded in a vision engine Discrete I O Inputs and outputs characterized by discrete signal transitions from one voltage level to another so that digital switching can occur Direct Memory Access DMA A capability provided by some computer bus architectures that allows data to be sent directly to memory from an attached device DMA See Direct Memory Access DSP See Digital Signal Processor Dynamic Range The difference between the minimum and maximum thresholds of discernible images the amount of usable signal A 36 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Appendices Edge Enhancement Image processing method to strengthen high spatial frequencies in the image EPROM See Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Embedded Memory Onboard memory device such as EPROM or flash End of Read Cycle The time or condition at which the imager stops expecting symbol information to decode Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory EPROM A memory chip that retains data when its power supply is turned off non volatile memory External Edge Allows a read cycle to be initiated by a trigger signal from an object detector when it detects the appearance of an object rising edge The read cycle ends with a good read a timeout or a new trigger External Level Allows a read cycle to be initiated by a trigger signal from an object detector The
294. rameters Output On Trend Analysis Serial Cmd lt K781 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on gt ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 2 Note Output On under Output 2 Parameters must be set to Symbol Quality for this output to function Output 2 Parameters Output On Symbol Quality Serial Cmd lt K801 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold Diagnostics Output 2 Note Output On under Output 2 Parameters must be set to Diagnostic Warning for this output to function Output 2 Parameters Output On Diagnostic Warning Serial Cmd lt K791 unused 1 service unit MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 7 31 Configurable Output 3 Configurable Output 3 Note Output 3 has the same parameters and default settings as Output 1 and Output 2 Output 3 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Noread Output State Megative Pulse Width 5 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Symbol Quality ISO IEC 16022 Diagnostics Serial Cmd K812 output on output state pulse width output mode Trend Analysis Output 3 Note Output On under Output 3 Parameters must be set to Trend Analysis for this output to function Output 3 Parameters Output On Trend Analysis Serial Cmd lt K782 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation perio
295. read cycle ends when the object moves out of the detector s range Falling Edge A change of state to inactive associated with a level trigger Field Programmable Gate Array FPGA A semiconductor device containing programmable interconnects and logic components Fill Factor Percentage of pixel area used for light collection Firmware Software hard coded in non volatile memory ROM and closely tied to specific pieces of hardware Fixed Symbol Length Increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Focal Distance In camera based vision the distance from the front of the camera to the object being viewed In optics the distance from the lens to the focal plane Focal Plane Usually found at the image sensor it is a plane perpendicular to the lens axis at the point of focus Focus Any given point in an image at which light converges the focal point FPGA See Field Programmable Gate Array Frame The total area captured in an image sensor while the video signal is not blanked Frame Grabber A device that interfaces with a camera and on command samples the video converts the sample to a digital value and stores that in a computer s memory Front End System The object illumination optics and imager blocks of a vision system Includes all components useful to acquire a good image for subsequent processing Full Duplex A communications syst
296. red out of the box The X Mode algorithm identifies symbol candidates within the imager s field of view and uses sophisticated image processing to decode valid symbols In each of the examples below the X Mode technique locates a symbol analyzes the image gradient to detect areas with changes in reflectivity grid maps the image and ultimately produces an ideal reliably decodable Data Matrix Dot Peen on Curved Surface Comparison of direct part mark and Data Matrix after processing Comparison of direct part mark and Data Matrix after processing k lt a Laser Etch Comparison of direct part mark and Data Matrix after processing 5 NE Ink Jet Comparison of direct part mark and Data Matrix after processing MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 10 15 Pixel Sub Sampling Pixel Sub Sampling Definition Pixel Sub Sampling shows an entire captured image by averaging signals from adjacent pixels Usage lt K542 pixel sub sampling AEC AGC mode AEC AGC brightness Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1241 2 16 1 4 1 At 4 1 4 pixel signals from 2 adjacent rows and columns are combined so that only 1 pixel is output for every 4 pixels sampled An image with the dimensions 640 x 480 is scaled to 320 x 240 Since the resolution of the output image is reduced the frame rate will increase but not by the factor of the image reduction This is due to the overhead time of dig
297. refer to the Help menu in EZ Trax software or the EZ Trax Quick Start Guide available on the Microscan Tools CD MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 5 27 Setting Up the Imager for EZ Trax 5 28 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual EN 6 Symbologies Contents SymMNOlOgJIES DY ESP erem 6 2 Symbologies Serial Commands sse nennen ne enne enne 6 3 Data Matrix AEE E E 6 4 ivao COC E TTL 6 6 UR COG A 6 7 Micro QR COS iet ERE 6 8 COAG iB EE E A A S 6 9 Code 128 EAN 128 EEEE 6 12 BC442 oen EUM IM IL I IE EE 6 15 Interleaved 2 of 5 ccceeccceeeeeeceeeeee cee eeaeeeeeeeeaeceeeesaaaeceeeesaaaeaeeeeseaaeaeeeesagaeaeseseqeeaeeeeeseneaeeeeeeeaes 6 16 ooo PEE 6 19 COC ADAM sd E T E 6 20 Uses 6 23 Pharmac lt RARE 6 27 Postal SYMbOIOGIGS e 6 29 GS1 DataBar RSS p 6 34 us up 6 36 MIGROPD F447 scctececssessd P 6 37 Ss 6 38 Narrow Margins Symbology Identifier sssseeenne enne em 6 39 Background Colts M 6 41 This section describes the various symbol types that can be read and decoded by the MINI Hawk See the followin
298. results for each focus position are averaged When this process is completed the data is analyzed and the optimal focus position is determined Note Quick Focus may not work well for all applications It is not recommended for applications that use very small symbols MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 4 5 Calibration Options Symbol Type Serial Cmd K529 gain shutter speed focus position symbol type WOI framing WO margin line scan height processing gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Disabled When this feature is disabled only the currently enabled symbologies will be considered during the calibration process Enabled When this feature is enabled autodiscrimination will be in effect during the calibration process All symbologies that are readable by the imager except PDF417 and Pharmacode will be considered during calibration Any new symbologies successfully decoded during calibration will remain enabled at the end of the process All enabled symbologies will remain enabled For example assume that only Code 39 is enabled at the beginning of calibration If a Code 128 symbol is read during calibration then Code 128 as well as Code 39 will be enabled after the calibration process is complete 4 6 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Calibration Window of Interest WOI Framing Definition If a WOI framing mode is enabled it will set the camera WOI to a full
299. rformance Imager User s Manual 7 1 I O Parameters by ESP I O Parameters by ESP 3 Parameters Click the Parameters button and then the I O tab Parameters ESP Values I O Parameters Symbol Data Output Good Read Noread Message Enabled Bad No Symbol Qualification Read Duration Output Disabled Output Object Info Disabled Output Indicators Serial Verification Image Output Disabled EZ Trax Output Disabled EE e Calibration Options Database Identifier Output To change a setting T MEM oupa n qr Output 2 Parameters PASTA seach ar to scroll Output 3 Parameters through the options i Quality Output To open nested options single click the 7 2 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual I O Parameters I O Parameters Serial Commands Power On Reset Counts K406 power on resets power on saves power on flash saves Time Since Reset lt K407 hours minutes gt Service Message K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Serial Verification lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt Beeper lt K702 status gt Quality Output lt K704 quality output separator decodes per trigger status gt Symbol Data Output K705 symbol data output status when to output Read Duration Output lt K706 status separator gt No Read Message
300. rigger must be connected to signal ground If an NPN source is used Trigger must be connected to the supply voltage Reader Reader Sensor Reader Sensor PNP NPN A 28 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Appendices Appendix I USB to Serial Virtual COM Port Driver For use with Windows 7 32 bit Vista 32 bit XP 32 bit and 2000 Operating Systems Microscan s USB to Serial Virtual COM Port Driver allows you to send serial data using a USB MINI Hawk Installing the USB to Serial Virtual COM Port Driver 1 Download the driver files from the Microscan website or Microscan Tools CD If the driver files are in a zip file extract them to a folder of your choice before running the installer 2 Double click on DPInst exe to launch the Microscan USB to Serial Virtual COM Port Driver Installer data Select DPInst exe to launch TE exe q pipet diet DPInst exe the driver installer dpinst xml Driver Installation Guide pdf iM ReleaseNotes rtf 3 Click Next on the driver installer s welcome screen r Microscan USB to Serial Driver Welcome to the Microscan USB MICROSCAN Virtual COM Port Driver 1 0 0 0 USB Vi rtual This program will walk you through installing the driver for your Microscan Imager Once the driver is installed you will COM Port be able to connect to the Microscan Imager through an P RS232 virtual COM port Dr
301. rigger Timeout or New Trigger Usage Useful in applications that require an alternative way to end the read cycle For example if an assembly line should stop completely or the intervals between objects are highly irregular Definition Timeout or New Trigger is identical to Timeout except that a timeout or a new trigger whichever occurs first ends the read cycle Last Frame Usage Useful in applications in which the number of captures needed can be defined but the timeout duration varies Definition Last Frame only applies to Rapid Capture Mode Last Frame or New Trigger Usage Useful in applications in which line speeds are irregular and a new labelled object could appear before the last frame in a Rapid Capture sequence Definition Last Frame or New Trigger is identical to New Trigger except that a new trigger or last frame whichever occurs first ends the read cycle Read Cycle Timeout Definition Read Cycle Timeout is the duration of the read cycle Serial Cmd lt K220 end of read cycle read cycle timeout Default 200 x10 ms Options 1 to 65535 5 16 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Read Cycle Capture Mode Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Capture Mode relates to the way that images are captured and processed lt K241 capture mode number of captures rapid capture mode gt Continuous Capture 0 Rapid Capture 1 Continuous Capture Rapid Capture Definition In
302. rix symbol decoded AMINI Hawk is saved in a Learned state The imager will power on in the Learned state and will only decode the learned symbol type AMINI Hawk in a Learned state is issued a reset default command Ard The unit will return to an Unlearned state but if power is cycled it will return to its saved state 13 22 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Utilities Other Operational Serial Commands The following serial utility commands can be entered from ESP s Terminal or a PLC Y Modem Upload Transfer Options uy path filename Y Modem Download Transfer Options See MINI Hawk Image Output for an explanation of how to use this feature lt dy path filename gt Image Library Request lt op 9 gt Manages files in a selected directory File Source Explanation Nothing All files in root directory I All files in root directory Isaved All files in saved directory ida All files in all directories Idel Deletes all files in the root director Isavedi del Deletes all files in the saved directory del Deletes files in all directories White Balance Calibration lt WB gt The 3 megapixel MINI Hawk s default values are appropriate for nearly all applications However the White Balance calibration command will override the pre configured values if necessary White Balance is a processing operation performed to ensure proper color fidelity in a captured
303. rn During Calibrate Allows you to determine whether the blue LED target pattern will be on or off during the Calibrate routine Use Higher Quality Images Sets ESP to output images at a higher resolution than standard JPEG format Open Image after Save When Open Image after Save is enabled ESP automatically opens saved image captures Images can be saved from the Evaluation tab in the Camera view or by right clicking an image in any other image capture view and then saving Send XON with Autoconnect Sends an XON Begin Transmission command to the imager before starting the Autoconnect routine MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 2 9 Menu Toolbar Preferences Advanced Tab cont Ask to Save ESP File when Quitting When enabled prompts the user to save a esp file when ending a session 2 J Save changes to session 9 esp w cmn The esp file will be saved in the location of your choice LL My Documents DER Ld File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Links Back 4 Search Folders FFB gt 2 Address B My Documents x Go Folders x Name Size Type Desktop ESlsession 9 esp 6KB ESP Document B My Documents E E My Computer 3 13 3 Floppy A Local Disk C lt Connect to Readers via TCP IP When enabled shows a TCP IP option on the Connection Wizard Use Default Storage Location When enabled automatically stores data in ESP s Application Data folder
304. rn Off For Help press F1 omeo Point to Point 7 See Calibrate by EZ Button on page 1 11 for the EZ button calibration procedure MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 4 13 Initiating Calibration Calibration Progress Indicators During the calibration process the imager has a number of ways to communicate its progress to the user The following three types of feedback are the primary ways that the imager communicates calibration progress Read Rate LEDs When calibration is initiated through a serial command or the EZ Button the imager s Read Rate LEDs indicate calibration progress as follows LEDs Calibration Progress 20 Search Pass in progress 20 40 Focus Pass in progress 20 40 60 Medium Pass in progress 20 40 60 80 Fine Tune Pass in progress 20 40 60 80 100 Calibrated Successfully holds for green flash duration Calibrated Successfully gt 100 6000 Fine Tune Pass READ 80 sy Medium Pass __ gt 60 ATUS Focus Pass 9 gm 40 Search Pass ___ pf s lt Beeper Green Flash The beeper and green LED flash are used to indicate calibration status as shown in the table below Indicator Status 2 quick beeps Calibration has started 5 quick beeps Calibration has failed 1 long beep Calibration has been completed successfully 1 sec Green Flash Calibration has been completed successfu
305. rs Show Connect Prompt At startup displays the Would you like to connect to the MINI Hawk prompt Receive After Connect At startup loads the imager s settings into ESP This is not recommended if you want to preserve your ESP settings for future use Skip EZ Mode At startup skips EZ Mode and opens directly in App Mode Enable Send and Save as Customer Defaults At startup enables the Send and Save as Customer Defaults option in the Send Recv command 2 6 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Using ESP Preferences gt Terminal Tab ESP Preferences General Terminal Bar Code Options Advanced M Show Non Printable Characters c s Default Format Fast Change Echo Font Enhanced Format Slower v Enable Echo Change Keyboard Macros Blue Background Color Vv Display Incoming Data Even When Not in Focus Default Settings OK Cancel Show Non Printable Characters When Show Non Printable Characters is enabled characters such as CRLF will be displayed in the Terminal window When Enhanced Format is checked the characters are displayed with more detailed formatting Change Keyboard Macros Clicking the Change Keyboard Macros button brings up the Function Keys dialog In this dialog you can Jg en elelee rom ne select the desired function key and then enter your rowo o o macro keystrokes in the associated key map For o eee example
306. s Default Good Read Options 0 Disabled 1 Good Read 2 No Read Note The beeper will also sound at any of the following times When the imager is defaulted When a send save command is sent from ESP At the conclusion of a calibration procedure When a lt Z gt lt Zp gt lt Zrd gt or K701 1 command is sent MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 7 13 LED Configuration LED Configuration Usage Useful as a visible indicator of read rates and symbol quality Definition Determines the mode in which the status LEDs operate Serial Cmd lt K737 LED mode ISO IEC 16022 grade Default Standard Options 0 Standard 1 ISO IEC 16022 grade In ISO IEC 16022 grade mode the LEDs represent the grade of the first Data Matrix symbol decoded in the read cycle The parameter to be graded is set in the ISO IEC 16022 Grade options For example to program the LEDs to indicate the ISO IEC 16022 print growth grade set LED Mode to ISO IEC 16022 Grade and set ISO IEC 16022 Grade to Print Growth If all the LEDs from 20 to 100 are illuminated the read result is a grade A if only the 20 LED is illuminated the result is a grade F Standard In Standard Mode the STATUS LED indicates read cycle status and the GOOD READ LED illuminates upon a good read at the end of a read cycle In a read rate test these LEDs represent the percentage of good reads per images captured ISO IEC 16022 Grade Usage Provid
307. s green flash duration Default Always ON Options 0 Always OFF 1 ON only when not in the read cycle 2 ON only when in the read cycle 3 Always ON Always OFF The target pattern will remain OFF at all times unless overridden by the EZ button or operational command ON Only When Not in the Read Cycle The target pattern is always ON except during the read cycle If the EZ button or operational command overrides this setting the target pattern will remain on at all times ON Only When in the Read Cycle The target pattern will remain OFF except during the read cycle If the EZ button or operational command overrides this setting the target pattern will remain on at all times Always ON The target pattern is always ON MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 7 11 Output Indicators Green Flash Duration Usage Provides visual verification that a good read has occurred Definition When a good read occurs the green LEDs will illuminate and stay on for the time set in the Green Flash Duration value Serial Cmd lt K750 green flash mode target pattern status green flash duration Default 100 1 second Options 0 to 65535 in 10 ms increments 7 12 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual I O Parameters Beeper Usage An audible verification that either a good read or a No Read has occurred Definition A beep is emitted after each good read or No Read Serial Cmd K702 beeper statu
308. s per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Angle Data Matrix Only Definition When this feature is enabled the symbol orientation is appended to data output as a degree value representing the angle of the Data Matrix symbol s L shaped finder pattern relative to the imager Serial Cmd K710 percent cell damage total read time capture time locate time decode time pixels per element ECC level matrix size quiet zone symbol angle Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 6 15 Microscan Symbol Quality Output by ESP Microscan Symbol Quality Output by ESP ESP s Symbol Quality interface allows you to evaluate Data Matrix symbols for compliance with a rigorous set of standards such as Locate Time Capture Time and Decode Time First determine which parameters you want to evaluate using the Symbol Quality tree control Grading Percent Cell Damage Disabled Capture Time Disabled Locate Time Disabled Decode Time Disabled Pixels Per Element Disabled ECC Level Disabled Matrix Size Disabled Quiet Zone Disabled Symbol Angle Disabled Once you have set these Data Matrix evaluation parameters go to the Preferences Tab and set your Data Matrix Grading Report output preferences After your output preferences are set click the Data Matrix Grading button Data Matrix Grading
309. sabled Matrix Size Disabled Quiet Zone Disabled Symbol Angle Disabl v Show Tree Control v For Help press F1 IMINIHawk i MINI Hawk RONNEGIEDNNN Point to Point COMI 115 2K N 8 1 7 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Symbol Quality Preferences Tab The Preferences tab allows the user to set defaults that are automatically activated when grading is completed For this reason the user is advised to set preferences before performing grading Report Locate Preferences M Show Tree Control Fields for report This information is 7 appended at the perator Name M Doe bottom of the report Company Name bz Corp Choose the default report type to be generated when you click Save Report on the Report tab Check Autofit Content to ensure that saved PDF report content will fit on a single page Saved Options Iv Show Report Options dialog during Save Report POF tees pan Default Report Type PDF Files pdf v HTML Files htm x CSV Files csv We Autofit Content Low Graphic HTML Append to file Rich Text Edit Files rtf v Store Report without file path prompt eg Typically you will be asked Use symbol data for file name where Vol wish to store your report C Documents and Settingsssymbol grades Default Path If you do not want to be prompted to choose a file
310. sabled 1 Enabled Separator Character Composite Note The Separator Character will be the same as the character defined in the Multisymbol Separator field of the lt K222 gt command Usage As required by the application Definition Allows the user to change the separator character from a comma to a new character Serial Cmd lt K453 mode separator status separator gt Default comma Options Any ASCII character Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K453h 3C gt For gt lt K453h 3E gt For lt K453h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values 6 38 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Symbologies Narrow Margins Symbology Identifier Narrow Margins Usage Used when the leading and trailing edges of the symbols are smaller than the standard margin or other objects encroach into the margins Definition Allows the imager to read 1D symbols with quiet zones less than 8 times the width of the narrow bar element Quiet zone is the space at the leading and trailing ends of a symbol Each quiet zone can be as narrow as only five times the width of the narrow bar element when Narrow Margins is enabled Serial Cmd lt K450 narrow margins symbology identifier status Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Enabled When Narrow Margins is
311. sage Good Read is used when an application requires all symbol data to be transmitted It s typically used in tracking applications in which each object is uniquely identified Definition With Good Read enabled the imager transmits symbol data on any good read regardless of Matchcode Type setting Note A No Read can still be transmitted if Enabled MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Symbol Data Output When to Output Symbol Data Definition Serial Cmd Default Options This command allows the user to choose when symbol data can be sent to the host K705 symbol data output status when to output As Soon As Possible 0 ASAP 1 End of Read Cycle As Soon As Possible Usage Definition As Soon As Possible is useful in applications in which symbol data needs to be moved quickly to the host typically when the host is making decisions based on symbol data Enabling As Soon As Possible causes symbol data to be sent to the host immediately after a symbol has been successfully decoded Note More than one decode might in fact be required to qualify as a good read depending on how Decodes Before Output is set End of Read Cycle Usage Definition End of Read Cycle is useful in timing based systems in which the host is not ready to accept data at the time that it is decoded Enabling End of Read Cycle means that symbol data does not get sent to the host until the read cycle ends with a timeout o
312. same interface LENGTH Size 1 byte Value 0 62 Note Length indicates the number of valid data bytes in the fixed length data field This is necessary because the USB HID standards define HID Reports as fixed length yet the imager or host may require a smaller data size in any given report DATA Size 62 bytes fixed length Value 0x00 to OxFF Note The Data field is left justified meaning it begins immediately after the Length field All unused data space is NUL 0x00 padded Data values can be binary meaning that they span the entire 8 bit range of 0x00 to OxFF 3 26 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Communications Report Format Examples For clarity all report format examples are shown as follows report fields separated by an underscore _ REPORT ID and LENGTH fields shown as decimal values data fields shown as printable ASCII characters and the number of NUL padding bytes shown as decimal values nn IN report to host 1 11 A 002374938 51 REPORT ID 1 Microscan HID LENGTH 11 DATA A 02374938 This is a Code 39 symbol NUL padding 51 bytes OUT report from host to imager 1_27_ lt K200 3 gt lt K220 0 300 gt lt K714 gt 35 REPORT ID 1 Microscan HID LENGTH 27 DATA lt K200 3 gt lt K220 0 300 gt lt K714 gt These commands enable External Edge set a 3 second timeout and request the No Read configuration command NUL padding 35 bytes I
313. se wait while the drivers install This may take some time to complete 6 Once the driver is installed successfully you will receive the message shown below Click Finish e 1 0 NNNM MICROSCAN Installation Successful USB Virtual COM Port The drivers were successfully installed on this computer Driver You can now connect your device to this computer your device came with instructions please read them first Driver Name Status WV Microscan Systems Inc Ready to use A 30 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Appendices Uninstalling the USB to Serial Virtual COM Port Driver Important You must uninstall the USB to Serial Virtual COM Port Driver any time you require high speed USB connectivity to upload images using EZ Trax for example CJ E gt Control Panel Programs gt Programs and Features Er Sor Programs ana Features P es Uninstall or change a program Find the driver on the list View installed updates o uninstall a program sel from the list and then click Uninstall Change or Repair i i To uninstall a program select it from the list and then click Uninstall Change or Rep of programs select it then of amp 8 click Uninstall Change Organize Uninstall Change Name Publisher Installed On Size IRICOH RSU amp xx Media Driver ver 3 62 02 RICOH 8 20 2010 Fa Skype Toolbars Skype Technologies S A 9 2
314. settings or have the capability to communicate within those settings By first doing an EZ button default or hardware default to restore the known Microscan defaults the user can then recall the previous customer saved settings with an Arc or Zrc command Microscan Default Parameters Microscan default parameters are contained in the firmware and cannot be changed Software Defaults Microscan default parameters can be recalled loaded into current settings with Ard command or recalled and saved for power on with the Zrd command Hardware Default If a software default and reset is not possible it may be necessary to reset the reader by shorting connecting specific pins This procedure has the same effect as the lt Zrd gt software command Important For this reset to occur this command must be executed within 60 seconds of a power on or a reset 1 Apply power to the reader 2 If using an IB 131 locate pins 7 and 11 on the host connector Caution Be certain that the correct pins are located Connecting the wrong pins could cause serious damage to the unit 3 Momentarily connect these wires or pins and listen for a series of short beeps 4 Within 3 seconds connect them again A longer beep should be heard If not repeat the process Default on Power On You can also use the EZ button to default the reader by holding it down while applying power to the reader provided that this feature is enabled
315. shte eighteen ceca 6 38 Narrow Margins Symbology ldentifier sees 6 39 Background Color 2 0 dere ete deti iia 6 41 iv MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Introduction Chapter 7 I O Parameters l O Parameters by ESP eiii eret Ern eee 7 2 I O Parameters Serial Commands see 7 3 Symbol Data Output 1 uertice red teet tete Heat nee kun 7 4 No Read MeSSage cccccceseceeeeeceeeaeeeeeeseeaeeeeeesesaeaeeeesaeeeaeeeeseeseaeeeeees 7 7 Read Duration Output enne 7 8 Output Indicators i eet tret te RENE ee 18 7 9 Ill E 7 13 LED Configuration irc ett etc AIR Un EUER 7 14 Serial Verification 5 i eee ned tend eee diei ene Eie pe ci gern 7 15 EZ Button cete E pesas teste ote e atone 7 17 EZ Button MOdeS eee e etnia Fer ined 7 19 Configurable Output 1 sssssssssssssseseseeeeeenen eene 7 21 Trend Analysis Output 1 essen emen 7 24 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 1 eese 7 27 Diagnostic OUtpUt 1 contente dtt notet tta dne 7 30 Configurable Output 2 sisisi inikite iet eit uei eiii egie 7 31 Trend Analysis Output 2 ssssseeeeene emen 7 31 ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 2 seeeeeee 7 31 Diagnostic OUtpUt 2 2 conce aaraa seo ioiii 7 31 Configurable Output 3 cette tte tree eter iet
316. sired symbol is located The programmable window of interest increases decode speed improves threshold and makes it easy to select specific symbols from among several in the field of view The user provides the upper left pixel location and the size of the window to define the Window of Interest Window of Interest Top 0 Left 0 Height 1024 width 1280 MINI Hawk High Resolution SXGA Window of Interest Top 0 Left Height 480 Width 752 MINI Hawk High Speed WVGA Window of Interest Top 0 Left 0 Height 1536 width 2048 MINI Hawk 3 Megapixel QXGA Caution Window of Interest will shrink the field of view and therefore could cause symbols to be missed in dynamic applications MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 10 9 Window of Interest Window of Interest by ESP 1 From the Camera menu click the WOI tab to bring up Window of Interest If you haven t already captured an image click the Capture and Decode button to decode the present image If successful the Good Read indicator on the WOI tab will be green and the symbol will appear in the pane below Note You can resize the image by clicking and dragging the ESP window from the lower right corner This is useful where very small symbols are being read 2 Click and drag your cursor over the symbol that you want to isolate for reading Notice that the surrounding area goes black You can use the handles on the image area that you
317. size image when calibration begins Once a symbol is decoded the camera WOI will be zoomed in both vertically and horizontally regardless of which WOI mode is enabled to include the symbol plus an additional margin area This is done to accelerate the calibration process When a successful calibration process is completed the camera WOI will be adjusted according to the mode enabled Otherwise the original WOI configuration will be retained Serial Cmd K529 gain shutter speed focus position symbol type WOI framing WO margin line scan height processing gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Row and Column 2 Row 3 Column 4 Straight Line 5 Straight Line Framed wg X Configured WOI Starting WOI After Decode Calibration Passed Calibration Failed If WOI framing is not enabled the current WOI configuration will be used until a symbol has been decoded After a symbol is decoded the WOI is framed exactly as it would be if a WOI framing mode was enabled When the calibration process is complete the original WOI configuration is restored Refer to the diagram below Configured WOI After Decode Calibration Passed Calibration Failed MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 4 7 Calibration Options Disabled When this feature is disabled the Window of Interest is not modified after the calibration process is complete Row and Column If the calibration process is successful the Window of Interes
318. software or the EZ Trax Quick Start Guide available on the Microscan Tools CD Configuring EZ Trax Output by ESP To configure EZ Trax using ESP first click the I O tab in App Mode to display the I O Parameters tree control Parameters ESP Values I O Parameters Symbol Data Output Good Read Noread Message Enabled Bad No Symbol Qualification Read Duration Output Disabled Output Object Info Disabled Output Indicators Serial Verification Image Output Disabled ZEEZ Trax Output Disabled Comm Port Host Image Mode Disabled Image Format Compressed JPEG Quality 90 Object Info Output Disabled Grade Output Disabled EZ Button Enabled Calibration Options Database Identifier Output Disabled Output 1 Parameters Output 2 Parameters Output 3 Parameters Quality Output 7 42 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual I O Parameters EZ Trax Output Enabled When EZ Trax output is Comm Port Disabled enabled the imager will attempt Image Mode Enabled to output all enabled EZ Trax Image Format Compressed options EZ Trax will not function JPEG Quality 90 unless enabled Object Info Output Disabled Grade Output Disabled Comm Port EZ Trax Output Disabled Host Y Image Mode Selects the communication port Image Format that will be used to transfer JPEG Quality image files Object Info Output Disabled Grade Output
319. ss nennen enne nenne nennen nnns sns 14 2 Output Format Status ccccccescssssssececeeeeeeececeseseeeeeeeceeeeeesaeaeeseseseeeeeeseseeseuseeseeeseeseteeaeaeeeees 14 3 FormatASSIQDi zs A rri oe RR RR SEEN RR SERERE ERR HER D Rn aerate thee ELSE RR 14 4 Format Extr act ec e e Ee o e P ap ir es EO EAR EH Ua ES IURE DU ee mE ES 14 5 Format Inserts cec e ctr te haath ris EP ERROR EAE ENERO PRSE RAE SERE tenes 14 7 Output Filter Configuration 0 0 02 ccccccceecece cece eeeceeceeeeeeceeceeeeeecaeeeeeeeccaeeeeeeeceaeeeeeseenaeaeeeeeneaeeees 14 9 Ordered Output E E eee de ane cheer tine TEA 14 13 This section explains how to control the formatting and filtering of decoded symbol data for output MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 14 1 Output Format Serial Commands Output Format Serial Commands Format Extract K740 output index start location length Format Insert lt K741 output index length hex string Format Assign K742 symbol number status gt Format Status lt K743 output format status gt Output Filter Configuration lt K744 filter number symbology length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt Ordered Output Filter 14 2 lt K745 number of filters gt MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Output Format Output Format Status Definition This is a global enable disable parameter In order to use formatting you must set up
320. sssseseseene neret nennen 1 13 Step 11 Save Configuration in ESP sssssssssssssssssssssss ener ennt nt enne nnne 1 14 This chapter is designed to get your MINI Hawk up and running quickly using the EZ button or ESP Easy Setup Program Following these steps will allow you to get a sense of the imager s capabilities and to test sample symbols Detailed setup information for installing the imager into your actual application can be found in the subsequent chapters MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 1 1 Check Hardware Step 1 Check Hardware Item Description Part Number 1 MINI Hawk FIS 6300 XXXXG 2 IC 332 Adapter FIS 0001 0035G 3 IB 131 Interface Box 99 000018 01 4 Power Supply 90 264 VAC 24VDC USA Euro plug 97 100004 15 5 Object Detector 99 000017 01 6 Communication Cable 61 300026 03 Scanner 1S0H Network 3 4 5 L JX Hardware Required Caution Be sure that all cables are connected BEFORE applying power to the system Always power down BEFORE disconnecting any cables 1 2 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Quick Start Step 2 Connect the System Connecting by RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 Connect the imager 1 to the IB 131 1C 332 interface 2 and 3 Connect the host cable 6 to the host and to the host port on the IB 131 3 Connect the object detector 5 to the IB 131 3 Con
321. status USPS4CB status POSTNET allow B and B fields Australia Post allow 0 FCC gt Code 39 lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set Codabar lt K471 status start stop match star stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Interleaved 2 of 5 lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode Status gt UPC EAN lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplemental status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Code 128 EAN 128 lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding gt Code 93 lt K475 status fixed symbol length status symbol length PDF417 lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused codeword collection Pharmacode lt K477 status fixed bar count status fixed bar count minimum bar count bar width mode direction fixed threshold value gt Data Matrix lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 st
322. symbol type WOI framing WOI margin line scan height processing Autocalibrate lt CAL gt Calibration Overview Autocalibration is one of the most powerful features of the MINI Hawk The calibration process can be initiated by serial command EZ button or ESP user interface When the imager enters calibration it runs through an optimization cycle that sets the ideal parameters for reading symbols at the highest possible level of performance Autocalibration can be specially configured to optimize specific parameters such as focus gain shutter speed and symbol type The calibration process consists of five separate phases quick focus search pass focus pass medium pass and fine tune pass During this process the imager quickly locates configuration setup defines a calibration range for the configuration parameters and then tunes those parameters for optimal performance 4 2 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Calibration Calibration Options This command specifies the operation of the imager s calibration feature The default configuration is set up to perform calibration on gain focus and symbol type The default shutter speed setting is disabled because not all applications require shutter speed and when it is required the application specific settings tend to vary widely Note Background Color is part of the calibration process regardless of the calibration setup After successful completion o
323. symbols Definition Multisymbol allows the user to define up to 100 symbols that can be read in a single read cycle Conditions The following conditions apply Each symbol must be different to be read unless in Rapid Capture Mode configured for triggered capture The maximum number of characters in a read cycle is 3 000 for all symbols All No Read messages are posted at the end of the data string unless output filtering is enabled If more than one symbol is within the field of view at the same time symbol data may not be displayed in the order of appearance If Matchcode Type is set to Sequential or if Trigger is set to Continuous Read 1 Output the imager will behave as if Number of Symbols were set to 1 regardless of the user defined configuration Number of Symbols Definition Number of Symbols is the number of different symbols that can be read in a single read cycle Serial Cmd K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator Default 1 Options 1 to 100 Multisymbol Separator Usage Used to delimit or separate data fields with a user defined character Definition Any valid ASCII character inserted between each symbol read when Multisymbol is set to any number greater than 1 Serial Cmd K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator Default comma Options Any available ASCII character Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For lt lt K222h 3C gt
324. t and try again Note If your RS 232 host settings cannot be changed to match the imager s settings check the Force Connect box in the RS 232 dialog and click the Connect Baud f 15 2K m Parity None m Stop Bits One Data Bits Eight M Port com Y Aux Port In Use RS 232 C USB Force Connect Auto Connect Cancel 1 8 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Quick Start Step 7 Locate the Symbol in the Field of View Locate by ESP n ESP s EZ Mode click the Locate button to enable the blue target pattern Test Stop Decodes per Second The symbol in the field of view will appear in the video view beneath the Locate and Calibrate buttons and you will see the blue target pattern projected from the front of the imager Center the target pattern on the symbol At 2 to 3 inches the pattern resembles an X At 3 to 6 inches the pattern resembles a V Center on object in field of view Target pattern shown as it would appear between 3 and 6 inches Important The entire symbol should fall within the field of view FOV of the imager The field of view is what appears in ESP s Locate Calibrate window in EZ Mode Click the Stop button to end the Locate function MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 1 9 Locate the Symbol in the Field of View Locate by EZ Button If you are not connected to a host computer
325. t database index entry Serial Cmd lt K256 switch mode frame count time image process looping image dimensions Default 1 frames ms Options 1 to 65535 11 10 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Configuration Database Image Process Looping Usage Useful in applications where it is necessary to process a single captured image multiple times using different IP and decode parameters Serial Cmd lt K256 switch mode frame count time image process looping image dimensions Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Disabled When Image Process Looping is set to Disabled an image is captured for every database configuration whether or not any camera settings have been modified Enabled When Image Process Looping is set to Enabled the last captured image frame is re processed with the new IP and decode parameters If camera settings have not been changed from the last capture event and when a database configuration is loaded to current active settings no new image is captured Note An exception to this is the first database index a new image is always captured when the first database index is used When a camera setting has been modified from one database setting to the next a new image is captured For example if all database entries contained the same camera setting values but had different IP and decode parameters an image frame would only be captured when the first database configuration was
326. t K474h 3E gt For lt K474h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values Application Record Brackets Code 128 EAN 128 Definition If an EAN conforming symbol is decoded and EAN formatting applies this feature places bracket characters around the application identifiers in the formatted output Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Application Record Padding Code 128 EAN 128 Definition This feature causes the imager to pad variable length application fields with leading zeroes This is not done for the last field of a symbol Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6 14 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Symbologies BC412 Usage Widely used in semiconductor manufacturing Particularly useful where speed accuracy and ease of printing are required Definition BC412 Binary Code 412 a proprietary IBM symbolo
327. t dede tete e eie de Tees 3 9 Auxiliary Port Connections sseeeen 3 10 Auxiliary Port System Data Status sese 3 18 Daisy Chain Autoconfigure ssseeen 3 19 Response Timeout sese eec iaidd iieiea diein 3 20 LRC Status e 3 21 Protocol Configuration Examples eee 3 22 USB HID Interface recte ttt erede 3 23 ASCII Character Entry Modifier esee 3 32 i um t 3 33 Postarible m itor cte cede dieitur 3 34 Chapter 4 Calibration Calibration Serial Commands seen 4 2 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual iii Table of Contents Calibration Overview ieiti ae eem emen 4 2 Calibration Options iu 2 tit ten treten ERE Feng 4 3 Calibration by ESP ine b rsen eim 4 11 Initiating Calibration sese 4 13 Additional Notes about Calibration een 4 19 Chapter 5 Read Cycle Read Cycle by ESP nhieu Los 5 2 Read Cycle Serial Commands sse 5 3 Read Cycle Setu p 5 nione rei e tee eH eee she estes tevuenes 5 4 NUT ES adore c eons sekectes a ae Aad eves eee Raters 5 5 Trigger Mode and Filter Duration essen 5 6 External Trigger Polarity c ccccceccesececeeeceeeeaeceeeeeeaeeeeeeseeaeeeeeseenaes 5 11 Serial Trigger ied ei pete a erp ace ceni eda 5 12 Start Trigger Char
328. t will be modified to frame the symbol as well as an additional margin area around the symbol determined by the WOI Margin parameter Refer to the diagram below Column If the calibration process is successful the Window of Interest columns will be modified to vertically frame the symbol plus an additional margin area around the symbol determined by the WOI Margin parameter Refer to the diagram below Row If the calibration process is successful the Window of Interest rows will be modified to horizontally frame the symbol plus an additional margin area around the symbol determined by the WOI Margin parameter Refer to the diagram below precum cl 4 8 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Calibration Straight Line This feature is intended for use with linear symbologies If the calibration process is successful the orientation of the symbol is determined and the Window of Interest is modified according to the symbol orientation The scan line orientation is determined to be vertical if the symbol tilt is between 225 and 315 or between 45 and 135 Otherwise the scan line will be horizontal If the symbol is vertical the image column size will be set by the scan height parameter and will be configured for full row resolution If the symbol is horizontal the image row size will be set by the scan height parameter and will be configured for full column resolution The scan line will be centered in the m
329. tal gain range 43 to 48 K544 shutter speed gain gt 20 Analog gain 0 to 42 Digital gain 43 to 48 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 10 19 Focal Distance Focal Distance Definition Serial Cmd Default Options This setting provides a means for configuring the focal distance of the imager The input value is in terms of inches and is divided by 100 internally For example 400 sets the imager to a focal distance of 4 inches It is important to note that the imager may not have an exact match for the focal position requested The imager has a range of steps that are calibrated and mapped to focal positions This input value is matched to the closest focal position step that the system supports It is also important to keep in mind that the resolution of the system is not linear As the imager s focal distance setting increases the resolution decreases This effect is offset somewhat by the fact that the depth of field increases at greater focal distances K525 focal distance Standard Density 400 4 High Density 400 4 Ultra High Density 300 3 200 2 to 600 6 Note In the factory the imager calibrates its focus curve and matches the focus motor steps to various focal positions Therefore each imager has a slightly different focus map of stepper motor positions vs focal positions This allows the user to enter a focal distance that causes the imager to select the closest stepp
330. tch length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch Default 0 Options 0 to 3000 Note Match Start Position must be set to 1 or greater to enable this feature A 0 setting will disable this feature Match Length Usage Example If Match Length is set to 6 in a 10 character symbol and Match Start Position is set to 2 only the 2nd through 7th characters from left to right will be compared Definition Defines the length of the character string that will be compared with that of the master symbol when Match Start Position is set to 1 or greater When Match Start Position is set to 0 no comparison will occur Serial Cmd K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch Default 1 Options 1 to 3000 9 6 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Matchcode Wild Card Character Usage Example With Wild Card Character defined as the default asterisk defining CR 34 as the master symbol will result in matches for CR134 and CR234 but not CR2345 Entering URGENT as your master symbol will result in matches for URGENT URGENT 1 and URGENT 12 but not for URGENT 123 This means any wild cards appended to the master symbol data will result in matches of symbols in variable lengths up to the master symbol lengths but not over However wild cards in the beginning or center of a symbol e g UR NT do not allow
331. tegrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Definition Specifies the exact number of characters that the imager will recognize this does not include start stop and check character characters The imager ignores any symbol not having the specified length Serial Cmd lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 14 Options 1 to 74 6 34 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Symbologies DataBar Limited RSS Limited Note DataBar Limited was previously known as RSS Limited Usage DataBar Limited is designed to be read by laser and CCD readers It is not recommended for omnidirectional slot scanners Definition Encodes a smaller 14 digit symbol 74 modules wide that is not omnidirectional Serial Cmd lt K483 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled DataBar 14 RSS 14 Note DataBar 14 was previously known as RSS 14 Usage Used in the grocery retail and prescription drug industries where 14 digit EAN item identification may be needed Definition DataBar 14 is a fixed symbol length symbology that encodes 14 digits including a 1 digit indicator DataBar 14 is 96 modules wide It can be stacked in two rows it can read omnidirectionally if printed in full height or horizontally if height truncated for small marking Serial Cmd lt K482 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MINI Hawk High Performan
332. ter Definition Defines the row position of the upper left starting point of the window Serial K516 row pointer column Cmd pointer row depth column width WOI Column Width Default 0 Options High Resolution MINI Hawk 0 to 1024 row depth High Speed MINI Hawk 0 to 480 row depth 3 Megapixel MINI Hawk 0 to 1536 row depth Left Column Pointer Definition Defines the column position of the upper left starting point of the window Serial Cmd lt K516 row pointer column pointer row depth column width Default 0 Options High Resolution MINI Hawk 0 to 1280 column width High Speed MINI Hawk 0 to 752 column width 3 Megapixel MINI Hawk 0 to 2048 column width Important The column pointer setting must be an even value Height Row Depth Definition Defines the size in rows of the window Maximum value is defined as the maximum row size of the image sensor minus the Top value Serial Cmd lt K516 row pointer column pointer row depth column width gt Default High Resolution MINI Hawk 1024 High Speed MINI Hawk 480 3 Megapixel MINI Hawk 1536 Options High Resolution MINI Hawk 3 to 1024 row pointer High Speed MINI Hawk 3 to 480 row pointer 3 Megapixel MINI Hawk 3 to 1536 row pointer MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 10 11 Window of Interest Width Column Width Definition Defines the column position of the upper left star
333. th access to the focus distance values shown in the imager response Send lt K526 gt Response K526 30 202 212 225 241 264 410 447 466 481 492 502 511 519 526 533 539 545 550 556 561 565 570 574 578 582 586 590 594 597 601 gt The current focus position would be 410 4 1 Send lt K525 gt Send lt K525 gt Response lt K525 447 gt Decrement Focus Position 3 Megapixel Definition Decrements the imager s focus setting to the next focal distance supported by the imager Note Use the Focus Distance Table command lt K526 gt to find the focal distance settings supported by your imager Serial Cmd lt K525 gt Options 200 2 to 600 6 Standard Density 200 2 to 500 5 Micro Density The following example assumes a focus position setting of 400 4 with access to the focus distance values shown in the imager response Send lt K526 gt Response K526 30 202 212 225 241 264 410 447 466 481 492 502 511 519 526 533 539 545 550 556 561 565 570 574 578 582 586 590 594 597 601 The current focus position would be 410 4 1 Send K525 Send K525 Response lt K525 264 gt MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 10 25 Illumination Brightness Illumination Brightness Definition This feature allows the user to adjust the brightness of the illumination LEDs Since the imager has control over the brightness of the illumination it can provide consistent br
334. the first Good Read image in the read cycle The image file will immediately follow the symbol data MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 7 45 Configuring EZ Trax Output No Read Outputs the first No Read image in the read cycle The image file will immediately follow the symbol data Note If two symbols are present in the same image capture and one of them is successfully decoded no image will be output No Read and Good Read Outputs the first No Read or Good Read image in the read cycle Mismatch Outputs the image of the first mismatch condition Image Format Definition Selects the format of the image output file Serial Cmd lt K757 status comm port image mode image format JPEG quality object info output grade output Default Compressed Options 0 Lossless 1 Compressed Lossless A lossless image is one that is in a high resolution format and that will not lose resolution even when manipulated and saved multiple times When Lossless is enabled the JPEG Quality setting has no effect Compressed Outputs the image in JPEG format Image quality is determined by the JPEG Quality setting JPEG Quality Definition Sets the amount of JPEG image compression A value of 1 represents the highest compression and lowest image quality and 100 represents the lowest compression and highest image quality Serial Cmd lt K757 status comm port image mode image format JPEG quality object info output
335. the format using the insert and extract commands and you must also assign a symbol to format using the Format Assign command Serial Cmd K743 output format status Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Output Format Status Disabled When Output Format Status is set to Disabled output formatting is globally disabled Output Format Status Enabled When Output Format Status is set to Enabled output formatting is enabled However Format Assign Format Insert and Format Extract must be properly set up as well Output Format Status by ESP On the Output Format tab check the Enable Output Format box We Enable Output Format Iv Auto Sync with Reader Set Number of Symbols Output Phrase Preamble Symbol 1 Postamble a ce MV Enable MV Parse MV Enable Parse Symbols Send and Save Receive Show Parse Table MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 14 3 Format Assign Format Assign Symbol Number Definition Symbol Number refers to the number of the symbol to which output formatting will apply For example if you wish to enable user defined formatting to symbol 2 in a multisymbol read cycle you would send the command lt K742 2 1 gt Note that the number of symbols may exceed the format capabilities Serial Cmd K742 symbol number status gt Options 1 to 10 1 Formatted output status for symbol
336. ting point of the window Serial Cmd K516 row pointer column pointer row depth column width Default High Resolution MINI Hawk 1280 High Speed MINI Hawk 752 3 Megapixel MINI Hawk 2048 Options High Resolution MINI Hawk 8 to 1280 column pointer High Speed MINI Hawk 8 to 752 column pointer 3 Megapixel MINI Hawk 8 to 2048 column pointer 10 12 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Camera and IP Setup Configuration Database The Configuration Database allows the user to manage multiple configuration profiles It is a useful tool in applications that require several different imager configurations to be applied sequentially and it allows the user to perform far more complex operations than would be possible with only one set of configuration parameters See Chapter 11 Configuration Database for full documentation of this feature Active Indexes 5 J Auto Sync Database settings with Reader Advanced Options Capture Settings lt lt WOl RO Processing Settings y Ei n E Gs m EJ CONI GETE ae SERE ELE v Capture for Every Index Show Database Index in Output Sort Index Positions on Good Reads Calibrate Receive Settings Send Settings Load Current To Index Load Index To Current Configuration Database view set for 5 Active Indexes with Capture Settings highlighted 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 10 13 Dy
337. ting the Host Operating System API and Establishing a Connection with the Microscan HID Interface When a connection is made the host can send serial configuration default commands The imager will always be able to receive configuration commands from the host application and send responses to those commands However the imager can be configured to stop producing IN Reports to the host from symbol data output and diagnostics service messages 3 30 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Communications Configuration Exceptions for USB Read Cycle Mode By default the imager operates in Continuous Read Mode f the imager is configured using Data Matrix symbols the read cycle mode should be the last item changed before saving the configuration settings and beginning operation This is because all read cycle modes other than Continuous Read Mode require a trigger event In USB a trigger event can only be initiated by serial command To send a trigger command the imager the host application must establish a connection with the imager s Microscan HID interface and send the trigger command in a Microscan HID Report The following read cycle conditions are required for USB MINI Hawk Serial Cmd K200 read mode Default Continuous Options 0 Continuous Mode 1 Coninuous Read 1 Output Mode 2 Level Mode 3 Edge Mode 4 Serial Mode 5 Serial and Edge Mode Important To use Level Mode you must enable Undelimited Start Trig
338. ton is held down and indicated by one two three and four beeps in succession Each position can be programmed for any of eight options Definition Serves as a master switch to enable disable the EZ button status Serial Cmd lt K770 global status default on power on load Configuration Database save for power on gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Trigger 3 Unlatch Outputs 4 Parameter Switch Global Status Disabled When set to Disabled the EZ button does not function Enabled When selected the EZ button is enabled and the function of each button position is selected by the EZ Button Mode command Trigger When selected the EZ button acts as a trigger for the imager to start and end read cycles All other button operations are inactive In External The read cycle endures for as long as the EZ button is pressed unless a Level timeout occurs and Timeout is enabled for End of Read Cycle In External As with Level Edge allows a read cycle to be initiated by pressing the EZ Edge button but unlike Level the read cycle ends with a good read output a timeout or a new trigger Unlatch Outputs In this configuration the EZ button will unlatch any logic outputs that have been latched Parameter Switch The parameter switch toggles between custom defaults and power on settings The condition is the same as that achieved by sending the lt Arc gt and lt Arp gt commands consecutively
339. ts the same data for both report types The user may enable or disable either report type Regardless of the report type used by the host application the application protocol via USB is identical to RS 232 RS 422 ports HID Reports are used as a channel for standard Microscan imager communication command input and symbol data output Important No matter how the imager is configured it is always able to receive and respond to commands from the host application using Microscan HID Reports MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 3 23 USB HID Interface Report Options The following functionality conditions hold true regardless of how HID Reports are configured 1 The host application must establish a connection with the imager to receive Microscan HID IN Reports symbol data and to send Microscan HID OUT Reports commands serial triggers 2 The imager can always receive Microscan HID OUT Reports commands serial triggers 3 The host application can always send commands through Microscan HID OUT Reports If the command requires a response a part number for example the imager will always send the response through Microscan HID IN Reports 4 The imager always ignores Keyboard OUT Reports sent by the host operating system 5 The content of both the Keyboard Reports and Microscan HID IN Reports is identical except for Keyboard Reports non printable data limitations Microscan HID IN Reports HID Reports are used as
340. tures under Capture Mode in the Camera Setup menu tree to the left of the tabs If you click Save the current image will be saved to the location of your choice Note An image can only be saved in the format in which it was uploaded to ESP JPEG images will be saved as jpg and bitmaps will be saved as bmp Camera and IP Setup Receive Capture Decode Delete Current pending_18200_2 64 ms Active Image Save Evaluation Histogram Line Scan iv JPEG Images JPEG Image Quality 1 High 100 1 100 NOTE Linescan is unavailable when using JPEG MV Contrast Low When you click the JPEG Image box notice that the Line Scan button is grayed out The JPEG option allows faster captures and transfers but since the JPEG standard compresses image data it is not suitable for the more rigorous demands of line scan evaluation JPEG also allows you to adjust the image quality resolution by adjusting the sliding tab between 1 and 100 1 being the lowest quality and 100 being the highest When possible use the highest quality when image transfer speed must be increased use a lower image quality setting Adjustments for this setting will depend on your specific hardware and software limitations MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 10 5 Evaluation Histogram Usage Useful in determining quality and contrast of symbols Definition A histogram is a graphic repres
341. turn line feed To enter control characters within a serial command hold down the control key while typing the desired character Example lt K142 1 CNTL m CNTL j gt to enter M J Important The ASCII characters lt gt and can only be entered as hex pairs For K142h 3C For gt K142h 3E For lt K142h 2C gt See ASCII Character Entry Modifier on page 3 32 for a detailed explanation of how to enter ASCII characters as hex values 3 34 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual EE 4 Calibration Contents Calibration Serial Commands ssseseeceeceeceeceececeeaueeseececeeeeceeceaueaueeseeeeeeeeseeeseaueaaeeeseeeeeeeeees 4 2 ec Ie ruine ua MMMMEEEMEMEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEMEEEEEEEEEEEEMEMEEEEEEMEMMMMMMM 4 2 Calibration Options 5 eee nie eene Eee Mactaeee pete 4 3 Calibration by ESP a eiit cere cce peut ei ee e ed ee Fede pe e dedere eae 4 11 Initiating Calibration eee eae en e de ee t ce e dece e e eo tee et 4 13 Additional Notes about Calibration c ccccccccccccccececseaueeseeceecececeeceaueaueesseceseeeeeesseaueaueeseeeeeeess 4 19 This section shows the MINI Hawk s calibration options and explains the different ways that those options can be configured MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 4 1 Calibration Serial Commands Calibration Serial Commands Calibration Options lt K529 gain shutter speed focus position
342. ult on power on load Configuration Database save for power on gt EZ Button Modes lt K771 single beep two beeps three beeps four beeps gt Trend Analysis Output 1 K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes per trigger threshold Trend Analysis Output 2 lt K781 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes per trigger threshold Trend Analysis Output 3 K782 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes per trigger threshold Diagnostic Output 1 K790 unused 1 service unit Diagnostic Output 2 K791 unused 1 service unit Diagnostic Output 3 K792 unused 1 service unit ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 1 K800 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 2 lt K801 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold ISO IEC 16022 Symbol Quality Output 3 K802 output on symbol contrast symbol contrast threshold output on print growth print growth threshold output on axial non uniformity axial non uniformity threshold output on UEC UEC threshold
343. uration Database set up output filters and parse symbol data in Ordered Output and Output Format and control multiple read cycle functions in Dynamic Setup Click the Terminal button to display tube or cap detection data or decoded symbol data and to send serial commands to the imager using text or macros Click the Utilities button to test Read Rate request or clear Counters enable or disable the imager or send output pulses in Device Control determine the Differences from Default in the current settings add or remove master symbol data in Master Database and verify or update the imager s Firmware For further details see ESP Help in the dropdown Help menu Microscan ESP Help Quick Start Help s About ESP Contacting Microscan MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 1 13 Save Configuration in ESP Step 11 Save Configuration in ESP To make changes to a configuration setting Parameters ESP Values Communications R5232 422 Host Port 3 Place your cursor in the Host Port Connections selection box scroll down to the setting you want to Host Protocol change and click once on Host 422 Status the setting R5232 Auxilliary Port USB HID Report Status 1 Left click on the p Disabled m to expand the desired tree Postamble 2 Double click on the Response Timeout Enabled desired parameter LRC Status Disabled and click once in the selection
344. us fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length MicroPDF417 lt K485 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt I O Parameters Power On Reset Counts lt K406 power on resets power on saves power on flash saves Time Since Reset lt K407 hours minutes gt Service Message K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Serial Verification lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output Beeper lt K702 status gt Quality Output lt K704 quality output separator decodes per trigger status Symbol Data Output K705 symbol data output status when to output Read Duration Output lt K706 status separator gt No Read Message lt K714 status message gt Frame Information lt K734 output frame number output coordinates LED Configuration lt K737 LED mode ISO IEC 16022 grade gt MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual A 11 Serial Configuration Commands Image Output K739 image output mode communication port file format JPEG quality Target Flood LEDs K750 green flash LED status target pattern LED status green flash duration EZ Trax Output K757 comm port image mode image format JPEG quality object info output grade output Database Identifier Output lt K759 status separator EZ Button lt K770 global status defa
345. use serious eye injury Maximum LED output 564 mW Wavelength 470 nm 525 nm 617 nm Location of the MINI Hawk s LED aperture window LED Aperture Window CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure IMPORTANT The MINI Hawk is intended for connection to a UL listed direct plug in power unit marked Class ll and rated 5 VDC at 3 5 Watts or greater if using electrical accessories European models must use a similarly rated Class or Class Il power supply that is certified to comply with standard for safety EN 60950 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual ix Statement of Agency Compliance Statement of Agency Compliance FE The MINI Hawk has been tested for compliance with FCC Federal Communications Commission regulations and has been found to conform to all applicable FCC Rules and Regulations To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements this device must not be co located or operate in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment CE The MINI Hawk has been tested for compliance with CE Conformit Europ enne standards and guidelines and has been found to conform to applicable CE standards specifically the EMC requirements EN 55024 1998
346. utter speed that row will be m j read out The rows of the image are exposed individually in rapid sequence As a symbol moves through the field of view it is in a different position at each row read out This creates distortion or skew as in the image shown below In this image the symbol is moving from left to right at a line speed of 40 inches per second The bottom of the symbol is read out first while the upper portion is still being integrated causing distortion along the symbol s x axis Note The amount of blur in the image is an effect of shutter speed and is not a factor in rolling shutter distortion If the symbol enters the imager s field of view from the top or bottom distortion will occur on the y axis The image below shows two symbols entering the field of view from the top at different line speeds As you can see this causes the image to shrink along the y axis This is because the symbol is moving perpendicular to the CMOS sensor s row read out In other words the bottom of the symbol is read out first and as the symbol moves information is lost the symbol enters pixel rows that have already been processed This causes the symbol to appear to shrink vertically Note If the symbol were to enter the field of view from the bottom the captured image would be stretched along the y axis 16 sec 10 sec Direction of symbol movement Le RETIRER TRIES ARE NE id Va at on o odo ir De
347. uxiliary Port Connections Full Duplex Mode Usage Definition Serial Cmd Options 3 14 When communication to and from the auxiliary port is required In Full Duplex Mode all auxiliary port data and symbol data is sent directly to the host Symbol data is not displayed on the auxiliary port menu Data Originating from the Auxiliary Port Auxiliary port data to the host is ignored if the nager is in a polled mode Host AI Auxiliary port data or read data is sent to the 7 host whenever it is received a Auxiliary port data is not echoed imager Auxiliary port data to the host is always sent without a preamble or postamble Data Originating from the Imager Data is not sent to the auxiliary port Aux Host Port v Imager Data Originating from the Host All host data is echoed to the auxiliary port in unpolled mode Host Ane ort m lt A A Imager lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt 3 Full Duplex MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Communications Daisy Chain Mode Usage Useful in applications where More than one symbol type is present A symbol may be present on multiple sides of a package Symbols are presented at different depths Definition In a daisy chain application readers are connected in tandem o
348. will appear 2 Drag your cursor horizontally across the image This will create a dashed horizontal line Pixel information and a visual representation of the dark and light pixels will be displayed below the image good 287 0 60 ms Evaluate Line Scan l Ll ilin When you center your cursor over the dashed line it becomes a double arrow cross This allows you to move the line anywhere in the window You can also use your keyboard arrows to move the line incrementally in any direction As with the histogram the line scan compares light and dark pixels but in a spatial distribution On the Y axis of the graph below 0 is black and 255 is white the X axis represents the horizontal axis of the symbol as described by the line scan White 255 Pizel Info Average Origin 0 0 Position N A aire eee Value N A M Black 0 had lun tl P Jal Han lias ull When you click anywhere on the graph a vertical red line appears at that point and its position and value in terms of black to white are updated in the Pixel Info table to the left of the graph 237 in this example In addition a horizontal dashed red line is displayed that indicates the average value MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 10 7 Calibration Calibration The Calibration interface in ESP is a powerful and intuitive way to optimize the imager s performance It allows the user to control several complex simultaneous cali
349. wiring NPN New Master jo MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual A 9 Communication Protocol Commands Appendix C Serial Configuration Commands Note For a list of utility commands such as read rate requests device control options and imager status requests see Serial Utility Commands on page 13 2 Communications Host Port Connections lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits Auxiliary Port Connections K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain ID status daisy chain ID RS 422 Status Host Port Protocol lt K102 status gt lt K140 protocol address gt Preamble lt K141 status preamble characters Postamble K142 status postamble characters Response Timeout K143 response timeout LRC lt K145 status gt Auxiliary Port System Data Status lt K146 aux gt ACK NAK Options lt K147 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt Polling Mode Options lt K148 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt Autoconfiguration Daisy Chain Calibration lt K150DAIS Y gt Calibration Options lt K529 gain shutter speed focus position symbol type WOI framing WOI margin line scan height Autocalibrate lt CAL gt Read Cycle Trigger Mode Filter Duration lt K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter trailing edge trigger filter gt Serial Trigger Character External Trigger State lt K201 serial trigger character gt lt
350. y default Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ECC 000 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 000 symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ECC 050 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 050 symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 6 4 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Symbologies ECC 080 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 080 symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ECC 100 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 100 symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ECC 140 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 140 symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Ena
351. y is pressed The second report indicates no key pressed with all keycodes NUL 0x00 to indicate that all keys have been released In the case of the MINI Hawk each byte output is equivalent to a keystroke with a key pressed report and a no key pressed report For this reason data rates are much slower when using Keyboard Reports Field Descriptions REPORT ID Size 1 byte Value 0x02 Note Report ID is the method employed by USB HID to allow multiple report formats to be sent and received from the same interface MODIFIER Size 1 byte Value 0x00 to OxFF Note Modifier is an 8 bit field corresponding to the state of the modifier keys at the time the keycode field was generated D Key LEFT CTRL LEFT SHIFT LEFT ALT LEFT GUI RIGHT CTRL RIGHT SHIFT RIGHT ALT RIGHT GUI NOOR WDM o 3 28 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Communications Field Descriptions RESERVED Size 1 byte Value 0x00 Note This field is Reserved Its value is always NUL 0x00 KEYCODES Size 6 bytes Value 0x00 to OxFF Note The MINI Hawk translates 8 bit data values into Keycode data in the following ways 8 Bit Data Value Keycode Data 0x00 to Ox1F and Ox7F to OxFF Decimal key unless otherwise noted CR 0x0D Enter key TAB 0x09 Tab key ESC 0x1B ESC key Printable characters 0x20 to Ox7E These all translate to the keystrokes that produce them This includes a z 0 9 punctuation and S
352. y window Also while the symbol is being inspected the Read Rate LEDs will indicate the corresponding Read Rate percentage on the back of the unit 2 To end the test click the Stop button Note Read Rate can also be tested using the Read Rate interface in Utilities Test Read Rate by Serial Command You can also start a test with the lt C gt or Cp command and end it with the lt J gt command 1 12 MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual Quick Start Step 10 Configure the Imager in ESP To make setup changes to the MINI Hawk click the App Mode button App Mode The following modes are accessible by clicking the buttons in the first row of App Mode icons Ser 9 Ww o B Ez Mode Autoconnect SendjRecv Switch Model Parameters Setup Terminal Utilities Click the EZ Mode button to return to EZ Mode Click the Autoconnect button to establish communication Click the Send Recv button to send or receive commands Click the Switch Model button to open the model menu or to return to a previous model Click the Parameters button to show the tabbed tree controls for Communication Read Cycle Symbologies I O Parameters Symbol Quality Matchcode and Diagnostics Click the Setup button to access a Camera Setup tree control and Video view and to Evaluate image captures Calibrate the imager set the Window of Interest fine tune capture settings and processing settings in the Config
353. ype format UPC E as UPC A gt Enabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 6 23 UPC EAN Supplementals Status UPC EAN Usage Reads Supplementals typically used in publications and documentation Definition A supplemental is a 2 to 5 digit symbol appended to the main symbol When set to Enabled or Required the imager reads supplemental code data that has been appended to the standard UPC or EAN codes Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Required Disabled UPC Supplementals will not be decoded Enabled When enabled the imager will try to decode a main and a supplemental However if a supplemental is not decoded the main will be sent by itself at the end of the read cycle Required When set to Required both the main and the supplemental symbols must be read or a single No Read condition results For example if Supplementals is set to Required Separator is enabled and an asterisk is defined as the UPC separator character Then the data is displayed as MAIN SUPPLEMENTAL Note Under no circumstances will the supplemental symbol data be sent without a main symbol Note If additional symbols other than the main or supplemental will be read in the same read cycle Number of Symbols should be set accordingly
354. ype of Keyboard Report used Report Type Data Content Keyboard IN imager to host Symbol data No Reads Service messages Note If Keyboard IN Reports is enabled and Microscan HID IN Reports is disabled the read cycle must be Continuous Read 1 Output because there will be no External Trigger or Serial Trigger It is not possible to send commands to the imager as Keyboard OUT Reports To send commands to the imager via USB the host application must establish a connection with the imager and send Microscan HID OUT Reports Serial Cmd lt K149 Microscan HID IN Report status Keyboard IN Report status Default 0 Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Keyboard IN Reports Enabled When this feature is enabled the imager will send Keyboard IN Reports to the host containing data originated by the imager Keyboard IN Reports Disabled When this feature is disabled the imager will not send Keyboard IN Reports to the host containing data originated by the imager MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User s Manual 3 25 USB HID Interface Microscan HID Report Format Size 64 bytes fixed length The USB HID standard defines all reports as being fixed length Structure REPORT ID 1 LENGTH 1 DATA 62 Values in parentheses indicate the size in bytes of the field Field Descriptions REPORT ID Size 1 byte Value 0x01 Note Report ID is the method employed by USB HID to allow multiple report formats to be sent and received from the

MINI Hawk High Performance Imager User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents